Digital Power Meter. IM E 5th Edition

Transcription

1 Digital Power Meter 5t Edition

2 Product Registration Tank you for purcasing YOKOGW products. YOKOGW provides registered users wit a variety of information and services. Please allow us to serve you best by completing te product registration form accessible from our omepage. ttp://tmi.yokogawa.com/ PIM E

3 Notes Trademarks Revisions Tank you for purcasing te YOKOGW WT210 or WT230 Digital Power Meter. Tis user s manual contains useful information about te functions, operating procedures, and andling precautions of te instrument. To ensure correct use, please read tis manual torougly before beginning operation. fter reading te manual, keep it in a convenient location for quick reference wenever a question arises during operation. Te contents of tis manual are subject to cange witout prior notice as a result of continuing improvements to te instrument s performance and functions. Te figures given in tis manual may differ from te actual screen. Every effort as been made in te preparation of tis manual to ensure te accuracy of its contents. However, sould you ave any questions or find any errors, please contact your nearest YOKOGW dealer. Copying or reproducing all or any part of te contents of tis manual witout te permission of Yokogawa Electric Corporation is strictly proibited. dobe and crobat are trademarks of dobe Systems Incorporated. Company and product names used in tis manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of teir respective olders. First Edition: June 2002 Second Edition: ugust 2002 Tird Edition: pril 2004 Fourt Edition: May 2009 Fift Edition: June t Edition: June 2013 (YMI) ll Rigts Reserved, Copyrigt 2002 Yokogawa Electric Corporation ll Rigts Reserved, Copyrigt 2013 Yokogawa Meters & Instruments Corporation i

4 Functional Comparison of te WT210/WT230 and WT200/WT110E/WT130 Tis section summarizes te functional differences between te WT210/WT230 and te conventional models WT200/WT110E/WT130. For more details on te functions and performance of te WT210/WT230, see te following sections. Item WT210/WT230 WT200/WT110E/WT130 (Conventional Models) Voltage input terminal Plug-in terminal Binding post (safety terminal structure) External sensor input terminal BNC connector Plug-in terminal (safety terminal structure) Basic voltage and 0.1% of reading 0.15% of reading current accuracy +0.1% of range +0.1% of range Basic power accuracy 0.1% of reading 0.2% of reading +0.1% of range +0.1% of range Frequency range DC, 0.5 Hz to 100 khz DC, 10 Hz to 20 khz Effective input range 1 to 130% of te rated range 10 to 130% of te rated range Measurement syncronization Select from voltage, current, WT200: Select voltage or current source and entire period of te display WT110E/WT130: No update rate. Line filter Yes (cutoff frequency 500 Hz) None Frequency filter Yes (cutoff frequency 500 Hz) Yes (cutoff frequency 300 Hz) MX old Yes WT200: Yes WT110E/WT130: No Peak value display Yes WT200: Yes, WT110E: Option WT130: Yes verage active power during Yes WT200: Yes integration WT110E/WT130: No Display update rate Select 0.1, 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, Fixed to 0.25 s or 5 s Number of displayed digits Select 4 or 5 digits WT200: Select 4 or 5 digits WT110E/WT130: Fixed to 4 digits Integration timer time ours maximum WT200: Resolution 1 s ours maximum Resolution 1 s WT110E/WT130: 999 ours 59 minutes maximum Resolution 1 min Display update during Select 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, or 5 s pprox. 3 s armonic measurement Remote control I/O signal wen EXT HOLD, EXT TRIG, EXT HOLD, EXT TRIG equipped wit te comparator EXT STRT, EXT STOP, function (/CMP option) EXT RESET, INTEG BUSY Communication Commands ll communication commands for conventional models can be used except te commands for te 2533E. Communication data format SCII and binary SCII ddressable mode B of GP-IB No Yes communications Baud rate of serial (RS-232-C) 1200 to 9600 bps 75 to 9600 bps communications Zero-level compensation Yes WT200: Yes, WT110E/WT130: No Key lock Yes No Power fuse Yes, part number 1347EF WT200: No, WT110E: No WT130: Yes, part number 1346EF ii

5 MODEL SUFFIX NO. Made in Japan MODEL SUFFIX NO. Made in Japan Cecking te Contents of te Package WT210/WT230 Unpack te box and ceck te contents before operating te instrument. If some of te contents are not correct or missing or if tere is pysical damage, contact te dealer from wic you purcased tem. Ceck tat te model name and suffix code given on te name plate on te rigt side panel wen facing te front panel matc tose on te order. WT210 (model: ) WT230 (model code: , ) MODEL SUFFIX NO. Made in Japan MODEL and SUFFIX codes Model SUFFIX Description WT210 Single-pase model (single input element model) WT230 Tree-pase, tree-wire model (two input element model) WT230 Tree-pase, four-wire model (tree input element model) Supply Voltage VC/ VC Communication interface -C1... GP-IB interface (One of te two is built-in -C2... Serial (RS-232-C) interface (applies to te WT230)) Power cord -D... UL/CS Standard power cord (Part No.: 1006WD) [Maximum rated voltage: 125 V; Maximum rated current: 7 ] -F... VDE Standard Power Cord (Part No.: 1009WD) [Maximum rated voltage: 250 V; Maximum rated current: 10 ] -Q... BS Standard Power Cord (Part No.: 1054WD) [Maximum rated voltage: 250 V; Maximum rated current: 10 ] -R... S Standard Power Cord (Part No.: 1024WD) [Maximum rated voltage: 240 V; Maximum rated current: 10 ] -H... GB Standard Power Cord (complies wit te CCC) (Part No.: 1064WD) [Maximum rated voltage : 250 V, Maximum rated current : 10 ] iii

6 Cecking te Contents of te Package Options Communication interface /C1 GP-IB interface (One of te two is provided /C2 Serial (RS-232-C) interface (applies to te WT210)) External sensor input function /EX1 2.5, 5, and 10 V range (One of te two is provided.) /EX2 50, 100, and 200 mv range Harmonic measurement function /HRM External I/O function /D4 4-cannel D/ output (applies to te WT210) (One of te tree is provided.) /D12 12-cannel D/ output (applies to te WT230) /CMP 4-cannel comparator, 4-cannel D/ output Ex: Tree-pase, tree-wire model, GP-IB interface, UL/CS Standard power cord, external sensor input for 50, 100, and 200 mv range, armonic measurement function, and 12- cannel D/ output C1-D/EX2/HRM/D12 NO. (Instrument Number) Wen contacting te dealer from wic you purcased te instrument, please give tem te instrument number. Standard ccessories Te standard accessories below are supplied wit te instrument. Ceck tat all contents are present and tat tey are undamaged. Name Part No. Q ty Description 1. Power cord See te 1 previous page 2. Power fuse 1347EF V, 1, time lag (attaced to te fuse older) pin connector 1004JD 1 For remote control and D/ output (provided only on options /D4, D12, and / CMP) 4. Current input B9317CY 1 For te WT210 protective cover B9317GY 1 For te WT230 (cover appropriate for te model provided) 5. Rubber feet for te 9088ZM 1 Two pieces in one set. One set provided. ind feet 6. User s Manual IM760401E-01 1 Tis manual 1. (One of te following power cords is supplied according to te instrument's suffix codes.) D F Q R H For te WT210 For te WT iv

7 Optional ccessories (Sold Separately) Te optional accessories below are available for purcase separately. Name Model Q ty Description Cecking te Contents of te Package 1. External sensor cable B9284LK 1 For connecting te current sensor input connector of te WT210/WT230, lengt 0.5 m 2. Measurement lead Two leads in one set, used wit te separately sold or adapter, lengt 0.75 m, ratings 1000 V 3. lligator clip adapter set Two pieces in one set, for te measurement lead. Rated voltage 300 V 4. lligator clip adapter set Two pieces in one set, for te measurement lead. Rated voltage 1000 V 5. Fork terminal adapter set Two pieces in one set, for te measurement lead. Rated current Safety terminal adapter set Two pieces in one set. Tis type olds measurement wires in place using springs. 7. Safety terminal adapter set Two pieces in one set. Tis type olds te measurement wires using screws. 8. Rack mount kit For details, see section Spare Parts (Sold Separately) Te spare parts below are available for purcase separately. Name Model Q ty Description Power fuse 1347EF V, 1, time lag v

8 Safety Precautions Tis instrument is an IEC safety class I instrument (provided wit terminal for protective eart grounding). Te following general safety precautions must be observed during all pases of operation. If te instrument is used in a manner not specified in tis manual, te protection provided by te instrument may be impaired. Yokogawa Electric Corporation assumes no liability for te customer s failure to comply wit tese requirements. For your safety, te following symbols and signal words are used on tis instrument. Handle wit care. (To avoid injury, deat of personnel or damage to te instrument, te operator must refer to te explanation in te user s manual or service manual.) Protective eart terminal. To ensure safe operation, if te current to be measured exceeds 7 (rms value), use a cable or conductor tat is capable of running a current iger tan te current to be measured, and be sure to connect te protective eart before operating te instrument. Te protective eart terminal is provided on te rear panel of products sipped in January 2004 and later. Electric sock, danger lternating current Bot direct and alternating current ON (power) OFF (power) ON (power) state OFF (power) state Eart vi

9 Make sure to comply wit te precautions below. Not complying migt result in injury or deat. WRNING Safety Precautions Power Supply Before connecting te power cord, ensure tat te source voltage matces te rated supply voltage of te WT210/WT230 and tat it is witin te maximum rated voltage of te provided power cord. Power Cord and Plug To prevent te possibility of electric sock or fire, be sure to use te power cord supplied by YOKOGW. Te main power plug must be plugged into an outlet wit a protective eart terminal. Do not invalidate tis protection by using an extension cord witout protective eart grounding. Protective Grounding Make sure to connect te protective eart to prevent electric sock before turning ON te power. Te power cord tat comes wit te instrument is a tree-pin type power cord. Connect te power cord to a properly grounded tree-pin outlet. Necessity of Protective Grounding Never cut off te internal or external protective eart wire or disconnect te wiring of te protective eart terminal. Doing so poses a potential sock azard. Defect of Protective Grounding Do not operate te instrument if te protective eart or fuse migt be defective. lso, make sure to ceck tem before operation. Fuse To avoid te possibility of fire, only use a fuse tat as a rating (voltage, current, and type) tat is specified by te instrument. Wen replacing a fuse, turn OFF te power switc and unplug te power cord. Never sort te fuse older. Do Not Operate in an Explosive tmospere Do not operate te instrument in te presence of flammable liquids or vapors. Operation in suc environments constitutes a safety azard. Do Not Remove Covers Te cover sould be removed by YOKOGW s qualified personnel only. Opening te cover is dangerous, because some areas inside te instrument ave ig voltages. External Connection Securely connect te protective grounding before connecting to te item under measurement or to an external control unit. If you are going to touc te circuit, make sure to turn OFF te circuit and ceck tat no voltage is present. See below for operating environmental limitations. CUTION Tis product is a Class (for industrial environments) product. Operation of tis product in a residential area may cause radio interference in wic case te user will be required to correct te interference. vii

10 Structure of te Manual Tis user s manual consists of te following sections: Startup Guide Using an example of measuring te inverter efficiency, te setup procedure from wiring te circuit to performing measurements and computation is explained. Capter 1 Capter 2 Capter 3 Capter 4 Capter 5 Capter 6 Capter 7 Capter 8 Capter 9 Capter 10 Capter 11 Capter 12 Functional Overview and Digital Display Describes te input signal flow, functional overview, digital numbers/caracters, initial menus tat are displayed wen a key is pressed, and oter information. Names and Functions of Parts and uto range Monitor, Overrange, and Error Displays Describes te names of eac part of te instrument and keys on te front panel. Before Starting Measurements Describes precautions to be taken wen using te instrument, ow to install te instrument, ow to connect te power supply, ow to turn ON/OFF te power switc, and ow to wire te measurement circuit. Setting Measurement Conditions and Measurement Range Describes ow to set measurement conditions suc as te measurement mode, filter ON/OFF, measurement range, external PT/CT, scaling wen using external sensors (sut, clamp, etc.), averaging, and crest factor. Displaying Measurement Results and Computation Results Explains te procedures for displaying parameters suc as te voltage, current, active power, apparent power, reactive power, power factor, pase angle, frequency, efficiency, crest factor, value derived from four aritmetical operations, average active power during integration, and peak value. Integration Explains te procedures for integrating active power and current. Harmonic Measurement Function (Option) Explains te procedures for performing armonic measurement. Store/Recall Function of Measured/Computed Data and Setup Parameters Describes ow to store/recall measured/computed data and setup parameters to/ from te internal memory. External I/O Function Describes ow to use te remote control (option), D/ output (option), and comparator (option) functions, and ow to output to external plotters and printers. GP-IB Interface (Option) Describes ow to control te WT210/WT230 from a PC and ow to retrieve measured/computed data on te WT210/WT230 to a PC using te GP-IB interface. Serial Interface (Option) Describes ow to control te WT210/WT230 from a controller suc as a PC and ow to retrieve measured/computed data on te WT210/WT230 to a controller using te serial (RS-232-C) interface. Initializing Setup Parameters, Zero-level Compensation, and Key Lock Describes te setup parameters tat are backed up and ow to initialize te settings. Capter 13 Communication Commands 1 (System of Commands before te IEEE Standard) Describes communication commands and sample programs tat follow te rules tat existed before te establisment of te IEEE Standard. Capter 14 Communication Commands 2 (System of Commands Complying to te IEEE Standard) Describes communication commands and sample programs tat comply wit te IEEE Standard. Capter 15 Capter 16 Index Maintenance and Troublesooting Describes ow to calibrate and adjust te instrument, ow to troublesoot problems, te error code information and corrective action, and ow to replace te power fuse. Specifications Summarizes te main specifications of te WT210/WT230 in a table. Index of contents. viii

11 Conventions Used in Tis Manual Symbol Markings Te following markings are used in tis manual. Improper andling or use can lead to injury to te user or damage to te instrument. Tis symbol appears on te instrument to indicate tat te user must refer to te user s manual for special instructions. Te same symbol appears in te corresponding place in te user s manual to identify tose instructions. In te manual, te symbol is used in conjunction wit te word WRNING or CUTION. WRNING Calls attention to actions or conditions tat could cause serious injury or deat to te user, and precautions tat can be taken to prevent suc occurrences. CUTION Calls attentions to actions or conditions tat could cause ligt injury to te user or damage to te instrument or user s data, and precautions tat can be taken to prevent suc occurrences. Tips, Note Calls attention to information tat is important for proper operation of te instrument. Caracters Displayed on te 7-Segment LED Because alpanumeric caracters are displayed on a 7-segment LED, some of te caracters are displayed using special formats. For details, see section 1.3, Digital Numbers and Caracters and Initial Menus (page 1-6). Symbols Used on Pages Describing Operating Procedures Te following symbols are used to distinguis te contents of te explanations. Keys Indicates te keys and indicators related to te settings. Procedure Te procedure is explained using a flow diagram. For te meaning of eac operation, see te example below. ll procedures are written wit inexperienced users in mind; exp erienced users may not need to carry out all te steps. ix

12 Conventions Used in Tis Manual Example 1. SHIFT SETUP OUTPUT 2. (Display C) 3. (Display C) End of setting Te flow diagram above indicates te following setup procedure. You can set up te display tat is blinking. 1. Press te SHIFT key to illuminate te SHIFT indicator and ten press te SETUP(OUTPUT) key. Te output setup menu appears on display C. 2. Press te or key to select rely. Te four selectable items appear repetitively by pressing eiter key. 3. Press te key to confirm te settings. Te setup menu corresponding to te function selected in step 2 appears on display C. 4. Press te or key to select off or on. Te six selectable items appear repetitively by pressing eiter key. 5. Press te key to confirm te settings. Wen entering a sign or a value, an under bar blinks at te corresponding entry digit if te digit is blank (space). Explanation Tis section describes te setup parameters and te limitations regarding te procedures. Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment New EU Battery Directive Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE), DIRECTIVE 2002/96/EC (Tis directive is valid only in te EU.) Tis product complies wit te WEEE Directive (2002/96/EC) marking requirement. Tis marking indicates tat you must not discard tis electrical/electronic product in domestic ouseold waste. Product Category Wit reference to te equipment types in te WEEE directive nnex I, tis product is classified as a Monitoring and Control instruments product. Do not dispose in domestic ouseold waste. Wen disposing products in te EU, contact your local Yokogawa Europe B. V. office. New EU Battery Directive, DIRECTIVE 2006/66/EC (Tis directive is valid only in te EU.) Batteries are included in tis product. Tis marking indicates tey sall be sorted out and collected as ordained in NNEX II in DIRECTIVE 2006/66/EC. Battery type: Litium battery You cannot replace batteries by yourself. Wen you need to replace batteries, contact your local Yokogawa Europe B.V.office. x IM E

13 Contents Functional Comparison of te WT210/WT230 and WT200/WT110E/WT ii Cecking te Contents of te Package... iii Safety Precautions...vi Structure of te Manual... viii Conventions Used in Tis Manual...ix Startup Guide Wiring te Circuit...S-2 Selecting te Wiring System...S-8 Selecting te Measurement Range...S-9 Displaying Voltage, Current, and ctive Power...S-12 Displaying te Efficiency...S-18 Capter 1 Functional Overview and Digital Display 1.1 System Configuration and Block Diagram Functions Digital Numbers and Caracters and Initial Menus Capter 2 Capter 3 Capter 4 IM E Names and Functions of Parts and uto Range Monitor, Overrange, and Error Displays 2.1 Front Panel, Rear Panel, and Top View Operation Keys and Functions/Element Display uto Range Monitor, Overrange, and Error Displays during Measurement Before Starting Measurements 3.1 Handling Precautions Installing te Instrument Wiring Precautions For Making ccurate Measurements Connecting te Power Supply Turning ON/OFF te Power Switc and Opening Message Directly Wiring te Circuit under Measurement Using an External PT or CT to Wire te Circuit under Measurement Using an External Sensor to Wire te Circuit under Measurement Selecting te Wiring System (pplies Only to te WT230) Setting Measurement Conditions and Measurement Range 4.1 Selecting te Measurement Mode Selecting te Measurement Syncronization Source Turning ON/OFF te Input Filter Selecting te Measurement Range Wen Using Direct Input Setting te Scaling Value Wen External PT/CT is Used Selecting te Measurement Range and Setting te Scaling Constant wen External Sensor is Used (option) Using te veraging Function Using te MX Hold Function Computing te Efficiency (pplies to WT230 Only) Computing te Crest Factor Performing Four ritmetical Operation xi Index

14 Content 4.12 Computing te verage ctive Power during Integration Selecting te Number of Displayed Digits and te Display Update Rate Selecting te Crest Factor Capter 5 Capter 6 Capter 7 Capter 8 Capter 9 Displaying Measurement Results and Computation Results 5.1 Displaying Voltage, Current and ctive Power Displaying pparent Power, Reactive Power and Power Factor Displaying te Pase ngle Displaying te Frequency Displaying Efficiency (WT230 Only), Crest Factor, Four ritmetic Operation Value, verage ctive Power, and Peak Value Integration 6.1 Integrator Functions Setting Integration Mode and Integration Timer Displaying Integrated Values Precautions Regarding Use of Integrator Function Harmonic Measurement Function (Option) 7.1 Harmonic Measurement Function Setting te Target Element, PLL Source and Harmonic Distortion Metod Turning ON/OFF te Harmonic Measurement Function Setting te Harmonic Order and Displaying te Measured Harmonic Value Store/Recall Function of Measured/Computed Data and Setup Parameters 8.1 Storing/Recalling Measured/Computed Data Storing/Recalling Setup Parameters External In/Output Function 9.1 Pin rrangement and Pin ssignments of te External I/O Connector (Option) Remote Control (Option) D/ Output (Option) Comparator Function (Option) Setting te Comparator Mode (Option) Setting te Comparator Limit Values (Option) Comparator Display (Option) Turning te Comparator Function ON/OFF (Option) Outputting to an External Plotter or External Printer Capter 10 GP-IB Interface (Option) 10.1 GP-IB Interface Functions and Specifications Responses to Interface Messages, and Remote/Local Modes Status Byte Format (before te IEEE Standard) Output Format for Measured/Computed Data, Setup Parameters, and Error Codes Setting te ddress and Mode Setting te Output Items Commands (before te IEEE Standard) xii IM E

15 Content Capter 11 Serial Interface (Option) 11.1 Serial Interface Functions and Specifications Connecting te Interface Cable Setting te Mode, Handsaking Metod, Data Format and Baud Rate Format and Commands of Output Data (before te IEEE488.2 Standard) Capter 12 Initializing Setup Parameters, Zero-Level Compensation, and Key Lock 12.1 Back-up of Setup Parameters Initializing Setup Parameters Performing Zero-Level Compensation Key Lock Capter 13 Communication Commands 1 (System of Commands before te IEEE Standard) 13.1 Commands Before Programming Sample Program Image Sample Program (Initialization, Error, and Execution Functions) Sample Program (Output of Normal Measurement Data) Sample Program (Output of Harmonic Measurement Data) Capter 14 Communication Commands 2 (System of Commands Complying to te IEEE Standard) 14.1 Overview of IEEE Program Format Symbols Used in Syntax Descriptions Messages Commands Responses Data Syncronization wit te Controller Commands Command List OUTput Group COMMunicate Group CONFigure Group DISPlay Group HRMonics Group INTEGrate Group MTH Group MESure Group RECall Group RELay Group SMPle Group STTus Group STORe Group Common Command Group Index IM E xiii

16 Content 14.4 Status Report Overview of te Status Report Status Byte Standard Event Register Extended Event Register Output Queue and Error Queue Before Programming Sample Program Image Sample Program (Initialization, Error, and Execution Functions) Sample Program (Output of Normal Measurement Data) Sample Program (Output of Harmonic Measurement Data) SCII Caracter Codes Communication-related Error Messages Capter 15 Maintenance and Troublesooting 15.1 djustments Calibration In Case of Malfunctioning Error Codes and Corrective ctions Replacing te Fuse Recommended Replacement Parts Capter 16 Specifications 16.1 Input ccuracy Functions External Sensor Input (/EX1 and /EX2 options) D/ Output (/D4, /D12, and /CMP Options) Comparator Output (/CMP Option) Remote Control Input/Output Signal (/D4, /D12, and /CMP Options) GP-IB Interface (standard on -C1, /C1 option) Serial (RS-232-C) Interface (Standard on -C2, /C2 Option) General Specifications Dimensional Drawings Index xiv

17 Startup Guide Startup Guide Tis guide covers an example of measuring te inverter efficiency and explains te setup procedure from wiring te circuit to performing measurements and computation. For a detailed description of te setup procedure, see te reference section indicated at te beginning of eac setup item. Startup Guide Page Wiring te Circuit... S-2 Installing te WT230...S-3 Connecting te WT230 Power Supply... S-4 Turning ON te Power to te WT230...S-4 Wiring te Circuit on te Primary Side of te Inverter... S-5 (Wiring a Single-Pase, Two-Wire System) Wiring te Circuit on te Secondary Side of te Inverter... S-6 (Wiring a Tree-Pase, Tree-Wire System) Selecting te Wiring System... S-8 Selecting te Measurement Range...S-9 Selecting te Voltage Range...S-9 Selecting te Current Range...S-10 Turning ON te Power to te Circuit under Measurement... S-11 Displaying Voltage, Current, and ctive Power... S-12 Displaying te Voltage on te Primary Side of te Inverter on Display... S-12 Displaying te Current on te Primary Side of te Inverter on Display B... S-13 Displaying te ctive Power on te Primary Side of te Inverter on Display C...S-14 Displaying te Voltage of te Secondary Side of te Inverter on Display... S-15 Displaying te Current on te Secondary Side of te Inverter on Display B... S-16 Displaying te ctive Power on te Secondary Side of te Inverter on Display C... S-17 Displaying te Efficiency...S-18 Setting te Efficiency Computation...S-18 Displaying te Efficiency...S-20 Confirming te Displayed Efficiency...S-21 S-1

18 Wiring te Circuit <<For details, see section 3.3.>> To prevent te possibility of electric sock and damage to te instrument, follow te warnings below. WRNING Employ protective eart ground before wiring measurement cables. Te power cord tat comes wit te instrument is a tree-pin type power cord. Connect te power cord to a properly grounded tree-pin outlet. Turn OFF te power to te circuit under measurement, wen wiring te circuit. Connecting or removing measurement cables wile te power is turned ON is dangerous. Take special caution not to wire a current measurement circuit to te voltage input terminal or a voltage measurement circuit to te current input terminal. Strip te insulation cover of te measurement cable so tat wen it is wired to te input terminal, te conductive parts (bare wires) do not protrude from te terminal. lso, make sure to fasten te input terminal screws securely so tat te cable does not come loose. Use cables wit safety terminals tat cover te conductive parts for connecting to te voltage input terminals. Using a terminal wit bare conductive parts (suc as a banana plug) is dangerous wen te terminal comes loose. fter connecting te measurement cable, attac te current input protection cover for your safety (screw tigtening torque: 0.6 N m). Make sure tat te conductive parts are not exposed from te protection cover. To make te protective functions effective, ceck te following items before applying te voltage or current of te circuit under measurement. Te power cable provided wit te instrument is used to connect to te power supply and te instrument is grounded. Te power switc of te instrument is turned ON. Te current input protective cover provided wit te instrument is being used. Oter important items concerning te safety wen wiring te circuit are described in section 3.3. Read and understand te information before wiring te circuit. S-2

19 Wiring te Circuit Below is a wiring example of a circuit used to measure te efficiency of an inverter using te WT230 Digital Power Meter (760503, tree-pase, four-wire model). To compute te efficiency on te WT230 (760503, tree-pase, four-wire model) wen te primary side of te inverter is a single-pase, two-wire system and te secondary side is a tree-pase, tree-wire system, wiring must be furnised to input elements 1 and 3 using a tree-pase, tree-wire system. Primary side Secondary side (Input) (Output) Wiring: Single-pase, two-wire Wiring: Tree-pase, tree-wire W2 Inverter W1 W3 W2: ctive power measured by input element 2 of te WT230 W1: ctive power measured by input element 1 of te WT230 W3: ctive power measured by input element 3 of te WT230 Load (Motor) Startup Guide Efficiency = Power consumed by te load (= W1 + W3) 100(%) Power supplied by te source (= W2) Installing te WT230 <<For details, see section 3.2.>> 1. Install te WT230 (760503, tree-pase, four-wire model). Install te inverter to be measured and te motor also. WT230 Voltage input terminal Current input terminal Inverter Motor Input element 1 Input element 2 Input element 3 S-3

20 Wiring te Circuit Connecting te WT230 Power Supply <<For details, see section 3.5.>> 2. Ceck tat te power switc on te WT230 (760503, tree-pase, four-wire model) is OFF. 3. Connect te power cord plug to te power connector on te rear panel of te WT230. (Use te power cord tat came wit te package.) 4. Plug te oter end of te power cord into a power outlet. 3-pin outlet WT230 Power cord (included in te package) Turning ON te Power to te WT230 <<For details, see section 3.6.>> 5. Press te power switc at te lower left corner of te front panel. test program starts wen te power switc is turned ON. fter an opening message appears, te WT230 is ready to make measurements. To suppress te error in te measured value tat occurs as time progresses after power-up, warm up te WT230 for at least 30 minutes before starting measurements. WT230 S-4

21 Wiring te Circuit Wiring te Circuit on te Primary Side of te Inverter (Wiring a Single-Pase, Two-Wire System) <<For details, see section 3.7.>> 6. Connect te voltage and current input terminals of input element 2 on te rear panel of te WT230 (760503, tree-pase, four-wire model) and te current measurement circuit and voltage measurement circuit on te primary side of te inverter. Wiring Diagram SOURCE ± V LOD SOURCE C V: VOLTGE terminal ± C: CURRENT terminal Input terminal (ELEMENT 2) ± C 2 V V2 ± LOD (Inverter: primary side) Startup Guide Wiring Example of a Current Measurement Circuit WT230 CURRENT terminal Inverter Motor ±terminal TO SOURECE Wiring Example of a Voltage Measurement Circuit WT230 ±terminal VOLTGE terminal Inverter Motor To SOURCE S-5

22 Wiring te Circuit Wiring te Circuit on te Secondary Side of te Inverter (Wiring a Tree-Pase, Tree-Wire System) 7. Connect te voltage and current input terminals of input elements 1 and 3 on te rear panel of te WT230 (760503) and te current measurement circuit and voltage measurement circuit of te secondary side of te inverter and te motor. Wiring Diagram SOURCE U(R) V(S) W(T) LOD SOURCE (Inverter: secondary side) U(R) C 1 ± V V1 ± Load (Motor) ± V ± V W(T) V(S) C ± Input terminal (ELEMENT 1) C ± Input terminal (ELEMENT 3) Wiring Example of a Current Measurement Circuit WT230 V: VOLTGE terminal C: CURRENT terminal 3 C ± ± V3 V Inverter Motor To SOURCE Wiring Example of a Voltage Measurement Circuit WT230 Inverter Motor To SOURCE S-6

23 Wiring te Circuit 8. ttac te current input protection cover (screw tigtening torque: 0.6 N m). Before attacing te current input protection cover, ceck tat te input terminal screws are securely fastened. Current input protective cover WT230 Inverter Motor Startup Guide To SOURCE S-7

24 Selecting te Wiring System <<For details, see section 3.10.>> fter wiring te circuit, select te wiring circuit. Select te wiring system to matc te circuit under measurement tat is actually wired. Wen input element Σ is selected, te average voltage or current of eac input element tat corresponds to te selected wiring system and te sum of powers of eac input element are displayed. For te computing equation of te sum of powers, see section For te procedure of selecting input element Σ, see pages S-15 to S-17. UTO RNGE UTO B C m V V k Var M W TIME m V PF k M W deg m V Hz k M W % Wiring system indicator ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT VOLTGE CURRENT HOLD MODE STRT HRMONICS REMOTE LOCL KEY LOCK 1P3W 3P4W MX HOLD STOP MEMORY SETUP OUTPUT 3P3W 3V3 TRIG CL INTEGRTOR RESET INTEG SET SHIFT WIRING Press WIRING to select wiring system 3P3W. Eac time WIRING is pressed, te wiring system indicator illuminates in te order sown in te figure below. Since te example in tis guide uses input element 1 and 3 of te WT230 (760503, tree-pase, four-wire model) wit te wiring system of te secondary side of te inverter set to tree-pase, tree-wire, wiring system 3P3W is selected. WIRING WIRING WIRING WIRING 1P3W 3P3W 3P4W 3V3 1P3W 3P3W 1P3W 3P3W 1P3W 3P3W 1P3W 3P3W 3P4W 3V3 3P4W 3V3 3P4W 3V3 3P4W 3V3 S-8

25 Selecting te Measurement Range <<For details, see section 4.4.>> fter selecting te writing system, select te measurement range (voltage and current ranges). Wen you select and confirm te measurement range, te measured values are indicated on te WT230 displays. Selecting te Voltage Range VOLT RNGE 300 B C m V V k Var M W TIME m V PF k M W deg m V Hz k M W % UTO indicator for current range ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT UTO MODE KEY LOCK 1P3W 3P4W RNGE UTO VOLTGE CURRENT HOLD STRT HRMONICS REMOTE LOCL MX HOLD STOP MEMORY SETUP OUTPUT 3P3W 3V3 TRIG CL INTEGRTOR RESET INTEG SET SHIFT WIRING Startup Guide For a description of te oter digital numbers and caracters tat are displayed on te 7-segment LED of eac display, see section Press VOLTGE. Te voltage range selection menu appears. Display C sows te voltage range selection wit blinking indication. If te voltage range ad been set to before tis step (UTO indicator for te voltage range is illuminated), te voltage range tat is automatically selected from te measured voltage is displayed blinking. 2. Press or to sow te desired voltage range on display C. 3. Press. Te voltage range is confirmed. Eac display sows te measured values. Te following flow cart illustrates steps 1 to 3. In te procedural explanation in capter 4 and beyond, similar flow diagrams are used. Wen te crest factor is set to 3 Wen te crest factor is set to 6 1. VOLTGE 2. ( Display C ) 3. End of setting 1. VOLTGE 2. ( Display C ) 3. End of setting S-9

26 Selecting te Measurement Range Selecting te Current Range UTO indicator for current range RNGE UTO UTO MP m V V k Var M W TIME ELEMENT VOLTGE CURRENT MODE MX HOLD HOLD TRIG RNGE B m V PF k M W deg % ELEMENT STRT STOP CL INTEGRTOR RESET HRMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET 1 C m V Hz k M W ELEMENT REMOTE LOCL KEY LOCK SETUP OUTPUT SHIFT 1P3W 3P3W WIRING 3P4W 3V3 For a description of te oter digital numbers and caracters tat are displayed on te 7-segment LED of eac display, see section Press CURRENT. Te current range selection menu appears. Display C sows te current range selection wit blinking indication. If te current range ad been set to before tis step (UTO indicator for te current range is illuminated), te current range tat is automatically selected from te measured current is displayed blinking. 5. Press or to sow te desired current range on display C. 6. Press. Te current range is confirmed. Eac display sows te measured values. Te following flow cart illustrates steps 4 to 6. Wen te crest factor is set to 3 4. ( Display C ) 6. CURRENT 5. End of setting More selections are displayed on products wit option /EX1 or /EX2. For details, see section 4.6. Wen te crest factor is set to 6 4. ( Display C ) 6. CURRENT 5. End of setting More selections are displayed on products wit option /EX1 or /EX2. For details, see section 4.6. S-10

27 Selecting te Measurement Range Turning ON te Power to te Circuit under Measurement Ceck te following items before turning on te power to te circuit under measurement. Te power supply of te WT230 is connected. Input terminal screws are securely fastened. Te current input protection covers are attaced. Te power to te WT230 is ON and it is ready to make measurements. 7. Turn ON te power to te circuit under measurement. 8. Operate te inverter to rotate te motor. Startup Guide S-11

28 Displaying Voltage, Current, and ctive Power <<For details, see section 5.1.>> fter selecting te measurement range (voltage and current ranges), select te measured items to be displayed in eac display. Displaying te Voltage on te Primary Side of te Inverter on Display Carry out te following procedure to display te voltage of te primary side of te inverter on display. Function indicator Element indicator RNGE UTO UTO m V V k Var ELEMENT VOLTGE CURRENT MODE MX HOLD HOLD TRIG M W TIME B m V PF k M W deg % ELEMENT STRT STOP CL INTEGRTOR RESET HRMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET C m V Hz k M W ELEMENT REMOTE LOCL KEY LOCK SETUP OUTPUT SHIFT 1P3W 3P3W WIRING 3P4W 3V3 1. Press of display to select function V. Eac time is pressed te function indicator caracter of display illuminates in te order sown below. To sow te measured voltage on display, we illuminate function V. Display V W V var TIME m V k M W V m V V m V V m V V m V V m V V var k var k var k var k var k var TIME M W TIME M W TIME M W TIME M W TIME M W TIME Te decimal point position moves so tat te measured value can be displayed witin te number of digits available on display. Te appropriate prefix symbol (m(10 3 ), k(10 3 ), or M(10 6 )) of te unit illuminates accordingly. 2. Press ELEMENT of display to select input element 2. Eac time ELEMENT is pressed te element indicator caracter of display illuminates in te order sown below. Te wiring system of te circuit on te primary side of te inverter is single-pase, two-wire, and te circuit is connected to input element 2 of te WT230. To sow te measured value of input element 2 on display, we illuminate input element 2. Display ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT Σ S-12

29 Displaying Voltage, Current, and ctive Power Displaying te Current on te Primary Side of te Inverter on Display B Carry out te following procedure to display te current of te primary side of te inverter on display B. B C Function indicator m V V k Var M W TIME m k M W PF deg m V Hz k M V W % Element indicator ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT UTO MODE HRMONICS REMOTE KEY LOCK 1P3W 3P4W RNGE UTO VOLTGE CURRENT HOLD STRT LOCL MX HOLD STOP MEMORY SETUP OUTPUT 3P3W 3V3 TRIG CL INTEGRTOR RESET INTEG SET SHIFT WIRING Startup Guide 3. Press of display B to select function. Eac time is pressed te function indicator caracter of display B illuminates in te order sown below. To sow te measured voltage on display B, we illuminate function. Display B V W PF deg m V PF k deg M W % m V PF k deg M W % m V PF k deg M W % m V PF k deg M W % m V PF k deg M W % Te decimal point position moves so tat te measured value can be displayed witin te number of digits available on display B. Te appropriate prefix symbol (m(10 3 ), k(10 3 ), or M(10 6 )) of te unit illuminates accordingly. Function indicator % illuminates only during armonic measurement. 4. Press ELEMENT of display B to select input element 2. Eac time ELEMENT is pressed te element indicator caracter of display B illuminates in te order sown below. Te wiring system of te circuit on te primary side of te inverter is single-pase, two-wire, and te circuit is connected to input element 2 of te WT230. To sow te measured value of input element 2 on display B, we illuminate input element 2. Display B ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT Σ S-13

30 Displaying Voltage, Current, and ctive Power Displaying te ctive Power on te Primary Side of te Inverter on Display C Carry out te following procedure to display te active power of te primary side of te inverter on display C. Function indicator Element indicator RNGE UTO UTO B C m V V k Var M W TIME m k M V W PF deg m V Hz k M W % ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT VOLTGE CURRENT HOLD MODE STRT HRMONICS REMOTE LOCL KEY LOCK 1P3W 3P4W MX HOLD STOP MEMORY SETUP OUTPUT 3P3W 3V3 TRIG CL INTEGRTOR RESET INTEG SET SHIFT WIRING 5. Press of display C to select function W. Eac time is pressed te function indicator caracter of display C illuminates in te order sown below. To sow te measured active power on display C, we illuminate function W. Display C V W V Hz Hz W m V k M W Hz m V k M W Hz m V k M W Hz m V k M W Hz m V k M W Hz m V k M W Hz & C m V k M W Hz m V k M W Hz W &V C m V k M W Hz m V k M W Hz W C m V k M W Hz m V k M W Hz m V k M W Hz m V k M W Hz Te decimal point position moves so tat te measured value can be displayed witin te number of digits available on display C. Te appropriate prefix symbol (m(10 3 ), k(10 3 ), or M(10 6 )) of te unit illuminates accordingly. Indicators W ± and ± illuminate twice consecutively. For a description of tese items, see page 6-3. If te first digit of display C sows (M), te result of computations suc as te efficiency, crest factor, and four aritmetic operations is displayed. If te first digit of display C sows and function V is illuminated, te peak voltage is displayed. If te first digit of display C sows and function is illuminated, te peak current is displayed. S-14

31 Displaying Voltage, Current, and ctive Power 6. Press ELEMENT of display C to select input element 2. Eac time ELEMENT is pressed te element indicator caracter of display C illuminates in te order sown below. Te wiring system of te circuit on te primary side of te inverter is single-pase, two-wire, and te circuit is connected to input element 2 of te WT230. To sow te measured value of input element 2 on display C, we illuminate input element 2. Display C ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT Σ Displaying te Voltage of te Secondary Side of te Inverter on Display Startup Guide Carry out te following procedure to display te voltage of te secondary side of te inverter on display. Function indicator Element indicator RNGE UTO UTO m V V k Var ELEMENT VOLTGE CURRENT MODE MX HOLD HOLD TRIG M W TIME B m V PF k M W deg % ELEMENT STRT STOP CL INTEGRTOR RESET HRMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET C m V Hz k M W ELEMENT REMOTE LOCL KEY LOCK SETUP OUTPUT SHIFT 1P3W 3P3W WIRING 3P4W 3V3 7. Press of display to select function V. For details, see step 1 of page S Press ELEMENT of display to select input element 1, 3 or Σ. Eac time ELEMENT is pressed te element indicator caracter of display illuminates in te order sown below. Te wiring system of te circuit on te secondary side of te inverter is tree-pase, tree-wire, and te circuit is connected to input elements 1 and 3 of te WT230. To sow te measured value of input element 1, 3, or Σ on display, we illuminate input element 1, 3, or Σ. Display ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT Σ Wen input element 1 is illuminated, te line voltage across pases U and V (see page S-5) on te secondary side of te inverter is indicated. Wen input element 3 is illuminated, te line voltage across pases W and V (see page S-5) on te secondary side of te inverter is indicated. Wen input element Σ is illuminated, te average of te line voltage across pases U and V and te voltage across pases W and V on te secondary side of te inverter is indicated. However, tis value does not ave any pysical meaning. S-15

32 Displaying Voltage, Current, and ctive Power Tips Tere are cases wen we wis to measure, as a voltage on te secondary side of te inverter, te converted rms voltage (rectified mean value calibrated to te rms value) tat is derived by summing te absolute values of te voltage over a single period, dividing te result by te time of one period, and making a conversion. Te WT230 provides a function for measuring te rectified mean value calibrated to te rms value of only te voltage. For te setup procedure, see section 4.1, Selecting te Measurement Mode. Displaying te Current on te Secondary Side of te Inverter on Display B Carry out te following procedure to display te current of te secondary side of te inverter on display B. Function indicator Element indicator RNGE UTO UTO m V V k Var ELEMENT VOLTGE CURRENT MODE MX HOLD HOLD TRIG M W TIME B m k M V W PF deg % ELEMENT STRT STOP CL INTEGRTOR RESET HRMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET C m V Hz k M W ELEMENT REMOTE LOCL KEY LOCK SETUP OUTPUT SHIFT 1P3W 3P3W WIRING 3P4W 3V3 9. Press of display B to select function. For details, see step 3 of page S Press ELEMENT of display B to select input element 1, 3 or Σ. Eac time ELEMENT is pressed te element indicator caracter of display B illuminates in te order sown below. Te wiring system of te circuit on te secondary side of te inverter is tree-pase, tree-wire, and te circuit is connected to input elements 1 and 3 of te WT230. To sow te measured value of input element 1, 3, or Σ on display B, we illuminate input element 1, 3, or Σ. Display B ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT Σ Wen input element 1 is illuminated, te line current of pase U (see page S-6) on te secondary side of te inverter is indicated. Wen input element 3 is illuminated, te line current of te W pase (see page S-6) on te secondary side of te inverter is indicated. Wen input element Σ is illuminated, te average of te line current of pase U and W on te secondary side of te inverter is indicated. However, tis value does not ave any pysical meaning. S-16

33 Displaying Voltage, Current, and ctive Power Displaying te ctive Power on te Secondary Side of te Inverter on Display C Carry out te following procedure to display te active power of te secondary side of te inverter on display C. B C Function indicator m V V k Var M W TIME m k M V W PF deg m V Hz k M W % Element indicator ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT UTO MODE HRMONICS REMOTE KEY LOCK 1P3W 3P4W RNGE UTO VOLTGE CURRENT HOLD STRT LOCL MX HOLD STOP MEMORY SETUP OUTPUT 3P3W 3V3 TRIG CL INTEGRTOR RESET INTEG SET SHIFT WIRING Startup Guide 11. Press of display C to select function W. For details, see step 5 of page S Press ELEMENT of display C to select input element 1, 3 or Σ. Wen input element Σ is illuminated, te sum of active powers measured on input element 1 and 3 is displayed. Tis value is te power consumed by te load wen computing te efficiency. Eac time ELEMENT is pressed te element indicator caracter of display C illuminates in te order sown below. Te wiring system of te circuit on te secondary side of te inverter is tree-pase, tree-wire, and te circuit is connected to input elements 1 and 3 of te WT230. To sow te measured value of input element 1, 3, or Σ on display C, we illuminate input element 1, 3, or Σ. Display C ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT Σ Wen input element 1 is illuminated, te active power measured on input element 1 is displayed. Wen input element 3 is illuminated, te active power measured on input element 3 is displayed. Wen input element Σ is illuminated, te sum of active powers measured on input element 1 and 3 is displayed. Tis value is te power consumed by te load wen computing te efficiency. Tips Te WT210/WT230 is equipped wit an input filter function for eliminating noise on te measured signal and more accurately measuring te frequency of te measured signal. For te setup procedure, see section 4.3, Turning ON/OFF te Input Filter. Te WT230 as a function tat is used to perform exponential or moving averaging on te measured values before displaying tem wen te measured values are not stable. For te setup procedure, see section 4.7, Using te veraging Function. S-17

34 Displaying te Efficiency fter wiring te circuit, selecting te wiring system, and selecting te measurement range (voltage and current ranges), set te efficiency computation. Te computed results of efficiency can be sown on display C. Setting te Efficiency Computation <<For details, see section 4.9.>> RNGE UTO UTO SETUP m V V k Var M W TIME ELEMENT VOLTGE CURRENT MODE MX HOLD HOLD TRIG B m V PF k M W deg % ELEMENT STRT STOP CL INTEGRTOR RESET HRMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET MTH C m V Hz k M W ELEMENT REMOTE LOCL KEY LOCK SETUP OUTPUT SHIFT 1P3W 3P3W WIRING 3P4W 3V3 RNGE UTO UTO SETUP MTH EFFI B C m V V k Var M W TIME m V PF k M W deg m V Hz k M W ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT VOLTGE CURRENT HOLD MODE STRT HRMONICS REMOTE LOCL KEY LOCK For a description of te oter digital numbers and caracters tat are displayed on te 7-segment LED of eac display, see section 1.3. % 1P3W 3P4W MX HOLD STOP MEMORY SETUP OUTPUT 3P3W 3V3 TRIG CL INTEGRTOR RESET INTEG SET SHIFT WIRING 1. Press SETUP. Te setup menu is displayed. 2. Press or to sow (MTH) on display C. 3. Press. Te selection of te computation function is confirmed, and a menu used to select te computed items is sown on display C. (MTH) moves to display B. 4. Press or to sow (EFFI, efficiency) on display C. 5. Press. Efficiency computation is confirmed as a computed item. Eac display returns to te condition in wic te measured values are displayed. S-18

35 Displaying te Efficiency Te following flow cart illustrates steps 1 to 5. In te procedural explanation in capter 4 and beyond, similar flow diagrams are used. 1. SETUP Select te four aritmetic operation function ( Display C ) ( Display C ) 5. End of setting Startup Guide S-19

36 Displaying te Efficiency Displaying te Efficiency <<For details, see section 5.5.>> 6. Displaying Efficiency on display C Press on display C to sow (M) on display C. If (EFFI) is selected in step 4 of page S-18, efficiency is displayed. Te efficiency value is displayed as a percentage. Display C V W V Hz Hz W m V k M W Hz m V k M W Hz m V k M W Hz m V k M W Hz m V k M W Hz m V k M W Hz & C m V k M W Hz m V k M W Hz W &V C m V k M W Hz m V k M W Hz W C m V k M W Hz m V k M W Hz m V k M W Hz m V k M W Hz Display example of efficiency C m V Hz k M W ELEMENT Tis completes te setup procedures for wiring te circuit, selecting te wiring system, selecting te measurement range, and displaying te efficiency. S-20

37 Displaying te Efficiency Confirming te Displayed Efficiency To confirm te efficiency value tat is sown, we will display te active power on te primary side of te inverter (power supplied by te source) on display and te active power on te secondary side of te inverter (power consumed by te load) on display B. 1. Display te active power on te primary side of te inverter on display. Press of display to select function W. Press ELEMENT of display to select input element Display te active power on te secondary side of te inverter on display B. Press of display B to select function W. Press ELEMENT of display B to select input element Σ. 3. Display efficiency on display C. Press on display C to sow on display C. If is selected in step 4 of page S-18, efficiency is displayed. Startup Guide Confirmation Example of te Displayed Efficiency Te following figure sows te case in wic displays, B, and C are sowing te active power on te primary side of te inverter (power supplied by te source), te active power on te secondary side of te inverter (power consumed by te load), and te efficiency, respectively. If we divide te value sown on display B by te value sown on display and convert te result to a percentage, we obtain te efficiency value sown on display C. ctive power on te secondary side of te inverter (W) (Power consumed by te load) ctive power on te primary side of te inverter (W) (Power supplied by te source) Value sown on display B Value sown on display 27.97(W) 38.28(W) % wen converted to a percentage B C m V V k Var M W TIME m V PF k M W deg m V Hz k M W % ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT S-21

38 Functional Overview and Digital Display Capter 1 Functional Overview and Digital Display 1.1 System Configuration and Block Diagram 1 System Configuration PT Voltage input Input eiter one Digital power meter Contact / relay output Block Diagram Equipment under test CT Ext. sensor Model Input Section Built-in input element Built-in input element 1 and 3 Built-in input element 1, 2, and 3 Current input Input eiter one WT210 (760401) WT230 (760502,760503) nalog output GP-IB or RS-232-C Recorder Personal Computer Ext. printer or plotter Input section ( input element 1) CPU section Voltage input section Sampling Clock DSP CPU /D ISO ROM RM LPF Current input section LPF Zero Cross Detector /D Zero Cross Detector ISO Lead/Lag Detector EEPROM /D interface Frequency Detector Harmonics PLL RM (Option) Key & Display Controller 7-segment LED GP-IB or Serial (RS-232-C) (For WT210, option) D/ Output EEPROM (Option) Comparator Input section ( input element 2) (Option) Input section ( input element 3) WT210 s Current input section Current input section /D LPF Current Over Detector Zero Cross Detector ISO 1-1

39 1.1 System Configuration and Block Diagram Signal Flow and Process Te sections tat make up te WT210/WT230 are VOLTGE INPUT, CURRENT INPUT, DSP, CPU, display, and interface. In te voltage input circuit, te input voltage is normalized by a voltage divider and operational amplifier, ten sent to te /D converter. Sunt resistors form a close circuit at te current input circuit. Te voltage across sunt resistor is amplified and normalized by te operational amplifier and ten input to te /D converter. Tis metod enables switcing of te current range witout opening te current input circuit, so te current range can be switced wile power is supplied to te circuit. Tis also enables remote control via communications outputs. Te WT210 equipped wit two sunt resistors, one for minute currents and anoter for large currents,. Te output from te /D converter in te current input and voltage input circuits is sent to te DSP (Digital Signal Processor) via a poto-isolator (ISO), wic is used to provide insulation between te current input circuit (or voltage circuit) and te DSP. During normal measurement, te DSP converts digital values sampled at a period of approximately 20 µs to voltage, current, and active power; sums te values over a predetermined period; and ten divides te sum by te number of samples to derive te measured value of voltage, current, and active power. In addition, to acieve ig accuracy, te start and end points of sampling are determined by syncronizing to te zero-crossing point of te voltage or current signal tat you select to be measured. From te voltage, current, and active power, te DSP computes te apparent power, reactive power, power factor, and pase angle and performs processing suc as scaling and averaging. During armonic measurement, te DSP performs FFT based on te digital values sampled at an integer multiple of te period of te PLL source signal (period of te clock tat te PLL circuit generates) and determines te measured values of various items of armonic measurement. Te measured value is transmitted to te CPU section. Various computed values suc as Σ and MTH are determined from te measured values. Tese measured values and computed values are displayed (on te 7-segment LED), output troug a D/ converter, or output troug communications. During normal measurement, te processing on te DSP and CPU is pipelined, and te DSP processing is performed in real-time. Terefore, measurements wit few data dropouts can be acieved against te input signal. 1-2

40 Functional Overview and Digital Display 1.2 Functions 1 Input Functions Voltage and Current Input Sections Te WT210/WT230 is a digital power meter tat can measure te RMS value of voltage or current, or active power by applying voltage and current signals to te voltage and current input sections, respectively. From te measured values of voltage, current, and active power, power elements suc as apparent power, reactive power, power factor, and pase angle can be determined. Frequency Measuring Range Measurement of DC voltage, current and power as well as C voltage, current, and power in te frequency range of 0.5 Hz to 100 khz. Input Filter Te following two types of input filters are provided. Te filters eliminates noise suc as inverter waveforms and distorted waveforms and allow stable measured values to be obtained. Line Filter Tis filter is inserted only into te measurement circuit. It eliminates noise components of te input signal. Te cutoff frequency is 500 Hz. Frequency Filter Tis filter is inserted only into te frequency measurement circuit. Te cutoff frequency is 500 Hz. Since te WT210/230 is making measurements in sync wit te input signal, te frequency of te input signal must be measured correctly. Wiring System Te input units for voltage or current are located on te rear panel of tis instrument. Tese units are called input elements. Te number of input elements depends on te model, and te possible wiring systems are sown in te table below. Te wiring system indicates te circuit configuration for measuring voltage, current, and power. Te name of te system varies depending on te pase and number of electrical wires making up te circuit. Display Functions Model Number of Elements Wiring Systems Supported Single-pase, two-wire (1P2W) Single-pase, two-wire (1P2W); single-pase, tree-wire (1P3W); tree-pase, tree-wire (3P3W) Single-pase, two-wire (1P2W); single-pase, tree-wire (1P3W); tree-pase, tree-wire (3P3W); tree-pase, fourwire (3P4W); tree-voltage, tree-current (3V3) Measured/computed values are displayed on tree red ig-intensity 7-segment LED displays. You can view tree values simultaneously. You can select te display update rate (0.1 s to 5 s) and te number of displayed digits (4 or 5) for voltage, current, and active power values. Peak Measurement Function Tis function measures te peak values of te voltage and current. Tis value is used to compute te crest factor. MX Hold Function Tis function olds te maximum values of te voltage, current, active power, apparent power, reactive power, voltage peak, and current peak. It olds te maximum value tat exists wile te MX old function is enabled. 1-3

41 1.2 Functions Computation Function pparent Power, Reactive Power, Power Factor and Pase ngle Based on te measurement values of voltage, current and active power, te values of apparent power, reactive power, power factor and pase angle can be computed. Scaling Wen performing voltage or current measurements wit items suc as external PT, CT, sunt, and external sensor (clamp), you can set a scaling factor to te primary/ secondary ratio. Tis is called scaling. Tis function enables display of te measured values of voltage, current, active power, reactive power, integrated current and integrated power factor in terms of primary-side values. veraging Tis function is used to perform exponential or moving averaging on te measured values before displaying tem wen te measured values are not stable. Efficiency (applicable only to te WT230) Efficiency can be computed on models wit multiple input elements. Crest Factor Tis function determines te crest factor of te voltage and current using peak/rms values. Four ritmetic Operation Displays six types of computed results. (+B, B, B, /B, 2 /B, /B 2 ) verage ctive Power during Integration Tis function computes te average active power witin te integration period. It is derived by dividing te watt our (integrated active power) by te elapsed time of integration. Integrator Function Tis function enables integration of active power and current. Te integrated value (watt our or current our) and te elapsed time of integration as well as oter measured (computed) values can be displayed even wile te integration is in progress. Moreover, since integrated values of negative polarity can be displayed, te consumed watt our (ampere our) value of te positive side and te watt our value returning to te power supply of te negative side can be displayed separately. Frequency Measurement Function Tis function measures te frequency of te voltage or current. Measurable range: 0.5 Hz to 100 khz (Te measurement range varies depending on te display update rate.) Harmonic Measurement Function (Option) Tis function enables te computation of voltage, current, active power and so fort of up to te 50 t order, te relative armonic content of armonic orders, and te pase angle of eac order wit respect to te fundamental (first order) on a single selected input element. Furtermore, te total rms value (fundamental + armonic) of te voltage, current and active power, and te armonic distortion factor (THD) can be calculated. Store/Recall Function of Measured/Computed Data and Setup Parameters Tis function enables te storage of measured/computed data and setup parameters in te internal memory. Te stored measured/computed data and setup parameters can be recalled, and te data can be displayed or output via te communication interface. D/ Output Function (Option) Tis function converts te measured values of voltage, current, active power, apparent power, reactive power, power factor, pase angle, frequency, voltage peak, current peak, and integrated values to DC analog voltage wit full scale of ±5 V and outputs te voltage. Output items of up to 12 output cannels (4 cannels on WT210) can be selected. 1-4

42 Functional Overview and Digital Display 1.2 Functions Comparator Function (Option) Tis function compares a preset limit and te measured, computed, or integrated value, and outputs te determination result using relay contacts. Remote Control Function (Option) On models wit te /D4, /D12, or /CMP option, te TTL logic signal (negative pulse) can be used to control te WT210/WT230 or output externally. External Input Te following five types of control signals are available. EXT HOLD Holds updating of te displayed values or releases te old status. EXT TRIG Updates te displayed values in old mode. EXT STRT Starts integration. EXT STOP Stops integration. EXT RESET Resets te integration result. 1 External Output Te following signal is output during integration. INTEG BUSY Outputs continuously from integration start troug integration stop. Communication Functions (Option on te WT210, Standard on te WT230) You can select GP-IB interface or serial (RS-232-C) interface. Measured/computed data of up to 14 cannels can be output to your PC via te communication interface. You can also set various functions of te WT210/WT230 from your PC. Output Function to an External Plotter and Printer Measured/computed data can be printed on an external plotter or printer via te GP-IB or serial (RS-232-C) interface. Oter Functions Backup Function of Setup Parameters Tis function backs up setup parameters (including computed values) if te power is cut off suc as a result of a power failure. Initialization of Setup Parameters Tis function initializes te setup parameters to factory default. Zero Level Compensation Zero level compensation refers to creating a zero input condition inside te WT210/ WT230 and setting te level at tat point as te zero level. Zero level compensation must be performed in order to satisfy te specifications of tis instrument. Wen te measurement range is canged, zero level compensation is performed automatically. However, if te measurement range is not canged for a long time, te zero level may sift due to environmental canges around te instrument. In suc case, you can manually perform zero level compensation. Key Lock Setup operations using front panel keys can be disabled except for te power switc and KEY LOCK switc. 1-5

43 1.3 Digital Numbers and Caracters and Initial Menus Digital Numbers and Caracters Because te WT210/WT230 uses a 7-segment LED display, numbers, alpabets, and operation symbols are represented using special caracters as follows. Some of te caracters are not used B C D E F G H I J Small c Small K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z + (Exponent) Initial Menus Eac function of te WT210/WT230 is set using a menu tat appears on te display. Te initial menu tat appears wen te operation keys are pressed are sown below. Voltage Range Setting Wen te crest factor is set to 3 1. (Display C) VOLTGE 2. Wen te crest factor is set to 6 1. (Display C) VOLTGE 2. Current Range Setting Wen te crest factor is set to 3 1. (Display C) CURRENT 2. For option /EX1 (Display C) For option /EX2 (Display C) On te WT210, 5 to 200 m range can also be specified. 1-6

44 Functional Overview and Digital Display 1.3 Digital Numbers and Caracters and Initial Menus Wen te crest factor is set to 6 1. (Display C) CURRENT 2. For option /EX1 (Display C) For option /EX2 (Display C) 1 Filter/Scaling/veraging/External Sensor Input/Initializing set-up parameters 1. (Display C) SETUP 2. (Set te line filter) (Set te frequency filter) (Set averaging) (Set scaling) (Set te external sensor input) (Initialize te setup parameters) (Select te computation item) (Select te measurement syncronization source) (Select te number of displayed digits) (Select te display update rate) (Select te crest factor) Integration Setting 1. SHIFT RESET INTEG SET 2. (Display C) (Set te integration mode) (Set te integration timer) (Set te rated integration time) Turning te Harmonic Measurement Function ON/OFF 1. (Display C) STRT (Set OFF) SHIFT HRMONICS 2. (Set ON) (Sets te target element (WT230 only)) (Set te PLL source) (Select te computation metod of armonic distortion) Storing/Recalling to/from Internal Memory 1. ( Display C ) STOP (Set measured data storage) SHIFT MEMORY 2. (Set measured data recall) (Set setup parameter storage) (Set setup parameter recall) 1-7

45 1.3 Digital Numbers and Caracters and Initial Menus Setting Output 1. SHIFT SETUP OUTPUT 2. (Display C) (Set te communication, plotter, and printer output items) (Execute plotter or printer output) (Set te D/ output) (Set te comparator and relay output) Setting Communication Interface (GP-IB) 1. (Display C) LOCL 2. (Set addressable mode) (Set talk-only mode) (Set te print mode and plotter or printer output) (Set communication commands according to IEEE ) Setting Communication Interface (Serial) 1. (Display C) LOCL 2. (Set normal mode) (Set talk-only mode) (Set te print mode and plotter or printer output) (Set communication commands according to IEEE ) 1-8

46 Names and Functions of Parts and uto Range Monitor, Overrange, and Error Displays Capter 2 Names and Functions of Parts and uto Range Monitor, Overrange, and Error Displays 2.1 Front Panel, Rear Panel, and Top View Front Panel WT210 (model: ) WT230 (model: , ) 7-segment display Function/Unit display Keys (Section 2.2) 7-segment display Function/Unit/Element display Keys (Section 2.2) 2 Handle Handle Power switc (Section 3.6) Vent oles Power switc (Section 3.6) Vent oles Rear Panel WT210 (model: ) WT230 (model: , ) External sensor input connector (Section 3.9) Current input terminal (Sections 3.7 to 3.8) Voltage input terminal (Sections 3.7 to 3.9) Current input terminal (Sections 3.7 to 3.8) Voltage input terminal (Sections 3.7 to 3.9) GP-IB or SERIL connector (Capters 10 and 11) External I/O connector Capter 9 Power fuse (Section 15.5) Power connector (Section 3.5) GP-IB or SERIL connector (Capters 10 and 11) Protective eart terminal (Page vi) External I/O connector (Capter 9) Input element 1 Input element 2 Input element 3 Protective eart terminal (Page vi) Power fuse (Section 15.5) Power connector (Section 3.5) External sensor input connector (Section 3.9) Top View WT210 (model: ) WT230 (model: , ) Rear panel Rear panel Vent oles Vent oles Front panel Front panel 2-1

47 2.2 Operation Keys and Functions/Element Display Operation Keys and Function Displays on te WT210 (model: ) Operation status indicator Indicates data updating, voltage/current range ceck, and measurement mode status. (Sections 2.3, 4.1, and 4.3) VOLTGE Displays te voltage range setup menu. (Section 4.4) CURRENT Displays te current range setup menu. (Section 4.4) VOLTGE SHIFT MODE Switces te measurement mode. (Section 4.1) UTO indicator Illuminates wen range is set to UTO. Sets te function to be displayed. (Capter 5, sections 6.3 and 7.4) Function/Unit display CURRENT SHIFT MX HOLD Turns ON/OFF te MX old function. Wen turned ON, te MX indicator illuminates. (Section 4.8) HOLD Holds te displayed value. Te HOLD indicator illuminates. Press te key again to turn off te indicator and release te old. HOLD SHIFT TRIG Updates te displayed values in old mode. Decreases te voltage or current range and sets functions and values. UPDTE CHECK RNGE VOLTGE CURRENT MODE RMS VOLTGE MEN DC MX HOLD B C FILTER SCLING VG LINE FREQ STORE RECLL HRMONICS KEY LOCK STRT SHIFT HRMONICS Displays te setup menu for turning ON/OFF armonic measurement and setting te PLL source. (Sections 7.2 and 7.3) STOP SHIFT MEMORY Displays te setup menu for storing and recalling measured data and setup parameters. (Capter 8) LOCL Releases te communication remote status wen te REMOTE indicator is illuminated. Displays te setup menu for te output mode to te plotter/printer and communication functions wen te REMOTE indicator is not illuminated. (Sections 9.9, 10.5, and 11.3) LOCL SHIFT KEY LOCK Turns ON/OFF key lock. (Section 12.4) m V V k Var M W TIME m V PF SETUP SHIFT OUTPUT Displays te setup menu for D/ output, comparator function, communication output items, and te execution menu for plotter/printer output. (Sections 9.3, 9.5 to 9.9, and 10.6) Function operation indicator Te indicator illuminates wen te function assigned to te indicator is in operation. k M W deg m V Hz k M W % UTO VOLTGE CURRENT MODE STRT HRMONICS REMOTE LOCL KEY LOCK RNGE UTO MX HOLD STOP MEMORY SETUP OUTPUT HOLD TRIG CL INTEGRTOR RESET INTEG SET SHIFT Increases te voltage or current range and sets functions and values. Confirms te specified range, function, or value. SHIFT Moves along te digits of te value from te left to te rigt. SHIFT Moves te decimal point from te left to te rigt. SHIFT CL Performs zero level compensation (Section 12.3) STRT Starts integration. STOP Stops integration. RESET Sets te integrated value and te elapsed time of integration to zeroes. RESET SHIFT INTEG SET Displays te setup menu for integration mode/timer and integration preset time. (Section 6.2) SETUP Sets te measurement syncronization source, input filter, scaling, external sensor input, averaging, computation, number of displayed digits, display update rate, crest factor, initialization of setup parameters, and oter items. (Sections 4.2, 4.3, 4.5 to 4.7, 4.9 to 4.14, and 12.2) 2-2

48 Names and Functions of Parts and uto Range Monitor, Overrange, and Error Displays 2.2 Operation Keys and Functions/Element Display Operation Keys and Function Displays on te WT230 (model: , ) Operation status indicator Indicates data updating, voltage/current range ceck, and measurement mode status. (Sections 2.1, 4.1, and 4.13) VOLTGE Displays te voltage range setup menu. (Section 4.4) CURRENT Displays te current range setup menu. (Section 4.4) VOLTGE SHIFT MODE Switces te measurement mode. (Section 4.1) UTO indicator Illuminates wen range is set to UTO. ELEMENT Sets te input element to be displayed. Te indicator of te corresponding element illuminates. (Capter 5, sections 6.3 and 7.4) CURRENT SHIFT MX HOLD Turns ON/OFF te MX old function. Wen turned ON, te MX indicator illuminates. (Section 4.8) HOLD Holds te displayed value. Te HOLD indicator illuminates. Press te key again to turn off te indicator and release te old. HOLD SHIFT TRIG Updates te displayed values in old mode. Decreases te voltage or current range and sets functions and values. 2 B C UPDTE Sets te function to be displayed. (Capter 5, sections 6.3 and 7.4) Function/Unit display CHECK RNGE VOLTGE FILTER MODE CURRENT RMS VOLTGE DC MEN MX HOLD m V V k Var SCLING VG LINE FREQ STORE RECLL HRMONICS KEY LOCK STRT SHIFT HRMONICS Displays te setup menu for turning ON/OFF armonic measurement, setting te PLL source, and te element to be measured. (Sections 7.2 and 7.3) STOP SHIFT MEMORY Displays te setup menu for storing and recalling measured data and setup parameters. (Capter 8) LOCL Releases te communication remote status wen te REMOTE indicator is illuminated. Displays te setup menu for te output mode to te plotter/printer and communication functions wen te REMOTE indicator is not illuminated. (Sections 9.9, 10.5, and 11.3) LOCL SHIFT KEY LOCK Turns ON/OFF key lock. (Section 12.4) M UTO SETUP SHIFT OUTPUT Displays te setup menu for D/ output, comparator function, communication output items, and te execution menu for plotter/printer output. (Sections 9.3, 9.5 to 9.9, and 10.6) Function operation indicator Te indicator illuminates wen te function assigned to te indicator is in operation. W TIME m V PF k M W deg m V Hz k M W % ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT VOLTGE CURRENT MODE STRT HRMONICS REMOTE LOCL KEY LOCK 1P 3W 3P 4W RNGE UTO MX HOLD STOP MEMORY SETUP OUTPUT 3P 3W 3V 3 HOLD TRIG CL INTEGRTOR RESET INTEG SET SHIFT WIRING Increases te voltage or current range and sets functions and values. Confirms te specified range, function, or value. SHIFT Moves along te digits of te value from te left to te rigt. SHIFT Moves te decimal point from te left to te rigt. SHIFT CL Performs zero level compensation (Section 12.3) STRT Starts integration. STOP Stops integration. RESET Sets te integrated value and te elapsed time of integration to zeroes. RESET SHIFT INTEG SET Displays te setup menu for integration mode/timer and integration preset time. (Section 6.2) WIRING Sets te wiring system according to te wiring to te voltage/current terminals on te rear panel. (Section 3.10) SETUP Sets te measurement syncronization source, input filter, scaling, external sensor input, averaging, computation, number of displayed digits, display update rate, crest factor, initialization of setup parameters, and oter items. (Sections 4.2, 4.3, 4.5 to 4.7, 4.9 to 4.14, and 12.2) 2-3

49 2.3 uto Range Monitor, Overrange, and Error Displays during Measurement Overrange Display During normal measurement, overrange occurs wen te measured voltage V or measured current exceeds 140% of te rated range. Wen using auto range, te range automatically steps up. Overrange occurs wen 140% of te maximum range is exceeded. Overrange is indicated as follows: For te conditions in wic overrange display occurs in armonic measurement, see section 7.1. Computation Over Display If te computed value overflows during te computation process, it is indicated as follows: uto Range Monitor Te indicator illuminates wen te input signal meets te conditions for auto range switcing. For details on te auto range function, see section 4.4. WT210 indicator CHECK RNGE VOLTGE WT230 indicator CHECK RNGE VOLTGE CURRENT CURRENT Display Wen te Measured Value is too Small If te measured voltage or current drops below 0.5% (less tan or equal to 1% if te crest factor is set to 6) of te rated range, te condition is indicated as sown below. Tis applies only wen te measurement mode (section 4.1, Selecting te Measurement Mode ) is set to RMS or VOLTGE MEN. Function V (voltage) (current) V (apparent power) var (reactive power) PF (power factor) deg (pase angle) Display Displays zero. Measurement bort/no Data Display (Bar Display) If you cange te displayed information by canging te measurement range or te function/element or tere is no data to be displayed, te following bar display appears temporarily. 2-4

50 Before Starting Measurements Capter 3 Before Starting Measurements 3.1 Handling Precautions Safety Precautions If you are using tis instrument for te first time, make sure to torougly read te Safety Precautions given on page vi and vii. Do not remove te case. Some sections inside te instrument ave ig voltages tat are extremely dangerous. For internal inspection or adjustment, contact your nearest YOKOGW dealer. bnormal Beavior Stop using te instrument if tere are any symptoms of trouble suc as strange odors or smoke coming from te instrument. If tese symptoms occur, immediately turn OFF te power and unplug te power cord. In addition, turn OFF te power to te DUT tat is connected to te input terminal. Ten, contact your nearest YOKOGW dealer. Power Cord Noting sould be placed on top of te power cord. Te power cord sould also be kept away from any eat sources. Wen unplugging te power cord from te outlet, never pull by te cord itself. lways old and pull by te plug. If te cord is damaged, contact your dealer for replacement. Refer to page iii for te part number of te appropriate power cord wen placing an order. General Handling Precautions Do not place objects on top of te instrument. Never place oter instruments or any objects containing water on top of te instrument. Suc act can lead to malfunction. Wen Carrying te Instrument First, turn off te object to be measured and remove all cables including measurement cables and communication cables. Ten, turn OFF te WT210/WT230 and remove te power cord from te outlet. To carry te instrument, use te andle or carry it using bot ands. WT210 (model: ) WT230 (model: , ) 3 To prevent overeating, do not block te vent oles on top and bottom panels of te case. Keep electrically carged objects away from te input terminals. Tey may damage te internal circuitry. Do not pour volatile agents on te case or operation panel nor leave tem in contact wit rubber or PVC products for long periods of time. Te operation panel is made of termoplastic resin. Make sure eating elements suc as soldering bits do not come in contact wit te operation panel. Wen cleaning te case or te operation panel, first remove te power cord from te outlet. Ten, wipe wit a dry, soft clot. Do not use volatile cemicals since tis migt cause discoloring and deformation. If you are not going to use te instrument for a long period of time, unplug te power cord from te outlet. 3-1

51 3.2 Installing te Instrument Installation Condition Install te instrument in a place tat meets te following conditions. mbient Temperature and Humidity mbient temperature: 5 to 40 C 20 to 80% RH (no condensation) Flat, Even Surface Install te instrument in a stable orizontal place. ccurate measurements may be indered wen te instrument is used in an unstable place or tilted position. Well-Ventilated Location Vent oles are located on te top and bottom of te instrument. To prevent internal overeating, do not block te vent oles. If you remove te legs from te bottom panel for rack mounting, allow an equivalent amount of space (20 mm or more) from te floor to prevent blocking te vent oles. Do Not Install te Instrument in te Following Places: In direct sunligt or near eat sources. Were te level of mecanical vibration is ig. Near noise generating sources suc as ig voltage equipment and power source. Near strong magnetic field sources. Were an excessive amount of soot, steam, dust, or corrosive gas is present. In an unstable place. Note For te most accurate measurements, use te instrument in te following environment. mbient temperature: 23±5 C mbient umidity: 30 to 75%RH (no condensation) Wen using te instrument in a place were te ambient temperature is 5 to 18 C or 28 to 40 C, add te temperature coefficient to te accuracy as specified in capter 16. Wen installing te instrument in a place were te ambient umidity is 30% or below, take measures to prevent static electricity suc as using an anti-static mat. Condensation may occur if te instrument is moved to anoter place were te ambient temperature is iger, or if te temperature canges rapidly. In tis case, let te instrument adjust to te new environment for at least an our before using te instrument. Installation Position Desktop Place te instrument on a flat, even surface as sown in te figure below. WT210 (model: ) Wen using te andle for installation, ceck tat te andle is in one of te fixed positions. To cange te fixed position of te andle, pull te andle outward along te rotational axis approximately 2 to 3 mm and slowly move te andle. Fixed positions of te andle (We recommend te positions 1, 3, 5, or 8. Wen using no 2 and 4, don t put any weigt on te instrument.) Pull out along te Rotation axis 7 roration axis 8 approximately 2 to 3 mm 6 and rotate te andle

52 Before Starting Measurements 3.2 Installing te Instrument WT230 (model: , ) Rack Mount To rack mount te instrument, use te rack mount kit tat is sold separately. Rack Mount Kit Model 3 Specifications Model Specifications Model For WT210 EI single mount E2 For WT230 EI single mount E3 For WT210 JIS single mount J2 For WT230 JIS single mount J3 For WT210 EI dual mount E2 For WT230 EI dual mount E3 For WT210 JIS dual mount J2 For WT230 JIS dual mount J3 Installation Procedure 1. Remove te andle. Te andle on te WT210 is removed by rotating te andle to te andle rest position 8 (see te installation position figure on te previous page) and pulling out along te rotation axis approximately 10 mm. Te andle on te WT230 is removed by removing te andle attacment cover and unfastening te andle attacment screws. WT210 (model: ) WT230 (model: , ) Rotation axis t andle rest position 8, pull out along te rotation axis approximately 10 mm to remove te andle. Cover Cover Handle For details on te steps described below, see te instructions tat are included wit te rack mount kit. 2. Remove te legs from te bottom panel of te instrument. 3. Remove te seals from te side panels of te instrument. 4. ttac te rack mount bracket. 5. ttac te instrument to te rack. Note Wen rack mounting te instrument, allow at least 20 mm of space around te vent oles to prevent internal overeating. Make sure to ave adequate support for te bottom of te instrument. However, do not block te vent oles in te process. 3-3

53 3.3 Wiring Precautions To prevent te possibility of electric sock and damage to te instrument, follow te warnings below. WRNING Employ protective eart ground before connecting measurement cables. Te power cord tat comes wit te instrument is a tree-pin type power cord. Connect te power cord to a properly grounded tree-pin outlet. To ensure safety, if te current to be measured exceeds 7 (RMS), use a cable or conductor tat allows current greater tan te current to be measured to flow troug it, and always connect protective grounding prior to use of tis instrument. For products sipped as of January 2004, te protective eart terminal is located* on te rear panel. * If you need to confirm weter a protective eart terminal is installed, please contact te dealer from wom you purcased te instrument. Turn OFF te power to te object to be measured circuit (measurement circuit), wen wiring te circuit. Connecting or removing measurement cables wile te power is turned ON is dangerous. Take special caution not to wire a current measurement circuit to te voltage input terminal or a voltage measurement circuit to te current input terminal. Strip te insulation cover of te measurement cable so tat wen it is wired to te current input terminal, te conductive parts (bare wires) do not protrude from te terminal. lso, make sure to fasten te current input terminal screws securely so tat te cable does not come loose. Use cables wit safety terminals tat cover te conductive parts for connecting to te voltage input terminals. Using a terminal wit bare conductive parts (suc as a banana plug) is dangerous wen te terminal comes loose. Use cables wit safety terminals tat cover te conductive parts for connecting to te current sensor input connectors (external sensor input connectors). Using a terminal wit bare conductive parts is dangerous wen te conector comes loose. Wen te voltage of te circuit under measurement is being applied to te current input terminals, do not touc te external sensor input connector. Since tese terminals are electrically connected inside te instrument, tis act is dangerous. Wen connecting measurement cables from an external current sensor to te external sensor input connector, remove te cables connected to te current input terminals. In addition, wen te voltage of te circuit under measurement is being applied to te external sensor input connector, do not touc te current input terminals. Since tese terminals are electrically connected inside te instrument, tis act is dangerous. Wen using te external potential transformer (PT) or current transformer (CT), make sure it as enoug witstand voltage wit respect to te voltage (E) being measured (2E V recommended). lso, make sure tat te secondary side of te CT does not become an open circuit wile te power is being applied. Oterwise, ig voltage will appear at te secondary side of te CT, making it extremely dangerous. Wen using an external current sensor, make sure to use a sensor tat comes in a case. Te conductive parts and te case sould be insulated, and te sensor sould ave enoug witstand voltage wit respect to te voltage being measured. Using a bare sensor is dangerous, because you migt accidentally come in contact wit it. 3-4

54 Before Starting Measurements 3.3 Wiring Precautions Wen using a sunt-type current sensor as an external current sensor, turn OFF te circuit under measurement. Connecting or removing a sensor wile te power is ON is dangerous. Wen using a clamp-type current sensor as an external current sensor, ave a good understanding of te voltage of te circuit under measurement and te specifications and andling of te clamp-type sensor. Ten, confirm tat tere are no sock azards. For safety reasons, wen using te instrument on a rack mount, furnis a switc for turning OFF te circuit under measurement from te front side of te rack. fter connecting te measurement cable, attac te current input protection cover for your safety (screw tigtening torque: 0.6 N m). Make sure tat te conductive parts are not exposed from te protection cover. To make te protective functions effective, ceck te following items before applying te voltage or current of te circuit under measurement. Te power cable provided wit te instrument is used to connect to te power supply and te instrument is grounded. Te power switc of te instrument is turned ON. Te current input protective cover provided wit te instrument is being used. Wen te power switc of te instrument is turned ON, do not apply a signal tat exceeds te following values to te voltage or current input terminals. Wen te instrument is turned OFF, turn OFF te circuit under measurement. For oter input terminals, see te specifications of eac module in capter 16. Instantaneous Maximum llowable Input (1 period, for 20 ms) 3 Voltage Input Peak value of 2.8 kv or RMS value of 2.0 kv, wicever is less. Current Input 5 m to 200 m range (2.5 m to 100 m range if te crest factor is set to 6) (WT210 only) Peak value of 150 or RMS value of 100, wicever is less. 0.5 to 20 range (0.25 to 10 range if te crest factor is set to 6) (common to WT210 and WT230) Peak value of 450 or RMS value of 300, wicever is less. Continuous Maximum llowable Input Voltage Input Peak value of 1.5 kv or RMS value of 1.0 kv, wicever is less. Current Input 5 m to 200 m range (2.5 m to 100 m range if te crest factor is set to 6) (WT210 only) Peak value of 30 or RMS value of 20, wicever is less. 0.5 to 20 range (0.25 to 10 range if te crest factor is set to 6) (common to WT210 and WT230) Peak value of 100 or RMS value of 30, wicever is less. Te voltage rating across te input (voltage and current) and ground on te WT230 varies depending on te operating conditions. Wen protection cover is attaced to te GP-IB or serial interface and external I/O connector Voltage between input terminals and ground 600 Vrms max. Wen protection cover is removed from te GP-IB or serial interface and external I/O connector or wen te connector is used Voltage between CURRENT, ± (VOLTGE input and CURRENT) input terminals and ground 400 Vrms max. Voltage between VOLTGE input terminal and ground 600 Vrms max. 3-5

55 3.3 Wiring Precautions CUTION Use measurement cables tat ave sufficient margin in witstand voltage and current against te signal being measured. Te cables must also ave insulation resistance tat is appropriate for te ratings. Example: Wen making measurements on a current of 20, use copper wires tat ave a conductive cross-sectional area of 4 mm 2. Connecting to te Input Terminal Voltage Input Terminal Te terminal is a φ4-mm safety banana jack (female). Insert te safety terminal (te conductive parts are not exposed) into te voltage input terminal. Current Input Terminal Wen te voltage of te circuit under measurement is being applied to te current input terminals, do not touc te current sensor input terminals. Since tese terminals are electrically connected inside te instrument, tis act is dangerous. Wen connecting measurement cables from an external current sensor to te current sensor input connector, remove te cables connected to te current input terminals. In addition, wen te voltage of te circuit under measurement is being applied to te current sensor input terminal, do not touc te current input terminals. Since tese terminals are electrically connected inside te instrument, tis act is dangerous. Te terminal is a binding post. Te screws used on te terminal (binding post) are M6 screws. Eiter wind te wire around te screw or pass te crimp-on lugs troug te screw axis, ten tigten firmly by olding te terminal knob. Wen doing so, make sure tat no foreign objects are present in te contacts between te current input terminal and crimp-on lugs. Periodically ceck weter te current input terminal knob is loose, and weter any foreign objects are present in te contacts between te current input terminal and crimp-on lugs Unit: mm 6 7 Note On te WT230 (model: , ), you must set te wiring system using te WIRING key after wiring te circuit. For te procedure, see section 3.10, Selecting te Wiring System. Wen measuring large currents or voltages or currents tat contain ig frequency components, take special care in dealing wit mutual interference and noise wen wiring. Keep te measurement cables as sort as possible to minimize te loss between te circuit under measurement and te instrument. Te tick lines on te wiring diagrams sown in sections 3.7 and 3.9 are te sections were te current flows. Use appropriate wires tat are suitable for te current. In order to make accurate measurements of te voltage of te circuit under measurement, connect te cable to te circuit as close as possible. In order to make correct measurements, separate te measurement cables as far away from te eart ground wires and te instrument s case as possible to minimize te static capacitance to eart ground. To more accurately measure apparent power and power factor in tree-pase unbalanced circuits, we recommend te tree-voltage tree-current (3V3) measurement metod. 3-6

56 Before Starting Measurements 3.4 For Making ccurate Measurements By wiring te circuit to matc te load, you can minimize te effect of te power loss on te measurement accuracy. We will consider te current source (SOURCE) and load resistance (LOD) below. Wen te Measurement Current Is Relatively Large Wire so tat te voltage measurement circuit is connected to te load side. Te current measurement circuit measures te sum of current i L flowing troug te load of te circuit under measurement and te current i V flowing troug te voltage measurement circuit. Because te current flowing troug te circuit under measurement is i L, i V is te amount of error. For example, WT230 s input resistance of te voltage measurement circuit of te instrument is approximately 2 MΩ. If te input is 600 V, i V is approximately 0.3 m (600 V/2 MΩ). If te load current, i L, is 300 m or more (load resistance is 200 Ω or less), ten te effect of i V on te measurement is 0.1% (0.3 m/300 m) or less. If te input is 600 V and 3, te effect on te measurement accuracy is 0.01% (0.3 m/3 ). Source Load Source V Load 3 ± C ± V Input terminal (Element) V: VOLTGE terminal C: CURRENT terminal i V ± ± C WT210/WT230 s a reference, te following figure sows te relationsip between te voltage and current tat cause 0.1% or 0.01% effect on te measurement accuracy. 0.1% effect 0.01% effect Measured 600 voltage (V) Effect decreases Measured current () Wen te Measurement Current Is Relatively Small Wire so tat te current measurement circuit is connected to te load side. In tis case, te voltage measurement circuit measures te sum of te load voltage el and voltage drop e C across te current measurement circuit. e C is te amount of error in tis case. For example, WT230 s input resistance of te current measurement circuit is approximately 6 mω. If te load resistance is 600 Ω, te effect on te measurement accuracy is approximately 0.001% (6 mω/600 Ω). i L Source V ± ± C Load e L e C WT210/WT

57 3.5 Connecting te Power Supply Before Connecting te Power To prevent te possibility of electric sock and damage to te instrument, follow te warnings below. WRNING Before connecting te power cord, ensure tat te source voltage matces te rated supply voltage of te WT210/WT230 and tat it is witin te maximum rated voltage of te provided power cord. Connect te power cord after cecking tat te power switc of te instrument is turned OFF. To prevent te possibility of electric sock or fire, always use te power cord supplied by YOKOGW. Make sure to perform protective grounding to prevent te possibility of electric sock. Connect te power cord to a tree-pin power outlet wit a protective eart terminal. Do not use an extension cord witout protective eart ground. Oterwise, te protection function will be compromised. Connecting te Power Cord 1. Ceck tat te power switc is OFF. 2. Connect te power cord plug to te power connector on te WT210/WT230. (Use te power cord tat came wit te package.) 3. Connect te plug on te oter end of te power cord to te outlet tat meets te conditions below. Te C outlet must be of a tree-pin type wit a protective eart ground terminal. Item Specifications Rated supply voltage* 100 to 120 VC/200 to 240 VC Permitted supply voltage range 90 to 132 VC/180 to 264 VC Rated supply voltage frequency 50/60 Hz Permitted supply voltage frequency range 48 to 63 Hz Maximum power consumption WT210: 35 V, WT230: 55 V * Te WT210/WT230 can use a 100-V or a 200-V system for te power supply. Te maximum rated voltage of te power cord varies depending on its type. Ceck tat te voltage supplied to te WT210/WT230 is less tan or equal to te maximum rated voltage of te provided power cord (see page iii) before using it. 3 pin consent WT210/WT230 Power cord (included in te package) 3-8

58 Before Starting Measurements 3.6 Turning ON/OFF te Power Switc and Opening Message Points to Ceck before Turning ON te Power Ceck tat te instrument is installed properly (see section 3.2, Installing te Instrument ). Ceck tat te power cord is connected properly (see section 3.5, Connecting te Power Supply ). Is te circuit under measurement wired properly (see sections 3.7, Directly Wiring te Circuit under Measurement, 3.8, Using an External PT or CT to Wire te Circuit under Measurement, and 3.9, Using an External Sensor to Wire te Circuit under Measurement. 3 Location of te Power Switc Te power switc is located in te lower left corner of te front panel. Turning ON/OFF te Power Switc Te power switc is a pus button. Press te button once to turn it ON and press it again to turn it OFF. OFF ON Power Up Operation test program starts wen te power switc is turned ON. Te test programs cecks various memories. If te test result is normal, an opening message as sown on te next page appears, and te WT210/WT230 is ready to make measurements. If an error code remains on te display after te test program terminates, te WT210/ WT230 will not operate properly. Turn OFF te power switc immediately and contact your nearest YOKOGW dealer. Wen contacting your dealer, please give tem te model name, suffix code, and instrument No. written on te name plate on te side panel and te displayed error code. Note If an error code appears, ceck te information in section 15.4, Error Codes and Corrective ction and perform te appropriate action. Te warm-up time required to satisfy all specifications is approximately 30 minutes. Sutdown Operation Te setup parameters tat exist immediately before te power switc is turned OFF are stored in memory. Te same is true wen te power cord gets disconnected from te outlet. Te next time te power switc is turned ON, te instrument powers up using te stored setup parameters. Note litium battery is used to retain te setup parameters. If te litium battery is low, error codes 60, 68, and 78 tat indicate backup data failure (see section 15.4, Error Codes and Corrective ctions ) appear wen te power switc is turned ON. If tese error codes appear frequently, te litium battery must be replaced quickly. Te user cannot replace te battery. Contact your nearest YOKOGW dealer to ave te battery replaced. For information regarding battery life, see section

59 3.6 Turning ON/OFF te Power Switc and Opening Message Opening Message Power switc (POWER) ON 1 Display Display B Display C No display 2 ll LEDs illuminate Turn OFF 3 (Model display) (For WT210) B (For C ) No display Te display varies depending on te specified specifications and options. 4 (Version display) B C No display 5 (/EX1 and /EX2 external sensor option) B C 6 (/HRM armonic option) B C 7 (/D option) B C 8 (/CMP option) B C 9 (GP-IB mode) B C * 10 (GP-IB address) B C * 9 (Serial communication mode) B C * (Serial communication andsaking) (Serial communication format) (Serial communication baud rate) B C B C B C * * * NO ll specified specifications and options displayed? * Displays te item tat was specified before te power was turned OFF. YES Ready to make measurements 3-10

60 Before Starting Measurements 3.7 Directly Wiring te Circuit under Measurement WRNING Wen measuring current by directly applying te current to flow troug te current input terminals of te WT210/WT230, te voltage of te object to be measured appears at te external sensor input connector. To prevent te possibility of electric sock, remove te cable for measurements from te external sensor. 3 CUTION Te measurement current flows troug te tick lines in te figure below. Use wires wit sufficient current capacity. Wiring example of a single-pase, two-wire system (1P2W)... Can be applied to models , , and Source Load Source ± V C ± V : VOLTGE terminal C : CURRENT terminal Input termonal (Element) Load Source ± C V V ± Load ± C ± V Input terminal (Element) V : VOLTGE terminal C : CURRENT terminal Source C ± Wiring example of a single-pase, tree-wire system (1P3W)... Can be applied to models , and Source N ± C ± V Input terminal (Element 1) ± C ± V Input terminal (Element 3) Load Source V : VOLTGE terminal C : CURRENT terminal N C ± 1 3 C ± V V ± V V1 ± ± V3 V Load Load Note It is recommended tat te wire connected from te source to te ± current terminal be routed as close as possible to te ground potential in order to minimize measurement error. 3-11

61 3.7 Directly Wiring te Circuit under Measurement Wiring example of a tree-pase, tree-wire system (3P3W)... Can be applied to models , and Source U(R) V(S) W(T) ± V ± V Load Source W(T) U(R) V(S) C 1 ± V1 ± V Load C ± Input terminal (Element 1) C ± Input terminal (Element 3) V : VOLTGE terminal C : CURRENT terminal 3 C ± ± V3 V Wiring example of a tree-pase, four-wire system (3P4W)... Can be applied to model Source U(R) V(S) W(T) N ± C ± V Input terminal (Elemnt 1) ± C ± V Input terminal (Element 2) ± C ± V Input terminal (Element 3) load C 1 ± V U(R) V1 Source N ± W(T) V(S) C 2 ± V : VOLTGE terminal C : CURRENT terminal ± V2 V 3 C ± ± V3 V Load Wiring example of a tree-voltage, tree-current system (3V3)... Can be applied to model Source U(R) V(S) W(T) ± C ± V Input terminal (Element 1) ± C ± V Input terminal (Element 2) ± C ± V Input terminal (Element 3) Load C 1 ± U(R) Source N W(T) V(S) C V : VOLTGE terminal C : CURRENT terminal V V1 ± V V2 ± 2 ± ± V3 V 3 C ± Load Note For te relationsip between te wiring systems and te metod of determining te measured values or computed values, see page In 3P3W and 3V3 systems, te wiring system may be different between te WT210/230 and anoter product (anoter digital power meter) due to te differences in te input element tat is wired. To acieve correct measurements, ceck te wiring system. 3-12

62 Before Starting Measurements 3.8 Using an External PT or CT to Wire te Circuit under Measurement WRNING Wen using an external CT, do not allow te secondary side of te CT to become an open circuit wile current is flowing troug te primary side. Oterwise, ig voltage will appear at te secondary side of te CT, making it extremely dangerous. 3 CUTION Te measurement current flows troug te tick lines in te figure below. Use wires wit sufficient current capacity. Use of a PT (or CT) enables measurement of voltage or current even if te maximum voltage or maximum current of te object to be measured exceeds te maximum measuring range. If te maximum voltage exceeds 600 V (300 V if te crest factor is set to 6), connect an external potential transformer (PT), and connect te secondary side of te PT to te voltage input terminals. If te maximum current exceeds 20 (10 if te crest factor is set to 6), connect an external current transformer (CT), and connect te secondary side of te CT to te current input terminals. Wiring example of a single-pase, two-wire system (1P2W) wen using a PT/CT... Can be applied to models , , and Source Load Source Load L CT V PT L CT V PT l v l v ± V ± V C C ± ± Input terminal (Elemnt) Input terminal (Element) Wiring example of a single-pase, tree-wire system (1P3W) wen using a PT/CT... Can be applied to models , and N Source load L CT V PT L CT V PT l v l v ± V ± V C C ± ± Input terminal (Element 1) Input terminal (Element 3) 3-13

63 3.8 Using an External PT or CT to Wire te Circuit under Measurement Wiring example of a tree-pase, tree-wire system (3P3W) wen using a PT/CT... Can be applied to models , and Source U(R) V(S) W(T) L CT V PT L CT Load V PT l v l v ± V ± V C ± C ± Input terminal(element 1) Input terminal(element 3) Wiring example of a tree-pase, four-wire system (3P4W) wen using a PT/CT... Can be applied to model Source U(R) V(S) W(T) N L CT V PT L CT V PT L CT Load V PT l v l v l v ± V ± V ± V C ± C ± C ± Input terminal(element 1) Input terminal(element 2) Input terminal(element 3) Wiring example of a tree-voltage, tree-current system (3V3) wen using a PT/CT... Can be applied to model Source U(R) V(S) W(T) L CT V PT L CT V PT L CT Load V PT l v l v l v ± V ± V ± V C ± C ± C ± Input terminal(element 1) Input terminal(element 2) Input terminal(element 3) Note You can use te scaling function to directly read te measured values on te display. For te procedures, see section 4.5, Setting te Scaling Constant wen Using an External PT or CT. Note tat te frequency and pase caracteristics of te PT or CT affect te measured data. For safety reasons, tis section indicates wiring diagrams in wic te common terminals (+/- terminals) of te secondary side of te PT or CT are grounded. For te relationsip between te wiring systems and te metod of determining te measured values or computed values, see page In 3P3W and 3V3 systems, te wiring system may be different between te WT210/230 and anoter product (anoter digital power meter) due to te differences in te input element tat is wired. To acieve correct measurements, ceck te wiring system. 3-14

64 Before Starting Measurements 3.9 Using an External Sensor to Wire te Circuit under Measurement WRNING Wen using an external sensor, make sure to use a sensor tat comes in a case. Te conductive parts and te case sould be insulated, and te sensor sould ave enoug witstand voltage wit respect to te voltage being measured. Using a bare sensor is dangerous, because you migt accidentally come in contact wit it wic results in electric sock. Wen using a sunt, do not wire wile electricity is running. Tis act is extremely dangerous. Make sure to turn OFF te circuit under measurement. Voltage is applied to te sunt wile electricity is running. Do not come in contact wit it. Wen using te clamp sensor, make sure you ave a toroug understanding of te specifications and andling of te voltage of te measurement circuit and te clamp sensor. Ceck tat tere are no azards (places tat may cause electric sock). Wen using te external sensor input terminal, do not touc te current input terminal or connect measurement cables. Tis act is dangerous, because wen power is applied to te circuit under measurement (tat is connected to te external sensor input terminal), te voltage of te circuit appears across te current input terminals. Use connectors wit safety terminals tat cover te conductive parts for connecting to te external sensor input terminals of te WT210/WT230. If te connector comes loose, voltage appears at te conductive parts making tem extremely dangerous. 3 CUTION Te measurement current flows troug te tick lines in te wiring diagrams. Use wires wit sufficient current capacity. Note Te external sensor must be selected carefully, because te frequency and pase caracteristics of te sensor affects te measured value. Make te lead wires between te external sensor and te instrument as sort as possible to minimize measurement errors caused by stray capacitance and resistance of te lead wires. To minimize error wen using a sunt-type current sensor, note te following points wen connecting te external sensor cable. Connect te sielded wire of te external sensor cable to te L side of te sunt output terminal (OUT). Minimize te area created between te wires connecting te current sensor to te external sensor cable. Te effects due to te line of magnetic force (caused by te measurement current) and noise tat enter tis area of space can be reduced. Sunt-type current sensor OUT H OUT L rea created between te wires connecting Sield wire External sensor cable WT210/WT

65 3.9 Using an External Sensor to Wire te Circuit under Measurement For a sunt-type current sensor, connect it to te power eart ground side as sown in te figure below. If you ave to connect te sensor to te non-eart side, use a wire tat is ticker tan WG18 (conductive cross-sectional area of approx. 1 mm 2 ) between te sensor and te instrument to reduce te effects of common mode voltage. Take safety and error reduction in consideration wen constructing an external sensor cable. V ± Voltage input terminal LOD External sensor input connector (EXT) Sunt-type current sensor If te measurement circuit is not grounded and te measured signal is of ig frequency or ig power, te effects of inductance of te sunt-type current sensor cable become large. In tis case, use an isolation sensor (CT, DC-CT, or clamp). Clamp-type current sensor V Voltage input terminal ± LOD External sensor input connector (EXT) Make sure you ave te polarities correct wen making te connections. Oterwise, te polarity of te measurement current will be reversed and correct measurements cannot be made. Be especially careful wen connecting te clamp type current sensor, because it is easy to reverse te connection. You can use te scaling function to directly read te measured values on te display. For te procedure, see section 4.6, Selecting te Measurement Range and Setting te Scaling Value wen External Sensor is Used (option). For te relationsip between te wiring systems and te metod of determining te measured values or computed values, see page

66 Before Starting Measurements 3.9 Using an External Sensor to Wire te Circuit under Measurement Connecting an external sensor enables measurements wen te current of te object to be measured exceeds 20 (10 if te crest factor is set to 6). Te range of te external sensor input of te WT210/WT230 comes in two types, one for 2.5, 5, and 10 V (1.25/2.5/5 V if te crest factor is set to 6) and anoter for 50, 100, and 200 mv (25/50/ 100 mv if te crest factor is set to 6). You can select eiter option. Te following wiring examples are for connecting external sunts. Wen connecting a clamp-type sensor, replace te sunt-type sensor wit te clamp-type. Wiring example of a single-pase, two-wire system (1P2W) wen using an external sunt... Can be applied to models , , and Source External sunt Load 3 Connection side OUT L OUT H ± V C ± External sensor input connector (EXT) Input terminal (Element) Wiring example of a single-pase, tree-wire system (1P3W) wen using an external sunt... Can be applied to models , and Source Load N OUT H OUT L OUT H OUT L ± V C ± External sensor input connector (EXT) ± V C ± External sensor input connector (EXT) Input terminal (Element 1) Input terminal (Element 3) 3-17

67 3.9 Using an External Sensor to Wire te Circuit under Measurement Wiring example of a tree-pase, tree-wire system (3P3W) wen using an external sunt... Can be applied to models , and Source U(R) V(S) OUT H OUT L Load W(T) OUT H OUT L ± V C ± External sensor input connector (EXT) ± V C ± External sensor input connector (EXT) Input terminal (Element 1) Input terminal (Element 3) Wiring example of a tree-pase, four-wire system (3P4W) wen using an external sunt... Can be applied to model Source U(R) OUT H V(S) W(T) N OUT L OUT H OUT L OUT H OUT L Load ± V C ± External sensor input connector (EXT) ± V C ± External sensor input connector (EXT) ± V C ± External sensor input connector (EXT) Input terminal (Element 1) Input terminal (Element 1) Input terminal (Element 3) Wiring example of a tree-voltage, tree-current system (3V3) wen using an external sunt... Can be applied to model Source U(R) OUT H V(S) W(T) OUT L OUT H OUT L OUT H OUT L Load ± V C ± External sensor input connector (EXT) ± V C ± External sensor input connector (EXT) ± V C ± External sensor input connector (EXT) Input terminal (Element 1) Input terminal (Element 2) Input terminal (Element 3) Note In 3P3W and 3V3 systems, te wiring system may be different between te WT210/230 and anoter product (anoter digital power meter) due to te differences in te input element tat is wired. To acieve correct measurements, ceck te wiring system. 3-18

68 Before Starting Measurements 3.10 Selecting te Wiring System (pplies Only to te WT230) Keys B C UPDTE CHECK RNGE VOLTGE FILTER MODE CURRENT RMS VOLTGE DC MEN MX HOLD m V V k Var M W TIME m V PF SCLING VG LINE FREQ STORE RECLL HRMONICS KEY LOCK k M W deg m V Hz k M W % ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT UTO VOLTGE CURRENT MODE STRT HRMONICS REMOTE LOCL KEY LOCK 1P 3W 3P 4W RNGE UTO MX HOLD STOP MEMORY SETUP OUTPUT 3P 3W 3V 3 HOLD TRIG CL INTEGRTOR RESET INTEG SET SHIFT WIRING 3 Te explanation given in tis section uses WT230 as an example. For te differences between te WT210 and te WT230, see section 2.2, Operation Keys and Functions/Element Display. Explanation Wiring System Press te WIRING key to select te wiring system. Te selectable wiring systems vary depending on te model. WT210 (model: ) Tere is no wiring system selection function. single input element (Element 1) is installed. Measurement is possible only for te single-pase, two-wire system. WT230 (model: ) Te wiring system switces in te following order eac time te WIRING key is pressed. Two input elements (Element 1 and Element 3) are installed. 1P3W : Single-pase, two-wire system 1P3W 3P3W 3P3W : Tree-pase, tree-wire system 3P4W 3V3 *In case of a measurement circuit of single-pase, two-wire system, and aving selected eiter element 1 or 3, selecting any of te above mentioned wring metods will result in correct measurement/computation. However, te measurement/computation results in case element Σ as been selected lose te pysical meaning. WT230 (model: ) Te wiring system switces in te following order eac time te WIRING key is pressed. Tree input elements (Element 1, Element 2, and Element 3) are installed. 1P3W : Single-pase, two-wire system 1P3W 3P3W 3P3W : Tree-pase, tree-wire system 3P4W : Tree-pase, four-wire system 3P4W 3V3 3V3 : Tree voltage, tree current system *In case of a measurement circuit of single-pase, two-wire system, and aving selected eiter element 1 or 3, selecting any of te above mentioned wring metods will result in correct measurement/computation. However, te measurement/computation results in case element Σ as been selected lose te pysical meaning. Note Select te wiring system to matc te circuit under measurement tat is actually connected. Te internal processing of te WT230 varies depending on te selected wiring system. If te selected wiring system does not matc te actual circuit, measurements and computation will not be correct. For te relationsip between te wiring systems and te metod of determining te measured values or computed values, see page

69 Setting Measurement Conditions and Measurement Range Capter 4 Setting Measurement Conditions and Measurement Range 4.1 Selecting te Measurement Mode Keys B C UPDTE CHECK RNGE VOLTGE FILTER MODE CURRENT RMS VOLTGE DC MEN MX HOLD m V V k Var M W TIME m V PF k M W deg m V Hz SCLING VG LINE FREQ STORE RECLL HRMONICS KEY LOCK k M W % ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT RNGE UTO UTO VOLTGE CURRENT HOLD MODE MX HOLD TRIG CL INTEGRTOR STRT STOP RESET HRMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET REMOTE LOCL SETUP KEY LOCK OUTPUT SHIFT 1P 3W 3P 3W WIRING 3P 4W 3V 3 4 Te explanation given in tis section uses WT230 as an example. For te differences between te WT210 and te WT230, see section 2.2, Operation Keys and Functions/Element Display. Procedure SHIFT VOLTGE VOLTGE VOLTGE MODE SHIFT MODE SHIFT MODE RMS VOLTGE MEN DC Explanation Measurement Mode One of te following measurement modes can be selected for measurement of voltage and current. Te initial value is RMS. Indicator Voltage Current RMS Measures and displays true Measures and displays true RMS RMS value value VOLTGE MEN Displays rectified mean value Measures and displays calibrated to te RMS value true RMS value DC Displays DC value obtained by Displays DC value obtained by averaging averaging te input signal te input signal Teoretical Equations RMS Tis mode is selected to display input voltage or current as a true RMS value. 1 T T 0 (t) 2 dt f (t): input signal T: one period of te input signal VOLTGE MEN Tis mode is selected to display input voltage or current as a rectified mean value calibrated to te RMS value. Since a sine wave is used for calibration, te value displayed will be te same as tat obtained in RMS mode if a sine wave is measured. Te value displayed will be different from tat obtained in RMS mode if a distorted or DC waveform is measured. π 2 2 T 1 T 0 (t) dt f (t): input signal T: one period of te input signal DC Tis mode is selected wen te input voltage or current is DC. Te input signal is averaged and te result is displayed. 4-1

70 4.1 Selecting te Measurement Mode Typical Waveform Types and Differences in Measured Values between Measurement Modes Te WT210/WT230 does not support te mean value measurement mode sown in te table below. Name Waveform Measurement mode Display RMS value Retified mean value Rectified mean value calibrated to te rms value Linear averaging RMS V MEN DC Sinewave 0 π 2π Ep Ep 2 2 π Ep Ep 2 0 Half-wave rectification 0 π 2π Ep Ep 2 Ep π Ep 2 2 Ep π Full-wave rectification 0 π 2π Ep Ep 2 2 π Ep Ep 2 2 π Ep Direct current Ep Ep Ep π 2 2 Ep Ep Triangular wave 0 π 2π Ep Ep 3 Ep 2 π 4 2 Ep 0 Square wave Pulse 0 π 2π Ep Ep Ep π 2 2 Ep 0 Pulse 0 2π τ Ep τ τ 2π Ep 2π Ep Wen duty D (= D Ep D Ep π τ τ 4π 2 Ep 2π Ep τ ) is applied. 2π πd 2 2 Ep D Ep 4-2

71 Setting Measurement Conditions and Measurement Range 4.2 Selecting te Measurement Syncronization Source Keys UPDTE CHECK RNGE VOLTGE MODE CURRENT RMS VOLTGE DC MEN MX HOLD UTO RNGE UTO B C FILTER m V V k Var M W TIME m V PF deg SCLING VG LINE FREQ STORE RECLL HRMONICS KEY LOCK k M W m V Hz k M W % ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT VOLTGE CURRENT HOLD MODE MX HOLD TRIG CL INTEGRTOR STRT STOP RESET HRMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET REMOTE LOCL SETUP KEY LOCK OUTPUT SHIFT 1P 3W 3P 3W WIRING 3P 4W 3V 3 4 Te explanation given in tis section uses WT230 as an example. For te differences between te WT210 and te WT230, see section 2.2, Operation Keys and Functions/Element Display. Procedure Operate te instrument by following te tick lines in te menu below. Press te key to confirm a selection or setting. To leave te current menu in te middle of te operation, press te key indicated in step 1. Te confirmed settings up to tat point are kept. Select te measurement syncronization source 1. ( Display C ) SETUP ( Display C ) 5. End of setting 4-3

72 4.2 Selecting te Measurement Syncronization Source Explanation Function used to select te measurement syncronization source Te instrument determines te measured value by averaging te sampled data (averaging process) over te period syncronized to te input signal period. Te input signal period is detected from te voltage and current signals and you can select wic signal period to use to perform te averaging process. Te initial setting is. Priority is placed in detecting te current signal period to be used as te syncronization source. Te current signal of eac element is used as te syncronization source for te respective elements. If te period of te current signal cannot be detected, te voltage signal is made te syncronization source. V Priority is placed in detecting te voltage signal period to be used as te syncronization source. Te voltage signal of eac element is used as te syncronization source for te respective elements. If te period of te voltage signal cannot be detected, te current signal is made te syncronization source. off Measurement is not made by syncronizing to te voltage or current signal, but te sampled data over te entire period of te display update rate is averaged. Note Select an input signal wit stable input level and frequency (wit little distortion) for te syncronization source. s a guideline, select a signal wose frequency can be stably measured. For example if te object under test is a switcing power supply and te distortion in te voltage waveform is less tan tat of te current waveform, set te syncronization source to V. Voltage waveform Current waveform For example if te object under test is an inverter and te distortion in te current waveform is less tan tat of te voltage waveform, set te syncronization source to. Voltage waveform Current waveform Zero cross is te timing at wic te syncronization source crosses over (wen rising or falling) te level zero (center value of te amplitude). Because it may be impossible to stabilize and calculate te zero cross if te syncronization source waveform is distorted and superimposed wit armonics and noise, te measured voltage and current values may be unstable. In tis case, cange te settings for te syncronization source, and turn ON te frequency filter. See section 4.3, for information on te frequency filter. s in te inverter example above, turn ON te frequency filter even if ig frequency components were superimposed. Wen measuring DC signals, te measurement interval may be erroneous if noise crosses level zero and is recognized erroneously as a zero cross by te true signal. To avoid tis, turn OFF te syncronization source. By turning te syncronization source OFF, sampling data from all intervals of te display update rate are used to calculate te measured values. If te period of te voltage or current signal cannot be detected even wen or V is selected, te sampled data over te entire period of te display update rate is averaged. 4-4

73 Setting Measurement Conditions and Measurement Range 4.3 Turning ON/OFF te Input Filter Keys B C UPDTE CHECK RNGE VOLTGE FILTER MODE CURRENT RMS VOLTGE DC MEN MX HOLD m V V k Var M W TIME m V PF deg SCLING VG LINE FREQ STORE RECLL HRMONICS KEY LOCK k M W m V Hz k M W % ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT RNGE UTO UTO VOLTGE CURRENT HOLD MODE MX HOLD TRIG CL INTEGRTOR STRT STOP RESET HRMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET REMOTE LOCL SETUP KEY LOCK OUTPUT SHIFT 1P 3W 3P 3W WIRING 3P 4W 3V 3 4 Te explanation given in tis section uses WT230 as an example. For te differences between te WT210 and te WT230, see section 2.2, Operation Keys and Functions/Element Display. Procedure Operate te instrument by following te tick lines in te menu below. Press te key to confirm a selection or setting. To leave te current menu in te middle of te operation, press te key indicated in step 1. Te confirmed settings up to tat point are kept. Turning ON/OFF te Line Filter Select te filter function 1. ( Display C ) 3. SETUP ( Display C ) 5. End of setting Turning ON/OFF te Frequency Filter Select te filter function 1. ( Display C ) SETUP ( Display C ) 5. End of setting 4-5

74 4.3 Turning ON/OFF te Input Filter Explanation Te following two types of input filters are provided. Te filters eliminates noise suc as inverter waveforms and distorted waveforms and allow stable measured values to be obtained. Line Filter Tis filter is inserted only into te measurement circuit. It eliminates noise components of te input signal. Te cutoff frequency is 500 Hz. on: Selecting on and pressing te key enables te line filter function and turns ON te LINE indicator. off: Selecting off and pressing te key disables te line filter function. Te LINE indicator turns OFF. Frequency Filter Tis filter is inserted only into te frequency measurement circuit. Te cutoff frequency is 500 Hz. Since te WT210/230 is making measurements in sync wit te input signal, te frequency of te input signal must be measured correctly. on: Selecting on and pressing te key enables te frequency filter function and turns ON te FREQ indicator. off: Selecting off and pressing te key disables te frequency filter function. Te FREQ indicator turns OFF. Note You cannot cange te input filter ON/OFF setting wen integration is started. You must stop and reset integration to do so. 4-6

75 Setting Measurement Conditions and Measurement Range 4.4 Selecting te Measurement Range Wen Using Direct Input Keys B C UPDTE CHECK RNGE VOLTGE FILTER MODE CURRENT RMS VOLTGE DC MEN MX HOLD m V V k Var M W TIME m V PF SCLING VG LINE FREQ STORE RECLL HRMONICS KEY LOCK k M W deg m V Hz k M W % ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT UTO VOLTGE CURRENT MODE STRT HRMONICS REMOTE LOCL KEY LOCK 1P 3W 3P 4W RNGE UTO MX HOLD STOP MEMORY SETUP OUTPUT 3P 3W 3V 3 HOLD TRIG CL INTEGRTOR RESET INTEG SET SHIFT WIRING 4 Te explanation given in tis section uses WT230 as an example. For te differences between te WT210 and te WT230, see section 2.2, Operation Keys and Functions/Element Display. Procedure Operate te instrument by following te tick lines in te menu below. Press te key to confirm a selection or setting. To leave te current menu in te middle of te operation, press te key indicated in step 1. Te confirmed settings up to tat point are kept. Setting te Voltage Range 1. ( Display C ) VOLTGE End of setting Te left figure sows te selections wen te crest factor is set 3. Te selections wen te crest factor is set to 6 are sown below. uto, 300, 150, 75, 30, 15, 7.5 Settting te Current Range On te WT RNGE 2. (Display C) 3. End of setting On te WT CURRENT 2. (Display C) 3. End of setting Te unit is. Te left figure sows te selections wen te crest factor is set 3. Te selections wen te crest factor is set to 6 are sown below. uto, 10, 5, 2.5, 1, 0.5, 0.25 <- 100, 50, 25, 10, 5, 2.5 <- m Te unit is m. Te above figure sows te selections wen te crest factor is set 3. Te selections wen te crest factor is set to 6 are sown below. uto, 10, 5, 2.5, 1, 0.5, 0.25 Note You cannot cange to te minimum range by pressing te key from te auto range setting. Conversely, you cannot cange to auto range by pressing te key from te minimum range setting. 4-7

76 4.4 Selecting te Measurement Range Wen Using Direct Input Explanation WRNING To ensure safe operation, if te current to be measured exceeds 7 (rms value), use a cable or conductor tat is capable of running a current iger tan te current to be measured, and be sure to connect te protective eart before operating te instrument. Te protective eart terminal is provided on te rear panel of products sipped in January 2004 and later. Fixed Range (manual) versus utomatic Range (auto) Te measurement range can be of one of te following types. Te initial setting is uto range ON. Fixed range Select te voltage range from te following: Wen te crest factor is set 3: 600, 300, 150, 60, 30, or 15 V Wen te crest factor is set 6: 300, 150, 75, 30, 15V, or 7.5 V Select te current range from te following: Wen te crest factor is set to 3: 20, 10, 5, 2, 1, or 0.5 (200 m, 100 m, 50 m, 20 m, 10 m, and 5 m are also selectable on te WT210) Wen te crest factor is set to 6: 10, 5, 2.5, 1, 0.5, or 0.25 (100 m, 50 m, 25 m, 10 m, 5 m, and 2.5 m are also selectable on te WT210) uto range: uto Te measuring range is adjusted automatically according to te input voltage or current as follows. Overrange is andled te same way as for te manually selected range. Range up: Wen te measured value of voltage or current (V or ) exceeds 130% of te rated range or wen te peak value (instantaneous voltage or current value tat is sampled) exceeds approximately 300% of te rated range, te range is increased te next time te measured value is updated. On te WT230, wen any of te input elements meets te above condition, te range is increased te next time te measured value is updated. Range down: Wen te measured value of te voltage or current is less tan or equal to 30% of te rated range and te peak value is less tan or equal to approximately 300% of te rated range of te next lower range, te range is decreased te next time te measured value is updated. On te WT230, wen all of te input elements meet te above condition, te range is decreased te next time te measured value is updated. Verifying te Range To verify te current range setting press te VOLTGE key or te CURRENT key. Te result will be sown at display C. In order to return to te measurement status, press te same key again. Note Wen te range is set to auto, te range may be adjusted frequently if a waveform suc as a pulse is input. In suc a case, set te range manually. Power Range Te measuring range for active power, apparent power and reactive power is determined as follows. Wiring metod Power range single-pase, two-wire (1P2W) voltage range current range single-pase, tree-wire (1P3W) tree-pase, tree-wire (3P3W) voltage range current range 2 tree-voltage, tree-current (33V) tree-pase, four-wire (3P4W) voltage range current range 3 4-8

77 Setting Measurement Conditions and Measurement Range 4.4 Selecting te Measurement Range Wen Using Direct Input Te maximum display is (wen te number of displayed digits is set to 5). Wen te result of voltage range current range exceeds 1000 W, te unit on te display will cange to kw ; Wen tis result exceeds 1000 kw, te unit on te display will cange to MW. Power range table list of te combination of voltage and current ranges and te power range are sown below. Te table sows te active power range (unit: W). Te same ranges are set for apparent power (unit: V) and reactive power (unit: var). Just replace te unit wit V or var wen looking at te tables. Te following table sows te case wen te number of displayed digits is five. Wen te number of displayed digits is set to four, one digit is subtracted to te lowest digit of te values in te table. For selecting te number of displayed digits, see section On te WT230 Wen te crest factor is set to 3 Wiring System Voltage Current Range Range (V) m Single-pase, two-wire W W W W W W (1P2W) W W W W W W W W W W W kw W W W W kw kw W W W kw kw kw W W kw kw kw kw Single-pase, tree-wire W W W W W W (1P3W), W W W W W kw Tree-pase, tree-wire W W W W kw kw (3P3W), W W W kw kw kw Tree voltage, tree current W W kw kw kw kw (3V3) W kw kw kw kw kw Tree-pase, four-wire W W W W W W (3P4W) W W W W W kw W W W W kw kw W W W kw kw kw W W kw kw kw kw W kw kw kw kw kw Wen te crest factor is set to 6 Wiring System Voltage Current Range Range (V) m 500 M Single-pase, two-wire W W W W W W (1P2W) W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W kw W W W W kw kw Single-pase, tree-wire W W W W W W (1P3W), W W W W W W Tree-pase, tree-wire W W W W W W (3P3W), W W W W W kw Tree voltage, tree current W W W W kw kw (3V3) W W W kw kw kw Tree-pase, four-wire W W W W W W (3P4W) W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W kw kw W W W kw kw kw W W W kw kw kw 4-9

78 4.4 Selecting te Measurement Range Wen Using Direct Input On te WT210 Wen te crest factor is set to 3 Voltage Current Range Range (V) m W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W kw W W W W kw kw W W W kw kw kw W W kw kw kw kw Voltage Current Range Range (V) m m m m m m mw mw mw mw W W mw mw mw W W W mw mw W W W W mw W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W Wen te crest factor is set to 6 Voltage Current Range Range (V) m m W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W W kw W W W W kw kw Voltage Current Range Range (V) m m m m m m mw mw mw mw mw mw mw mw mw mw mw W mw mw mw mw W W mw mw mw W W W mw mw W W W W mw W W W W W Note Wen te range is set to auto, te measuring range switces according to range up/range down conditions. Terefore, te range may vary even if te measured values remain te same. If you open te voltage input terminal, a voltage value of up to 0.3 V may be displayed due to um noise and oter penomena. Tis is because of te ig input resistance of te voltage input terminal. Sorting te terminal will result in a value of 0 V. 4-10

79 Setting Measurement Conditions and Measurement Range 4.5 Setting te Scaling Value Wen External PT/CT is Used Keys UPDTE CHECK RNGE VOLTGE MODE CURRENT RMS VOLTGE DC MEN MX HOLD UTO RNGE UTO m V V k Var M W TIME ELEMENT VOLTGE CURRENT MODE MX HOLD HOLD TRIG B C FILTER m V PF deg SCLING VG LINE FREQ STORE RECLL HRMONICS KEY LOCK k M W m V Hz k M W % ELEMENT ELEMENT STRT HRMONICS REMOTE LOCL KEY LOCK 1P 3W 3P 4W CL INTEGRTOR STOP RESET MEMORY INTEG SET SETUP OUTPUT SHIFT 3P 3W WIRING 3V 3 4 Te explanation given in tis section uses WT230 as an example. For te differences between te WT210 and te WT230, see section 2.2, Operation Keys and Functions/Element Display. Procedure Operate te instrument by following te tick lines in te menu below. Press te key to confirm a selection or setting. To leave te current menu in te middle of te operation, press te key indicated in step 1. Te confirmed settings up to tat point are kept. 1. SETUP Setting te Scaling Constant Select te scaling function ( Display C ) ( Display C ) ,16. Select te input element ( Display C ) 7. Set te PT ratio ( Display ) 8. sets te value 11. Set te CT ratio ( Display B ) 12. Same as steps Set te power coefficient ( Display C ) 14. Same as steps 9. moves digits 8 to 10. SHIFT 10. moves te decimal point SHIFT 17. End of setting 8 to

80 4.5 Setting te Scaling Value Wen External PT/CT is Used Turning ON/OFF Scaling 1. SETUP Set te scaling functin ( Display C ) ( Display C ) 5. End of setting Explanation Scaling Function Tis function is useful for measuring voltage, current, power and suc wen you are using an external potential transformer (PT), current transformer (CT) or suc, and ave connected teir secondary side outputs to te input elements. You set te scaling value to te PT ratio, CT ratio or power coefficient. Wen te scaling function is turned ON, measured values wic ave been converted to te corresponding values for te transformer primary sides, can been displayed or oterwise output. Measured/computed value Scaled result Voltage V P V P: Voltage scaling constant Current C C: Current scaling constant ctive power W F P C W F: Power scaling constant Reactive power var F P C var pparent power V F P C V Selecting te Input Element Tis setting is to select to wic element scaling will be applied. Te initial value is LL. t te WT210, tis selection menu will not appear. LL: Select tis wen te same scaling constant sould be applied to all elements togeter. EL1: Select tis wen te scaling constant sould only be applied to element 1. EL2: Select tis wen te scaling constant sould only be applied to element 2. Tis selection will not appear on model EL3: Select tis wen te scaling constant sould only be applied to element 3. End: Select tis wen you finised te setting, or wen you want to abort te setting. Setting te Scaling Constant Te scaling constant are set in te following order. Te setting ranges from to Te initial value is P: Sets te PT ratio on display C: Sets te CT ratio on display B F: Sets te power value on display C In case of te WT210, pressing te key after setting P, C and F respectively will end tis scaling setting. In case of te WT230, selecting End at te input element menu will end tis scaling setting. 4-12

81 Setting Measurement Conditions and Measurement Range 4.5 Setting te Scaling Value Wen External PT/CT is Used Turning Scaling ON/OFF Select te scaling menu once again after aving set te scaling constant. Te initial value is off. on: Selecting on and pressing te key will start scaling and te SCLING indicator will ligt. off: Selecting off and pressing te key will stop scaling and SCLING indicator will extinguis. Note If scaling constant measurement range exceeds 9999M(10 6 ), computation overflow (--OF-) is indicated

82 4.6 Selecting te Measurement Range and Setting te Scaling Constant wen External Sensor is Used (option) Keys B C UPDTE CHECK RNGE VOLTGE FILTER MODE CURRENT RMS VOLTGE DC MEN MX HOLD m V V k Var M W TIME m V PF SCLING VG LINE FREQ STORE RECLL HRMONICS KEY LOCK k M W deg m V Hz k M W % ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT UTO VOLTGE CURRENT MODE STRT HRMONICS REMOTE LOCL KEY LOCK 1P 3W 3P 4W RNGE UTO MX HOLD STOP MEMORY SETUP OUTPUT 3P 3W 3V 3 HOLD TRIG CL INTEGRTOR RESET INTEG SET SHIFT WIRING Te explanation given in tis section uses WT230 as an example. For te differences between te WT210 and te WT230, see section 2.2, Operation Keys and Functions/Element Display. Procedure Operate te instrument by following te tick lines in te menu below. Press te key to confirm a selection or setting. To leave te current menu in te middle of te operation, press te key indicated in step 1. Te confirmed settings up to tat point are kept. Setting te Scaling Constant of te External Sensor Input Select te external sensor function 1. ( Display C ) SETUP Select te setup metod ( Display C ) Select collectively ( Display C ) Set ELEMENT 1 ( Display ) Same as steps 6 to End of setting 6. sets te value 7. moves digits SHIFT 8. moves te decimal point SHIFT End of setting Set ELEMENT 3 ( Display C ) 12. Same as steps 6 to Set ELEMENT 2 ( Display B ) 10. Same as steps 6 to 8. Note Te setup metod menu (ll/eac) does not appear on te WT

83 Setting Measurement Conditions and Measurement Range 4.6 Selecting te Measurement Range and Setting te Scaling Constant wen External Sensor is Used (option) 1. CURRENT Selecting te Measurement Range (Current wit Scaling Function ON) Wen equipped wit option /EX1 ( Display C ) 2. Wen equipped wit option /EX2 ( Display C ) 2. Te unit is V. 3. End of setting Te above figure sows te selections wen te crest factor is set 3. Te selections wen te crest factor is set to 6 are sown below. uto, 10, 5, 2.5, 1, 0.5, 0.25, E 5, E 2.5, E 1.25 Te unit is mv. 3. End of setting Te above figure sows te selections wen te crest factor is set 3. Te selections wen te crest factor is set to 6 are sown below. uto, 10, 5, 2.5, 1, 0.5, 0.25, E 100, E 50, E 25 4 Te menu above is for te WT230. Te WT210 displays m range followed by te external sensor range (mv or V unit). Explanation Scaling Function in combination wit External Sensor Input Tis function is used wen measuring te voltage or current by installing an external sensor and connecting its output to te input element of te WT210/WT230. Setting Example of Scaling Constant for External Sensor Input In case te rated specs of te external sensor are 50 /50 mv, measurement range is 50 mv, ten 50 /50 mv 50 mv = 50 : scaling constant is In case te rated specs of te external sensor are 100 /50 mv, measurement range is 50 mv, ten 100 /50 mv 50 mv = 100 : scaling constant is In case te rated specs of te external sensor are 50 /80 mv, measurement range is 50 mv, ten 50 /80 mv 50 mv = : scaling constant is However, since te setting range is 50 mv, use a setting witin te 0 to 50 mv range. Tis instrument uses tis scaling coefficient in calculations like te ones below to obtain current values for display or output as data. Current value = Output voltage of te external sensor Scaling constant Measurement range value for te external sensor Te current value is used to determine te active power, reactive power, and apparent power to be displayed or output as data. Te scaling function explained ere is completely different from te PT/CT scaling function explained in te previous section. 4-15

84 4.6 Selecting te Measurement Range and Setting te Scaling Constant wen External Sensor is Used (option) Selecting te Setting Format of te Scaling Constant Yoy can select te setting format on te WT230. Te following two setting formats are available. Te initial value is LL. LL: Select tis wen te same scaling constant sould be applied to all elements togeter. ECH: Select tis wen te scaling constant sould only be applied to eac element seperately. Setting te Scaling Constant Te procedure to set te scaling constant depends on te setting format (previous setting). Te setting ranges from to Te initial value is In case of te WT210, te scaling constant is set at display C. Wen LL is selected: Te scaling constant set at display C will be applied to all elements togeter. Wen ECH is selected: Te scaling constant set at display will be applied to element 1 only. Te scaling constant set at display B will be applied to element 2 only. Tis selection will not appear on model Te scaling constant set at display C will be applied to element 3 only. fter aving selected LL or ECH and entered te scaling constant, press te key to end tis scaling setting. Selecting te Measurement Range (Current, wit Scaling function ON) fter aving set te scaling constant, select te menu for te current measurement range. Select te rated output of te external sensor from tis menu (refer to te Operating Procedure on te previous page). Scaling of te external sensor input will start as soon as you press te key after selecting. Scaling will stop as soon as you select a measurement range oter tan external sensor input from te menu. Note Wen performing measurements using te external sensor, and te scaling function for te external PT/CT turned ON, te PT/CT scaling constant will interfere. Te input range for te external sensor can only be of te manual type. Tere is no auto range function. Wen you switc from external sensor input to direct, auto range input, an error will appear. First, select manual range for direct input and afterwards select auto range (same goes for setting by communication interface). 4-16

85 Setting Measurement Conditions and Measurement Range 4.7 Using te veraging Function Keys UPDTE CHECK RNGE VOLTGE MODE CURRENT RMS VOLTGE DC MEN MX HOLD UTO RNGE UTO m V V k Var M W TIME ELEMENT VOLTGE CURRENT MODE MX HOLD HOLD TRIG B C FILTER m V PF k M W deg m V Hz SCLING VG LINE FREQ STORE RECLL HRMONICS KEY LOCK k M W % ELEMENT ELEMENT STRT HRMONICS REMOTE LOCL KEY LOCK 1P 3W 3P 4W CL INTEGRTOR STOP RESET MEMORY INTEG SET SETUP OUTPUT SHIFT 3P 3W WIRING 3V 3 4 Te explanation given in tis section uses WT230 as an example. For te differences between te WT210 and te WT230, see section 2.2, Operation Keys and Functions/Element Display. Procedure Operate te instrument by following te tick lines in te menu below. Press te key to confirm a selection or setting. To leave te current menu in te middle of te operation, press te key indicated in step 1. Te confirmed settings up to tat point are kept. Setting veraging 1. SETUP Set te averaging function ( Display C ) ( Display C ) Select processing ( Display B ) Set te coefficient ( Display C ) 9. End of setting 4-17

86 4.7 Using te veraging Function Setting veraging ON/OFF 1. SETUP Set te averaging function ( Display C ) ( Display C ) 5. End of setting Explanation bout te veraging Function Tis function performs exponential averaging or moving averaging on measurement values. Wen te displayed values are unsteady due to big fluctuations in power source or load, or due to te low frequency of te input signal, tis function is useful to stabilize te displayed values for easier reading. Te measurement items tat are averaged directly are V (voltage), (current), and W (active power). Wen using tose measured V,, and W values to calculate oter measurement items, tose items receive te effects of te averaging. Since certain values would lose teir meaning if tey were averaged (suc as te peak (Vpk, pk) values), averaging is not performed on tem. Selecting te Type of veraging Te following two selections are available. Te initial value is Lin. Exponential veraging: EP Exponential averaging is expressed by te following equation. D = D n 1 + (M n D n 1)/K were D n: te value at te n t display; D n 1: te exponentially averaged value at te n-1 t display; M n: te measurement value at te n t display; K: attenuation constant Moving veraging: Lin Moving averaging is expressed by te following equation. D n = (M n (m 1) + M n (m 2) +... M n 2 + M n 1 + M n)/m were D n: te value at te n t display; M n (m 1): te measurement value at (m 1) display before te n t display; M n-(m 2): te measurement value at (m 2) display before te n t display; : M n 2: te measurement value at two displays before te n t display; M n 1: te measurement value at one display before te n t display; M n: te measurement value at te n t display; m: sample number 4-18

87 Setting Measurement Conditions and Measurement Range 4.7 Using te veraging Function Setting te veraging Sample Number/ttenuation Constant Te following selections are available. Te initial value is 8. 8, 16, 32, or 64 Setting veraging ON/OFF Select te averaging menu once again after aving set te averaging values. Te initial value is off. on: Selecting on and pressing te key will start averaging and te VG indicator will ligt. off: Selecting off and pressing te key will stop averaging and te VG indicator will extinguis. 4 Note Te average coefficient is common to exponential average and moving average. If you cange te averaging process, cange te averaging coefficient also. Te averaging function tat can be used during armonic measurement is exponential averaging. Te attenuation constant is fixed to 8. Terefore, te setup procedure explained in tis section is valid only during normal measurement. Te averaging function turns OFF wen integration is started. It does not turn back ON even if integration is stopped and reset. 4-19

88 4.8 Using te MX Hold Function Keys B C UPDTE CHECK RNGE VOLTGE FILTER MODE CURRENT RMS VOLTGE DC MEN MX HOLD m V V k Var M W TIME m V PF SCLING VG LINE FREQ STORE RECLL HRMONICS KEY LOCK k M W deg m V Hz k M W % ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT UTO VOLTGE CURRENT MODE STRT HRMONICS REMOTE LOCL KEY LOCK 1P 3W 3P 4W RNGE UTO MX HOLD STOP MEMORY SETUP OUTPUT 3P 3W 3V 3 HOLD TRIG CL INTEGRTOR RESET INTEG SET SHIFT WIRING Te explanation given in tis section uses WT230 as an example. For te differences between te WT210 and te WT230, see section 2.2, Operation Keys and Functions/Element Display. Procedure SHIFT CURRENT MX HOLD OFF SHIFT CURRENT MX HOLD OFF MX HOLD MX HOLD Explanation MX Hold Function Te maximum values (MX) of V (voltage), (current), W (active power), V (apparent power), var (reactive power), Vpk (voltage peak), and pk (current peak) can be eld wile te MX old function is enabled. Wen a value greater tan te eld value is measured, te larger value is eld. Te initial setting is off. on: Te MX HOLD indicator illuminates, and te MX old function is enabled. off: Te MX HOLD indicator turns OFF, and te MX old function is disabled. Note Wile te MX old function is active, te maximum values of V (voltage), (current), W (active power), V (apparent power), and var (reactive power) are displayed continuously. Te displayed values for Vpk (voltage peak) and pk (current peak) are te absolute values of te maximum value. For example, if te plus side peak is Vpk and te minus side peak is Vpk, ten Vpk is displayed for te voltage peak. Te values for D/ output, output to external plotter and printer, and communication output are also set to te maximum values (MX) tat are eld. 4-20

89 Setting Measurement Conditions and Measurement Range 4.9 Computing te Efficiency (pplies to WT230 Only) Keys B C UPDTE CHECK RNGE VOLTGE FILTER MODE CURRENT RMS VOLTGE DC MEN MX HOLD m V V k Var M W TIME m V PF SCLING VG LINE FREQ STORE RECLL HRMONICS KEY LOCK k M W deg m V Hz k M W % ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT UTO VOLTGE CURRENT MODE STRT HRMONICS REMOTE LOCL KEY LOCK 1P 3W 3P 4W RNGE UTO MX HOLD STOP MEMORY SETUP OUTPUT 3P 3W 3V 3 HOLD TRIG CL INTEGRTOR RESET INTEG SET SHIFT WIRING 4 Te explanation given in tis section uses WT230 as an example. For te differences between te WT210 and te WT230, see section 2.2, Operation Keys and Functions/Element Display. Procedure Operate te instrument by following te tick lines in te menu below. Press te key to confirm a selection or setting. To leave te current menu in te middle of te operation, press te key indicated in step 1. Te confirmed settings up to tat point are kept. 1. SETUP Select te four aritmetical operation function ( Display C ) ( Display C ) 5. End of setting Tis is an example for te WT230 (760503). Te display varies depending on te number of installed elements. Tis is an example for te WT230 (760503). Te display varies depending on te number of installed elements. 4-21

90 4.9 Computing te Efficiency (pplies to WT230 Only) Explanation Te efficiency of te device can be computed and sown on display C. Wen displaying te efficiency, is displayed at te front of te value. Computing Equation of Efficiency For te tree-pase, tree-wire model (760502) Computes te efficiency by taking te active power (W1) measured on element 1 as te active power applied to te primary side of te inverter and te active power (W3) measured on element 3 as te power consumed by te secondary side of te inverter. Primary side Secondary side W1 Inverter W3 Output side Equation W3 Efficency = 100(%) W1 For te tree-pase, four-wire model (760503) Computes te efficiency by taking te active power (W2) measured on element 2 as te active power applied to te primary side of te inverter and te active power (W1 and W3) measured on elements 1 and 3 as te power consumed by te secondary side of te inverter. Primary side Secondary side W2 Inverter W1 W3 Output side Equation W1+W3 Efficency = 100(%) W2 Note If te denominator of te above equation is less tan or equal to % of te rated range, computation overflow ( --of-) is indicated. 4-22

91 Setting Measurement Conditions and Measurement Range 4.10 Computing te Crest Factor Keys B C UPDTE CHECK RNGE VOLTGE FILTER MODE CURRENT RMS VOLTGE DC MEN MX HOLD m V V k Var M W TIME m V PF k M W deg m V Hz SCLING VG LINE FREQ STORE RECLL HRMONICS KEY LOCK k M W % ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT RNGE UTO UTO VOLTGE CURRENT HOLD MODE MX HOLD TRIG CL INTEGRTOR STRT STOP RESET HRMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET REMOTE LOCL SETUP KEY LOCK OUTPUT SHIFT 1P 3W 3P 3W WIRING 3P 4W 3V 3 4 Te explanation given in tis section uses WT230 as an example. For te differences between te WT210 and te WT230, see section 2.2, Operation Keys and Functions/Element Display. Procedure Operate te instrument by following te tick lines in te menu below. Press te key to confirm a selection or setting. To leave te current menu in te middle of te operation, press te key indicated in step 1. Te confirmed settings up to tat point are kept. 1. SETUP Select te four aritmetical operation function ( Display C ) ( Display C ) (WT230 only) 5. End of setting Tis is an example for te WT230 (760503). Te display varies depending on te number of installed elements. Tis is an example for te WT230 (760503). Te display varies depending on te number of installed elements. 4-23

92 4.10 Computing te Crest Factor Explanation Crest Factor Computation Te crest factor is determined by peak value/rms value. Te WT210/WT230 can compute te crest factors for voltage and current and sow tem on display C. is displayed at te front of te value wen te crest factor is being displayed. Computing Equation for te Crest Factor and Display : Displays te result of (Peak of V1)/(rms of V1) : Displays te result of (Peak of V2)/(rms of V2) (for only) : Displays te result of (Peak of V3)/(rms of V3) (for and ) : Displays te result of (Peak of 1)/(rms of 1) : Displays te result of (Peak of 2)/(rms of 2) (for only) : Displays te result of (Peak of 3)/(rms of 3) (for and ) Note Definition of crest factor : PEK value RMS value If te RMS value is less tan or equal to 0.5% (less tan or equal to 1% if te crest factor is set to 6) of te rated range, computation overflow ( --of-) is indicated. If te measurement mode is VOLTGE MEN or DC, no data ( -----) is indicated. 4-24

93 Setting Measurement Conditions and Measurement Range 4.11 Performing Four ritmetical Operation Keys B C UPDTE CHECK RNGE VOLTGE FILTER MODE CURRENT RMS VOLTGE DC MEN MX HOLD m V V k Var M W TIME m V PF k M W deg m V Hz SCLING VG LINE FREQ STORE RECLL HRMONICS KEY LOCK k M W % ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT RNGE UTO UTO VOLTGE CURRENT HOLD MODE MX HOLD TRIG CL INTEGRTOR STRT STOP RESET HRMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET REMOTE LOCL SETUP KEY LOCK OUTPUT SHIFT 1P 3W 3P 3W WIRING 3P 4W 3V 3 4 Te explanation given in tis section uses WT230 as an example. For te differences between te WT210 and te WT230, see section 2.2, Operation Keys and Functions/Element Display. Procedure Operate te instrument by following te tick lines in te menu below. Press te key to confirm a selection or setting. To leave te current menu in te middle of te operation, press te key indicated in step 1. Te confirmed settings up to tat point are kept. Select te four aritmetical operation function 1. ( Display C ) SETUP ( Display C ) (WT230 only) Tis is an example for te WT230 (760503). Te display varies depending on te number of installed elements. 5. End of setting Tis is an example for te WT230 (760503). Te display varies depending on te number of installed elements. 4-25

94 4.11 Performing Four ritmetical Operation Explanation Four ritmetical Operations Function Te following computation results can be sown on display C. is displayed at te front of te value wen te computation results are being displayed. : + B : B : B : B : B 2 2 : B and indicates te displayed value on display and B. adds te values sown on display and B and sows te result on display C. Note Te meanings of te displayed symbols are as follows: : + (ddition) : (Subtraction) : (Multiplication) : (Division) : ^ (Exponent) Wen te display function is indicating te elapsed integration time (TIME), te computed result indication is no data ( -----). If te value of te display B function is less tan or equal to % of te rated range, computation overflow ( --of-) is indicated. pplication Example : Displays te result of display + display B. Computation example: Display Display B Display C Wiring metod W1 W2 or W3 W1 + W2 or W1 + W3 ny Inverter W1 W2 or W3 : Displays te result of display display B. Computation example 1: Display Display B Display C Wiring metod W1 W3 W1 W3 ny W1 Inverter W3 4-26

95 Setting Measurement Conditions and Measurement Range 4.11 Performing Four ritmetical Operation Computation example 2: Display Display B Display C Wiring metod ΣW (= W1 + W3) W2 ΣW W2 3P3W W1 W3 Inverter W2 Computation example 3: Display Display B Display C Wiring metod W2 ΣW (= W1 + W3) W2 ΣW 3P3W 4 W2 Inverter W1 W3 : Displays te result of display display B. Useful wen setting a function oter tan V (apparent power) for display and displaying V on display C. Computation example : Display Display B Display C Wiring metod V1rms 1rms 1rms 1rms ny : Displays te result of display display B. Wen computing te absolute value of impedance Computation example : Display Display B Display C Wiring metod V1rms 1rms Z = V1rms ny 1rms SOURCE V1 LOD 1 : Displays te result of display display B. Line voltage ratio and line current ratio for a tree-pase wiring can be determined. Computation example : Display Display B Display C Wiring metod V1rms V3rms V1rms V3rms 3P3W 1rms 3rms 1rms 3rms 1 SOURCE V1 LOD 3 V3 4-27

96 4.11 Performing Four ritmetical Operation : Displays te result of display (display B) 2 Wen computing impedance (Z), resistance (R), and reactance (X) Computation example : Display Display B Display C Wiring metod V1 1rms V1 Z = (1rms) 2 ny W1 1rms W1 R = (1rms) 2 Var1 1rms Var1 X = (1rms) 2 SOURCE V1 LOD 1 : Displays te result of (display ) 2 display B Wen computing resistance (R) Computation example : Display Display B Display C Wiring metod V1rms W1 R = (V1rms)2 W1 ny SOURCE V1 LOD

97 Setting Measurement Conditions and Measurement Range 4.12 Computing te verage ctive Power during Integration Keys B C UPDTE CHECK RNGE VOLTGE FILTER MODE CURRENT RMS VOLTGE DC MEN MX HOLD m V V k Var M W TIME m V PF deg SCLING VG LINE FREQ STORE RECLL HRMONICS KEY LOCK k M W m V Hz k M W % ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT RNGE UTO UTO VOLTGE CURRENT HOLD MODE MX HOLD TRIG CL INTEGRTOR STRT STOP RESET HRMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET REMOTE LOCL SETUP KEY LOCK OUTPUT SHIFT 1P 3W 3P 3W WIRING 3P 4W 3V 3 4 Te explanation given in tis section uses WT230 as an example. For te differences between te WT210 and te WT230, see section 2.2, Operation Keys and Functions/Element Display. Procedure Operate te instrument by following te tick lines in te menu below. Press te key to confirm a selection or setting. To leave te current menu in te middle of te operation, press te key indicated in step 1. Te confirmed settings up to tat point are kept. 1. SETUP Select te four aritmetical operation function ( Display C ) ( Display C ) ( WT230 only ) Tis is an example for te WT230 (760503). Te display varies depending on te number of installed elements. Tis is an example for te WT230 (760503). Te display varies depending on te number of installed elements. 5. End of setting 4-29

98 4.12 Computing te verage ctive Power during Integration Explanation Function Used to Compute te verage ctive Power during Integration Tis function computes te average active power witin te integration period. It is derived by dividing te watt our (integrated active power) by te elapsed time of integration. Te result can be sown on display C. Wen displaying te average active power, is displayed at te front of te value. Watt our (W) verage active power during integration (W) = Elapsed time of integration () Computing Metod and Displayed Information of verage ctive Power wile Integration Is in Progress : Displays te computed result of (watt our of element 1 W1)/te elapsed integration time : Displays te computed result of (watt our of element 2 W2)/te elapsed integration time ( only) : Displays te computed result of (watt our of element 3 W3)/te elapsed integration time ( and ) : Displays te computed result of (watt our of element S SW3)/te elapsed integration time ( and ) * Te value of watt our ΣW varies depending on te wiring system. Te value tat results is derived by replacing W in te table on page 5-2 wit W. Note Tis computation function is enabled during integration (wile te integration is in progress or wile te integration is suspended). If te integration is reset, te watt our and te elapsed time of integration become zero, and te display sows For details on integrator functions, see capter

99 Setting Measurement Conditions and Measurement Range 4.13 Selecting te Number of Displayed Digits and te Display Update Rate Keys B C UPDTE CHECK RNGE VOLTGE FILTER MODE CURRENT RMS VOLTGE DC MEN MX HOLD m V V k Var M W TIME m V PF deg SCLING VG LINE FREQ STORE RECLL HRMONICS KEY LOCK k M W m V Hz k M W % ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT RNGE UTO UTO VOLTGE CURRENT HOLD MODE MX HOLD TRIG CL INTEGRTOR STRT STOP RESET HRMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET REMOTE LOCL SETUP KEY LOCK OUTPUT SHIFT 1P 3W 3P 3W WIRING 3P 4W 3V 3 4 Te explanation given in tis section uses WT230 as an example. For te differences between te WT210 and te WT230, see section 2.2, Operation Keys and Functions/Element Display. Procedure Operate te instrument by following te tick lines in te menu below. Press te key to confirm a selection or setting. To leave te current menu in te middle of te operation, press te key indicated in step 1. Te confirmed settings up to tat point are kept. Selecting te Number of Displayed Digits Select te number of displayed digits 1. ( Display C ) SETUP ( Display C ) 5. End of setting 4-31

100 4.13 Selecting te Number of Displayed Digits and te Display Update Rate Selecting te Display Update Rate 1. SETUP Select te display update rate ( Display C ) ( Display C ) 5. End of setting Explanation Selecting te Number of Displayed Digits You can select te maximum number of displayed digits for V (voltage), (current), W (active power), V (apparent power), var (reactive power), PF (power factor), VHz (voltage frequency), Hz (current frequency), and armonic measurement values (voltage, current, active power, power factor, and relative armonic content). Te initial setting is Hi. Hi Te number of displayed digits is set to 5 (99999). Lo Te number of displayed digits is set to 4 (9999). Note Te actual number of displayed digits may be smaller tan te maximum number of displayed digits depending on te combination of te voltage range and current range and te automatic digit carrying operation. Values suc as Vpk (voltage peak), pk (current peak), pase angle, efficiency, crest factor, four aritmetic operations, average active power, integrated value, elapsed integration time, and armonic measurement values (armonic distortion and pase angle) are not affected by te number of displayed digits set in tis section. For details, see te sections describing eac item. Selecting te Display Update Rate You can select te display update rate of te measured or computed results sown on te display from te coices below. Te UPDTE indicator blinks in sync wit te selected display update rate. You can increase te display update rate to measure te load power tat canges relatively fast or decrease te rate to measure te power of a signal wit a relatively long period. Te initial setting is 0.25 s. 0.1 s, 0.25 s, 0.5 s, 1 s, 2 s, and 5 s Note Te display update rate of 0.1 s appears as a possible selection wen te armonic measurement function is ON. However, it cannot be selected. If te display update rate ad been set to 0.1 s wen te armonic measurement function was OFF, te rate is canged to 0.25 s wen you turn on te armonic measurement function. In tis case, te display update rate remains at 0.25 s even if you turn te armonic measurement function back OFF. 4-32

101 Setting Measurement Conditions and Measurement Range 4.14 Selecting te Crest Factor Keys B C UPDTE CHECK RNGE VOLTGE FILTER MODE CURRENT RMS VOLTGE DC MEN MX HOLD m V V k Var M W TIME m V PF deg SCLING VG LINE FREQ STORE RECLL HRMONICS KEY LOCK k M W m V Hz k M W % ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT RNGE UTO UTO VOLTGE CURRENT HOLD MODE MX HOLD TRIG CL INTEGRTOR STRT STOP RESET HRMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET REMOTE LOCL SETUP KEY LOCK OUTPUT SHIFT 1P 3W 3P 3W WIRING 3P 4W 3V 3 4 Te explanation given in tis section uses WT230 as an example. For te differences between te WT210 and te WT230, see section 2.2, Operation Keys and Functions/Element Display. Procedure Operate te instrument by following te tick lines in te menu below. Press te key to confirm a selection or setting. To leave te current menu in te middle of te operation, press te key indicated in step 1. Te confirmed settings up to tat point are kept. Select te measurement syncronization source 1. (Display C) SETUP (Display C) 5. End of setting 4-33

102 4.14 Selecting te Crest Factor Explanation Selecting te Crest Factor Te crest factor is a ratio of te amplitude wit respect to te rms value. You can select 3 or 6. Note If te crest factor is entered using te key, te voltage range and current range are set to te maximum range. Te maximum current range is as follows: Direct input range (5 m to 20 ; 2.5 m to 10 if te crest factor is 6) 20 (10 if te crest factor is 6) External sensor input range: Option /EX1 (2.5 V to 10 V; 1.25 V to 5 V if te crest factor is 6) 10 V (5 V if te crest factor is 6) External sensor input range: Option /EX2 (50 mv to 200 mv; 25 mv to 100 mv if te crest factor is 6) 200 mv (100 mv if te crest factor is 6) If you set te crest factor to 6, te measurement conditions of crest factor 5 and iger required by IEC are met. 4-34

103 Displaying Measurement Results and Computation Results Capter 5 Displaying Measurement Results and Computation Results 5.1 Displaying Voltage, Current and ctive Power Keys B C UPDTE CHECK RNGE VOLTGE FILTER MODE CURRENT RMS VOLTGE DC MEN MX HOLD m V V k Var M W TIME m V PF SCLING VG LINE FREQ STORE RECLL HRMONICS KEY LOCK k M W deg m V Hz k M W % ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT RNGE UTO UTO VOLTGE CURRENT HOLD MODE MX HOLD TRIG CL INTEGRTOR STRT STOP RESET HRMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET REMOTE LOCL SETUP KEY LOCK OUTPUT SHIFT 1P 3W 3P 3W WIRING 3P 4W 3V 3 5 Te explanation given in tis section uses WT230 as an example. For te differences between te WT210 and te WT230, see section 2.2, Operation Keys and Functions/Element Display. Procedure 1. Selecting te Display Function Select eiter V (voltage), (current) or W (power) by pressing te key. Display V W V var TIME B V W PF deg C V W V Hz Hz W & & V ± ± W± and ± will ligt twice. and are displayed on te top of display C. You can reverse te order by first pressing te SHIFT key followed by te key. W± W± 2. Selecting te Input Element Select te input element by pressing te ELEMENT key. WT210 (760401) No element selection function, because tere is only a single input element. WT230 (760502) ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT 1 3 Σ WT230 (760503) ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT Σ 3. Selecting te Measurement Range You can select te voltage measurement range by pressing te VOLTGE key, and te current measurement range by pressing te CURRENT key. For more details, refer to eiter of te following. 4.4 Selecting te Measurement Range in case of Direct Input; 4.5 Setting te Scaling Value wen External PT/CT is Used; 4.6 Selecting te Measurement Range and Setting te Scaling Value wen External Sensor is Used (option). 5-1

104 5.1 Displaying Voltage, Current and ctive Power 4. Selecting te Measurement Mode Select te measurement mode by pressing te VOLTGE (MODE) key after aving pressed te SHIFT key so tat te SHIFT indicator is lit. For more details, refer to section 4.1, Selecting te Measurement Mode. Explanation Continuous Maximum llowable Input Voltage Up to peak voltage of 1.5 kv or RMS value of 1.0 kv, wicever is less. Current 5 m to 200 m range (2.5 m to 100 m range if te crest factor is set to 6) (WT210 only) Up to peak current of 30 or RMS value of 20, wicever is less. 0.5 to 20 range (0.25 to 10 range if te crest factor is set to 6) (common to WT210 and WT230) Up to peak current of 100 or RMS value of 30, wicever is less. External sensor input (common to WT210 and WT230) Peak value of up to five times te measurement range. Maximum Reading, Unit, and Unit Prefix Maximum reading: (wen te number of displayed digits is 5) for voltage, current and power Units: V (voltage), (current), W (power) Prefix: m, k, or M Selecting te Display Function Te following selections are available. V: voltage will be displayed : current will be displayed W: active power will be displayed Selecting te Input Element Te type of input element wic can be selected depends on te model number. Make your selection after aving verified your model number. 1/2/3: Displays te measurement values of element 1/2/3 Σ: Displays according to te wiring metod, and is as follows. Wiring metod V1+V3 1P3W 2 ΣV Σ ΣW V1+V P3W 2 W1+W3 W1+W3 ΣV V11+V ( V11+V33) Σvar var1+var3 var1+var3 3P4W V1+V2+V W1+W2+W3 V11+V22+V33 var1+var2+var3 3V3 V1+V2+V W1+W3 3 ( V11+V22+V33 ) 3 var1+var3 Wiring metod 1P3W 3P3W 3P4W 3V3 ΣPF ΣW ΣV Σdeg cos -1 ΣPF Note For Σ var computation, wen te current leads te voltage, eac var value is computed as a negative value; wen te current lags te voltage, te value is computed as a positive value. 5-2

105 Displaying Measurement Results and Computation Results 5.2 Displaying pparent Power, Reactive Power and Power Factor Keys B C UPDTE CHECK RNGE VOLTGE FILTER MODE CURRENT RMS VOLTGE DC MEN MX HOLD m V V k Var M W TIME m V PF SCLING VG LINE FREQ STORE RECLL HRMONICS KEY LOCK k M W deg m V Hz k M W % ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT UTO VOLTGE CURRENT MODE STRT HRMONICS REMOTE LOCL KEY LOCK 1P 3W 3P 4W RNGE UTO MX HOLD STOP MEMORY SETUP OUTPUT 3P 3W 3V 3 HOLD TRIG CL INTEGRTOR RESET INTEG SET SHIFT WIRING 5 Procedure Te explanation given in tis section uses WT230 as an example. For te differences between te WT210 and te WT230, see section 2.2, Operation Keys and Functions/Element Display. 1. Selecting te Display Function Select eiter V (apparant power), var (reactive power), or PF (power factor) by pressing te key of display or B. Display V W V var TIME B V W PF deg You can reverse te order by first pressing te SHIFT key followed by te key. Explanation 2. Selecting te Input Element Select te input element by pressing te ELEMENT key of display or B. Te operation is te same as te one described on page 5-1. Maximum Reading, Unit, and Unit Prefix Maximum reading of apparent and reactive power: (wen te number of displayed digits is 5) Display range of power factor: to (wen te num of displayed digits is 5) (If te computed result lies between and , is displayed. If it is or more, PFErr is displayed. If it is between and , is displayed. If it is or below, PFErr is displayed.) Units: V (apparent power), var (reactive power), power factor (no unit) Prefix: m, k, M, Selecting te Display Function Te following selections are available. V: apparent power will be displayed var: reactive power will be displayed PF: power factor will be displayed Selecting te Input Element 1/2/3: Displays te measurement values of element 1/2/3 Σ: Refer to page 5-2. Note Canging te measurement mode migt result in different computed results, even wen te input signal is te same. For more details on te measurement mode, refer to page 4-1. Wen eiter te voltage or current drops below 0.5% (less tan or equal to 1% if te crest factor is set to 6) of te measurement range, PFErr will be displayed. 5-3

106 5.3 Displaying te Pase ngle Keys B C UPDTE CHECK RNGE VOLTGE FILTER MODE CURRENT RMS VOLTGE DC MEN MX HOLD m V V k Var M W TIME m V PF deg SCLING VG LINE FREQ STORE RECLL HRMONICS KEY LOCK k M W m V Hz k M W % ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT RNGE UTO UTO VOLTGE CURRENT HOLD MODE MX HOLD TRIG CL INTEGRTOR STRT STOP RESET HRMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET REMOTE LOCL SETUP KEY LOCK OUTPUT SHIFT 1P 3W 3P 3W WIRING 3P 4W 3V 3 Te explanation given in tis section uses WT230 as an example. For te differences between te WT210 and te WT230, see section 2.2, Operation Keys and Functions/Element Display. Procedure 1. Selecting te Display Function Select deg (pase angle) by pressing te key of display B. Display B V W PF deg You can reverse te order by first pressing te SHIFT key followed by te key. 2. Selecting te Input Element Select te input element by pressing te ELEMENT key of display B. Te operation is te same as te one described on page 5-1. Explanation Display Range and Unit Display range: G180.0 to d180.0 (G meaning pase lag, d meaning pase lead) Unit: deg Selecting te Display Function Wen you select deg, te pase angle will be displayed. Selecting te Input Element 1/2/3: Displays te measurement values of element 1/2/3 Σ: Refer to page 5-2. Note Canging te measurement mode migt result in different computed results, even wen te input signal is te same. For more details on te measurement mode, refer to page 4-1. Wen eiter te voltage or current drops below 0.5% (less tan or equal to 1% if te crest factor is set to 6) of te measurement range, degerr will be displayed. Distinction between pase lag and lead can be made properly, only wen bot voltage and current are sine waves, and wen te percentage of voltage or current input relating to te measurement range does not fluctuate muc. If te computed result of te power factor exceeds 1, te display will be as follows. Between to or to : te pase angle displays or more or or less: te pase angle displays degerr. 5-4

107 Displaying Measurement Results and Computation Results 5.4 Displaying te Frequency Keys UPDTE CHECK RNGE VOLTGE MODE CURRENT RMS VOLTGE DC MEN MX HOLD UTO RNGE UTO m V V k Var M W TIME ELEMENT VOLTGE CURRENT MODE MX HOLD HOLD TRIG B C FILTER m V PF k M W deg m V Hz k M W SCLING VG LINE FREQ STORE RECLL HRMONICS KEY LOCK % ELEMENT ELEMENT STRT HRMONICS REMOTE LOCL KEY LOCK 1P 3W 3P 4W CL INTEGRTOR STOP RESET MEMORY INTEG SET SETUP OUTPUT SHIFT 3P 3W WIRING 3V 3 5 Te explanation given in tis section uses WT230 as an example. For te differences between te WT210 and te WT230, see section 2.2, Operation Keys and Functions/Element Display. Procedure 1. Selecting te Display Function Select eiter V Hz (voltage frequency) or Hz (current frequency) by pressing te key of display C. Display C V W V Hz Hz W & & V ± ± W± and ± will ligt twice. and are displayed on te top of display C. You can reverse te order by first pressing te SHIFT key followed by te key. W± W± 2. Selecting te Input Element Select te input element by pressing te ELEMENT key of display C. Te operation is te same as te one described on page 5-1. Explanation Measurement Range Te measurement range varies depending on te display update rate (see section 4.13) as follows: Display Update Rate Measurement Range 0.1 s 25 Hz to 100 khz 0.25 s 10 Hz to 100 khz 0.5 s 5 Hz to 100 khz 1 s 2.5 Hz to 100 khz 2 s 1.5 Hz to 50 khz 5 s 0.5 Hz to 20 khz Tere are six types of measurement ranges, 1 Hz, 10 Hz, 100 Hz, 1 khz, 10 khz, 100 khz. Te measurement range switces automatically. Maximum Reading, Unit, and Unit Prefix Maximum reading: (wen te number of displayed digits is 5) Units: Hz Prefix: k 5-5

108 5.4 Displaying te Frequency Selecting te Display Function Te following selections are available. V Hz: voltage frequency will be displayed Hz: current frequency will be displayed Selecting te Input Element 1/2/3: Displays te measurement values of element 1/2/3 Σ: Displays no measurement values, only bar. Note In case te level of te input signal is low (less tan or equal to 7% if te crest factor is set to 3; less tan or equal to 14% if te crest factor is set to 6), or wen te frequency is smaller tan te measurement range, te display will sow ErrLo. Wen te frequency is larger tan te measurement range, te display will sow ErrHi. Tis instrument measures te frequency after syncronizing to te cycle of te input signal. We recommend to turn ON te frequency filter wen measuring an inverted waveform or a waveform wit ig noise. However, depending on te signal s frequency and level, ErrLo migt appear on te display. Tis is because te filter wit a cutoff frequency is 500 Hz attenuates te signal to a level tat te instrument determines no signal is being input. If te frequency exceeds te measurement range even wen te frequency filter is set OFF, ErrLo migt appear due to te internal circuit attenuating te signal to a level tat te instrument determines no signal is being input. 5-6

109 Displaying Measurement Results and Computation Results 5.5 Displaying Efficiency (WT230 Only), Crest Factor, Four ritmetic Operation Value, verage ctive Power, and Peak Value Keys B C UPDTE CHECK RNGE VOLTGE FILTER MODE CURRENT RMS VOLTGE DC MEN MX HOLD m V V k Var M W TIME m V PF SCLING VG LINE FREQ STORE RECLL HRMONICS KEY LOCK k M W deg m V Hz k M W % ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT UTO VOLTGE CURRENT MODE STRT HRMONICS REMOTE LOCL KEY LOCK 1P 3W 3P 4W RNGE UTO MX HOLD STOP MEMORY SETUP OUTPUT 3P 3W 3V 3 HOLD TRIG CL INTEGRTOR RESET INTEG SET SHIFT WIRING 5 Te explanation given in tis section uses WT230 as an example. For te differences between te WT210 and te WT230, see section 2.2, Operation Keys and Functions/Element Display. Procedure 1.1 Selecting te display Function Select eiter (efficiency, crest factor, four aritmetical operations, average active power, ), (voltage peak value) or (current peak value) by pressing te key. Display C V W V Hz Hz W W± & W± & V ± ± W± and ± will ligt twice. and are displayed on te top of display C. You can reverse te order by first pressing te SHIFT key followed by te key. 2. Selecting te Input Element To display te peak value, press te ELEMENT key of display C and select te input element of wic te peak value is to be displayed. Te procedure is te same as sown on page

110 5.5 Displaying Efficiency (WT230 Only), Crest Factor, Four ritmetic Operation Value, verage ctive Power, and Peak Value Explanation Displaying te Peak Value is displayed at te front of display C. Te peak value of voltage is displayed wen te unit display is V; te peak value of current is displayed wen te unit display is. Maximum display: 9999 Unit: Voltage peak value V, current peak value Prefixp: m, k, or M Te absolute values of te plus and minus sides of te displayed values for Vpk (voltage peak) and pk (current peak) are compared, and te larger of te two is displayed. For example, if te plus side peak is Vpk and te minus side peak is Vpk, Vpk is displayed for te peak value. Efficiency (WT230 only), Crest Factor, Four ritmetic Operation and verage ctive Power Display Wen is displayed at te front of display C, te efficiency, crest factor, four aritmetic operation value, or average active power specified in sections 4.9 to 4.12 is displayed. Maximum display (display range) Efficiency: 0.00 to (%) Oters (crest factor, four aritmetic operations, and average active power): 9999 Unit verage active power: W Oters (efficiency, crest factor, and four aritmetic operations): No unit Prefix Four aritmetic operations and average active power: m, k, or M Oters (efficiency and crest factor): No prefix Note Depending on te computed item, computation overflow or no data may be indicated rater tan a value. Efficiency If te denominator of te equation for deriving te efficiency is less tan or equal to % of te rated range, computation overflow ( --of-) is indicated. Crest factor If te RMS value is less tan or equal to 0.5% (less tan or equal to 1% if te crest factor is set to 6) of te rated range, computation overflow ( --of-) is indicated. If te measurement mode is VOLTGE MEN or DC, no data ( -----) is indicated. Four aritmetic operation If te display function is indicating te elapsed integration time (TIME), te computed result indication is no data ( -----). If te value of te display B function is less tan or equal to % of te rated range, computation overflow ( --of-) is indicated. 5-8

111 Integration Capter 6 Integration 6.1 Integrator Functions ctive power integration and current integration can be carried out. ll measurement values (and computed values) can be displayed, even wen integration is in progress, except for te integrated values (watt our or ampere our) and elapsed integration time. Since integrated values of negative polarity can be also displayed, te consumed watt our (ampere our) value of te positive side and te watt our value returning to te power supply of te negative side (ampere our: only wen te measurement mode is DC), can be displayed seperately. Integration Modes Te following tree modes are available as integration modes. Manual Integration Mode Integration starts: after aving pressed te STRT key Integration stops: after aving pressed te STOP key; wen te integrated value reaces te maximum value MW/M, or wen te integrated value drops to te minimum value MW/M; wen te elapsed integration time reaces te maximum of ours. Integration olds: te elapsed integration time and integrated values at te point were integration stopped will be eld until te RESET key is pressed. 6 Integrated value Hold Max. integrated value ( MW/M) Display overflow Elapsed integration time Hold Hold Start Stop Reset Start Reset Standard Integration Mode Integration starts: after aving pressed te STRT key Integration stops: wen te elapsed integration time is reaced to preset time; wen te integrated value reaces te maximum value MW/M, or wen te integrated value drops to te minimum value MW/M. Integration olds: te elapsed integration time and integrated values at te point were integration stopped will be eld until te RESET key is pressed. Integrated value Hold Elapsed integration time Hold Integration timer preset time Start Reset 6-1

112 6.1 Integrator Functions Continous Integration Mode (Repeat Integration) Integration starts: after aving pressed te STRT key; wen te elapsed integration time is reaced to preset time, te integrated value and elapsed integration time are reset automatically and restarted immediately. Integration stops: wen te elapsed integration time is reaced to preset time; owever, te integrated value and elapsed integration time are reset automatically and restarted immediately; after aving pressed te STOP key; wen te integrated value reaces te maximum value MW/M, or wen te integrated value drops to te minimum value MW/M; Integration olds: te elapsed integration time and integrated values at te point were tey reaced te maximum/minimum or at te point were te STOP key was pressed will be eld until te RESET key is pressed. Integrated value Hold Elapsed integration time Hold Integration timer preset time Start Integration timer preset time Integration timer preset time Integration Metods Te computing equations are sown below. Te result is displayed using time conversion. Power integration Current integration RMS Stop n v i i i i=1 N I I=1 n Reset DC i=1 i i vi and ii are instantaneous values of voltage and current. n is te number of samples. I is te measured current for eac display update rate. N is te number of display updates Power integration or current integration wit te measurement mode set to DC are integration of instantaneous power or instantaneous current. If te measurement mode is set to RMS, integration is performed on te measured current on eac display update rate (see section 4.13) Note If you stop integration, te integration process stops at te integrated value and elapsed integration time of te previous display update. Te measured values between te previous display update and te execution of te integration stop are not integrated. 6-2

113 Integration 6.1 Integrator Functions Display Resolution during Integration Te display resolution of integrated values is normally counts (counts up to only wen te unit is MW or M). Wen te integrated value reaces counts, te decimal point sifts automatically. For example, if mw is added to mw, te display sows mw. Display Function of Integrator Values By selecting te display function, you can display te polarity of te integrator values. Display function Measurement mode Display contents W RMS, VOLTGE MEN, DC bot positive and negative watt our values W± *1 RMS, VOLTGE MEN, DC positive watt our value W± *1 RMS, VOLTGE MEN, DC negative watt our value RMS, VOLTGE MEN total ampere our values DC bot positive and negative ampere our values ± *2 RMS, VOLTGE MEN total ampere our values (same as ) DC positive ampere our value ± *2 RMS, VOLTGE MEN 0 DC negative ampere our value 6 *1 Wen te W function is selected, pressing te key once or twice will result in W±. Pressing te key once will result in displaying te positive watt our value, wereas pressing te key twice will result in displaying te negative watt our value. In case of te negative watt our value, will appear in front of te value. *2 Wen te function is selected, pressing te key once or twice will result in ±. Pressing te key once will result in displaying te positive ampere our value, wereas pressing te key twice will result in displaying te negative ampere our value. In case of te negative ampere our value, will appear in front of te value. Note Wen negative integrated values are displayed, te minimum display reading will become MW/M because of te added minus caracter. During integration is in progress (until being reset), operation of oter functions are restricted. Refer to page 6-10 for more details. 6-3

114 6.2 Setting Integration Mode and Integration Timer Keys B C UPDTE CHECK RNGE VOLTGE FILTER MODE CURRENT RMS VOLTGE DC MEN MX HOLD m V V k Var M W TIME m V PF deg SCLING VG LINE FREQ STORE RECLL HRMONICS KEY LOCK k M W m V Hz k M W % ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT RNGE UTO UTO VOLTGE CURRENT HOLD MODE MX HOLD TRIG CL INTEGRTOR STRT STOP RESET HRMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET REMOTE LOCL SETUP KEY LOCK OUTPUT SHIFT 1P 3W 3P 3W WIRING 3P 4W 3V 3 Te explanation given in tis section uses WT230 as an example. For te differences between te WT210 and te WT230, see section 2.2, Operation Keys and Functions/Element Display. Procedure Operate te instrument by following te tick lines in te menu below. Press te key to confirm a selection or setting. To leave te current menu in te middle of te operation, press te key indicated in step 1. Te confirmed settings up to tat point are kept. Selecting te Integration Mode 1. SHIFT RESET INTEG SET ( Display C ) (See sectoin 9.3) Select te mode ( Display C ) 5. End of setting Selecting te Integration Timer 1. SHIFT RESET INTEG SET 2. ( Display C ) 3. Hour ( Display ) (See sectoin 9.3) 4. sets te value 5. moves digits SHIFT 6. Minute ( Display B ) 9. Second ( Display C ) Same as steps 4 and 5 above Same as steps 4 and 5 above. End of setting 6-4

115 Integration 6.2 Setting Integration Mode and Integration Timer Explanation Selecting te Integration Mode Te following selections are available. Te initial value is nor. nor: Select tis for manual or standard integration mode. Depending on te integration timer, tis instrument will automatically decide te appropriate mode. Cont: Select tis for te continuous integration mode. Setting te Integration Timer Set te integration time. Te setting ranges from (0 rs, 00 min, 00 s) to (10000 rs, 00 min, 00 s). Te initial value is : Wen nor is selected on te integration menu, te manual integration mode will become valid. If Cont is selected, an error code is displayed wen integration is started, and te integration is not performed.s to : Te time during wic integration will be performed wen in te standard or continuous integration mode. Te standard or continuous mode sould be selected at te integration mode menu

116 6.3 Displaying Integrated Values Keys B C UPDTE CHECK RNGE VOLTGE FILTER MODE CURRENT RMS VOLTGE DC MEN MX HOLD m V V k Var M W TIME m V PF deg SCLING VG LINE FREQ STORE RECLL HRMONICS KEY LOCK k M W m V Hz k M W % ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT RNGE UTO UTO VOLTGE CURRENT HOLD MODE MX HOLD TRIG CL INTEGRTOR STRT STOP RESET HRMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET REMOTE LOCL SETUP KEY LOCK OUTPUT SHIFT 1P 3W 3P 3W WIRING 3P 4W 3V 3 Te explanation given in tis section uses WT230 as an example. For te differences between te WT210 and te WT230, see section 2.2, Operation Keys and Functions/Element Display. Procedure 1. Selecting te Display Function Pressing te key on display will select TIME (elapsed integration time). Pressing te key on display C will select W/W± (power), /± (current), or (average active power during integration). Display V W V var TIME C V W V Hz Hz W & & V ± ± W± and ± will ligt twice. and are displayed on te top of display C. You can reverse te order by first pressing te SHIFT key followed by te key. W± W± 2. Selecting te Input Element Select te input element by pressing te ELEMENT key on display C. Te operation is te same as te one described on page Starting Integration Press te STRT key. Te STRT indicator will ligt, te integrated value will appear on display C and te elapsed integration time will appear on display. is displayed first on display C. It is followed by te average active power during integration, if te function is specified in te computation settings (see section 4.12). STRT 4. Holding te displayed value Press te HOLD key. Te HOLD indicator will ligt, and te displayed values will be eld. HOLD 6-6

117 Integration 6.3 Displaying Integrated Values Explanation 5. Cancelling HOLD, and Updating te Integration Continuing from step 4, press te HOLD key once more, or press te SHIFT key followed by te HOLD (TRIG) key. Te HOLD indicator will extinguis and te displayed value will be updated. HOLD TRIG 6. Stopping Integration Press te STOP key. Te STRT indicator will extinguis and te STOP indicator will ligt. Te displayed values will be eld. STOP 7. Resetting Integration Press te RESET key. Te STOP indicator will extinguis and te values on display and C will be reset to RESET Maximum Reading of te Display and Units Maximum reading Integrated value: ( only wen te unit is MW or M), wen displaying negative polarity Elapsed integration time: Units: W (power integration: watt our value), (current integration: ampere our value) Prefix: m, k, M Selecting te Display Function Te following selections are available. W: displays bot te positive and negative watt our values W±: displays te positive watt our value : displays te total ampere our values ±: displays te total ampere our values or te positive ampere our value : te average active power during integration is displayed, if te function is specified in te computation settings (see section 4.12). For more details, refer to page 6-3. Selecting te Input Element 1/2/3: Displays te measurement values of element 1/2/3 Σ: Displays te total integrated values of te elements installed. Te metod of computation depends on te wiring metod. Te computation metod canges to W or for te active power W (see page 5-2). 6 Wen te display function TIME is selected on display, tere is no element function available on display. Pressing te ELEMENT key on display will result in an error code. Update Hold Function ltoug te eld values will not be updated, te integration continues inside te instrument. Because te UPDTE LED blinks eac time te internal data is updated, it will continue to blink. Wen old is being cancelled, te integration results (values and time) corresponding to te point of cancellation, will be displayed. For details regarding te relation wit te STRT/STOP key, refer to te following page. 6-7

118 6.3 Displaying Integrated Values Stopping Integration If you stop integration, te integration process stops at te integrated value and elapsed integration time of te previous display update. Te measured values between te previous display update and te execution of te integration stop are not integrated. Integration Reset Resetting will result in returning te integration results to te status before integration started. Pressing te RESET key is useful after integration as been stopped. For details regarding te relation wit te STRT/STOP key, refer to te following section. Display in case of Integration Over Wen te maximum integration value as been reaced ( MW/M or MW/M), integration will stop and tat result will be eld on te display. Wen te maximum integration time as been reaced (up to rs), integration will stop and tat result will be eld on te display. Note Te maximum number of digits used to display te elapsed time of integration is nine (wen te our, minute, and second digits are added togeter). Te WT210/WT230 displays te elapsed time of integration on display. However, because te maximum number of digits tat can be displayed on display is five, all te digits of te elapsed time of integration may not be displayed in certain cases. Terefore, te number of digits tat are displayed varies depending on te elapsed time of integration as follows: Elapsed Time of Integration Display on Display Display Resolution 0 to 9 r 59 min 59 s to s 10 r to 99 r 59 min 59 s to s 100 r to 999 r 59 min 59 s to min 1000 r to 9999 r 59 min 59 s to min r r For details on W, W±,, ±, see page 6-3. For details related to te average active power during integration, see section Te integrated value is determined and displayed by summing te value tat is measured at every display update rate, irrespective of te MX old function. 6-8

119 Integration 6.4 Precautions Regarding Use of Integrator Function Relation between s and te STRT/STOP key Wen te HOLD key is pressed, te display and communication output of te integrated results is being eld wile integration continues. Te relation between tis old function and te STRT/STOP key is as follows. Even wen starting integration wile te old function is on, te display and communication output will remain uncanged. Only canceling te old function or activating a trigger (pressing te SHIFT key followed by te HOLD (TRIG) key) will result in displaying or outputting te integrated results of te time of cancellation. ON HOLD OFF Displayed value (Dotted line sows integrated value) 6 Elapsed integration time STRT STOP RESET Even wen stopping integration wile te old function is on, te displayed integrated value will remain uncanged. However, as soon te old function is turned off or a trigger is activated, te integrated results of te time wen integration was stopped will be displayed or output. ON HOLD OFF TRIG ON ON ON Displayed value (Dotted line sows integrated value) Elapsed integration time STRT STOP RESET Relation between Integration Reset and te STRT/STOP key Te relation between integration reset and te start/stop key is as follows. uto stop Reset Interrupt Reset Start Interrupt Restart Restart Integrated value Preset time for integration Elapsed integration time STRT STOP STRT STOP RESET STRT RESET 6-9

120 6.4 Precautions Regarding Use of Integrator Function Backup During Power Failures If tere is a power failure wile integration is in progress, te integrated value and integration elapsed time will be backed up. Wen te power is restored, te display will sow te integrated results up to te time te power failure occurred. To start integration after te power is restored, it is necessary to reset integration first. Operating Restrictions during Integration Certain key operations are restricted during integration, and are sown below. Integration status Integration reset Integration in progress Integration interrupted (STRT Indicator) (STOP Indicator) Not lit Not lit Lit Not lit Not lit Lit Function Wiring system (only WT230) Measurement syncronization source Measurement mode Filter Measurement range Crest factor Scaling veraging MX old Display function Input element (only WT230) Number of displayed digits Display update rate Hold Trigger Integration mode Integration timer Integration start Integration stop Integration reset Harmonic measurement (option) Store/recall Comparator Plotter, printer Zero-level compensation Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο Settings cannot be canged, but can be displayed Settings cannot be canged, but can be displayed Ο Store possible Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο Store possible Ο Ο Ο: Settings can be canged : Settings cannot be canged. ttempts will result in an error code. Wen integration is started during auto range, te measurement range will cange to fixed range. If you start integration wen averaging is ON, averaging is turned OFF. It does not turn back ON even if integration is stopped and reset. 6-10

121 Integration 6.4 Precautions Regarding Use of Integrator Function Integration Computation wen te Measured Value Exceeds Measurement Limits Integration Computation Wen te Measured Value Exceeds te Measurement Limit Wen te instantaneous voltage or current of te sampled data exceeds approx. 333% (approximately 666% if te crest factor is set to 6) of te measurement range, te value is considered to be te value corresponding to approx. 333% (approximately 666% if te crest factor is set to 6) for te purpose of integration. Integration Wen Current Input Is Small Wen te measurement mode is RMS/VOLTGE MEN and te current input drops below 0.5% (less tan or equal to 1% if te crest factor is set to 6) of te rated range, te ampere our value is integrated as zero (0). Valid Frequency Range for Integration Te sample rate is approximately 50 khz. Te voltage/current signal frequencies tat are valid for te integration are as follows. Integrated Item Valid Frequency Range for Integration ctive power DC to 25 khz Current Wen te measurement mode is RMS DC, lower limit frequency determined by te display update rate to 25 khz Wen te measurement mode is VOLTGE MEN DC, lower limit frequency determined by te display update rate to 25 khz Wen te measurement mode is DC DC to 25 khz

122 Harmonic Measurement Function (Option) Capter 7 Harmonic Measurement Function (Option) 7.1 Harmonic Measurement Function Tis capter explains te armonic measurement function wic can be applied to normal measurements of voltage, current and power. Measured/Displayed Items fter aving set te armonic measurement function to ON, te armonic component of voltage, current, or active power, will be mesured and displayed for one of te input elements (target element, not applicable for te WT210). Depending on te setting of te display function, te display canges as follows. Display No display function lit V W No display function lit : Displays te armonic order (1 to 50) Display function V,, W : Displays all rms values (computed values) of 1up to 50 components of voltage, current or active power Display B V W PF V% % deg Vdeg W% % V% Display function V : Displays te measured voltage value of te order sown on display : Displays te measured current value of te order sown on display W : Displays te active power measured value of te order sown on display PF : Displays te power factor of te fundamental (1st order) V % : Displays te voltage armonic distortion, proceeded by "t" on display B % : Displays te current armonic distortion, proceeded by "t" on display B V % : Displays te relative armonic content of te voltage of te order sown on display % : Displays te relative armonic content of te current of te order sown on display W % : Displays te relative armonic content of te active power of te order sown on display V deg : In case te 1st order (fundamental) is sown on display : Displays te pase angle between te voltage of te first order and te current of te first order In case te order 2 to 50 is sown on display : Displays te pase angle between te voltage of te first order and eac voltage of te 2nd to 50t order deg : In case te 1st order (fundamental) is sown on display : Displays te pase angle between te voltage of te first order and te current of te first order (same as V deg) In case te order 2 to 50 is sown on display : Displays te pase angle between te current of te first order and eac current of te 2nd to 50t order 7 Display C V W V Hz Hz Display function V,, W V Hz Hz : Displays all rms values (computed values) of 1 up to 50 components of voltage, current or active power. : Displays te fundamental frequency of te voltage for PLL syncronization (displays te measurement value for only te selected voltage input) : Displays te fundamental frequency of te current for PLL syncronization (displays te measurement value for only te selected current input) 7-1

123 7.1 Harmonic Measurement Function uto Range Operation Range Up Wen te measured value of voltage or current (V or ) exceeds 200% of te rated range or wen te peak value (instantaneous voltage or current value tat is sampled) exceeds approximately 300% (approximately 600% if te crest factor is set to 6) of te rated range, te range is increased te next time te measured value is updated. Range down Wen te measured value of te voltage or current is less tan or equal to 30% of te rated range and te peak value is less tan or equal to approximately 300% (less tan or equal to approximately 600% if te crest factor is set to 6) of te rated range of te next lower range, te range is decreased te next time te measured value is updated. Note Wen te range canges, te PLL syncronization will be re-establised. Terefore, correct measurement values migt not be obtained wic migt result in an unstable range. If tis is te case, set te measurement range to a fixed range. Display Update Rate In armonic measurement, you can select te display update rate from 0.25 s, 0.5 s, 1 s, 2 s, and 5 s. For te setup procedure, see section Note Te display update rate of 0.1 s appears as a possible selection wen te armonic measurement function is ON. However, it cannot be selected. If te display update rate ad been set to 0.1 s wen te armonic measurement function was OFF, te rate is canged to 0.25 s wen you turn ON te armonic measurement function. In tis case, te display update rate remains at 0.25 s even if you turn te armonic measurement function back OFF. Holding te Display Wen you use te display old function and cange te order or display function wile te armonic measurement function is ON, you can display te measured armonic data at te corresponding time. Updating te Displayed Data Te display can be updated in te same way as for normal measurement. Overrange/Error Displays Wen te fundamental frequency of te PLL syncronization signal lies outside te measurement range Display B will sow FrqEr. Note Te measurement range of te fundamental frequency of te armonic measurement function is different from te frequency measurement range of normal measurement. Refer to Capter 16 for more details. 7-2

124 Harmonic Measurement Function (Option) 7.1 Harmonic Measurement Function Overrange Dislay Te overrange display (being te same as for normal measurement; see section 2.3) will appear wen all rms values of te 1st to 50t order reac te following value: Greater tan equal to 140% of te rated range for voltage measurement range 600 V or current measurement range 20 Greater tan equal to 140% of te rated range for voltage measurement range 300 V or current measurement range 10 if te crest factor is set to 6 Greater tan 200% of te rated range for voltage measurement ranges oter tan 600 V or current measurement ranges oter tan 20 Greater tan equal to 200% of te rated range for voltage measurement ranges oter tan 300 V or current measurement ranges oter tan 10 if te crest factor is set to 6 Te relative armonic content and armonic distortion are related to voltage and current. Error Display Te power factor or pase angle will sow PFErr or deger wen eiter te voltage, range or power exceeds 200% of te range. Computation Over Display ppears in te same way as for normal measurement. 7 Measurement bort/no Data Display (Bar Display) Te display will sow bar in any of te following cases. Wen tere are no more measured data to be displayed during armonic measurement; Soon after te armonic measurement function as been turned ON; Wen te PLL syncronization is being re-establised; Until te initial measured data are obtained, after aving canged te settings; Wen te analysis order wic depends on te fundamental frequency, exceeds te upper limit, after aving set te order at display ; Wen te display function is set to relative armonic content (%) and te order at display is set to 1; Wen te PLL source is set to voltage, and an attempt is made to display te current frequency (Hz); or wen te PLL source is set to current, and an attempt is made to display te voltage frequency (VHz); Wen an element wic is not assigned to te measurement object, is selected. However, since te frequency is not related to te element setting, te fundamental frequency designated as te PLL source can be displayed. veraging Function Exponential averaging is performed wit an attenuation constant of 8. Output to an External Plotter Using te GP-IB or serial interface, armonic measurement data can be printed as value or grap on an external plotter. Effect of liasing Tis instrument is not equipped wit an internal aliasing filter. Due to aliasing accidental errors may occur under te following circumstances. Fundamental frequency f in Hz 40 f < 70 Wen armonic components of te 256t or iger exist; 70 f < 130 Wen armonic components of te 128t or iger exist; 130 f < 250 Wen armonic components of te 64t or iger exist; 250 f 440 Wen armonic components of te 32nd or iger exist. 7-3

125 7.2 Setting te Target Element, PLL Source and Harmonic Distortion Metod Keys B C UPDTE CHECK RNGE VOLTGE FILTER MODE CURRENT RMS VOLTGE DC MEN MX HOLD m V V k Var M W TIME m V PF deg SCLING VG LINE FREQ STORE RECLL HRMONICS KEY LOCK k M W m V Hz k M W % ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT RNGE UTO UTO VOLTGE CURRENT HOLD MODE MX HOLD TRIG CL INTEGRTOR STRT STOP RESET HRMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET REMOTE LOCL SETUP KEY LOCK OUTPUT SHIFT 1P 3W 3P 3W WIRING 3P 4W 3V 3 Te explanation given in tis section uses WT230 as an example. For te differences between te WT210 and te WT230, see section 2.2, Operation Keys and Functions/Element Display. Procedure Operate te instrument by following te tick lines in te menu below. Press te key to confirm a selection or setting. To leave te current menu in te middle of te operation, press te key indicated in step 1. Te confirmed settings up to tat point are kept. 1. SHIFT 1. SHIFT STRT HRMONICS STRT HRMONICS Setting te Target Element (WT230 only) (Display C) 2. Setting te PLL source 2. (Display C) Set te element (Display C) 5. End of setting Tis is an example for te WT230 (760503). Te display varies depending on te number of installed elements Set te PLL source (Display C) 5. End of setting Tis is an example for te WT230 (760503). Te display varies depending on te number of installed elements. Metod of te Harmonic Distortion 1. (Display C) SHIFT STRT HRMONICS Set te computation metod (Display C) End of setting 7-4

126 Harmonic Measurement Function (Option) 7.2 Setting te Target Element, PLL Source and Harmonic Distortion Metod Explanation Setting te Target Element Only one input element sould be set for armonic measurement. Te initial value is EL1. t te WT210 te element setting menu does not appear. EL1: Element 1 is used for measurement; EL2: Element 2 is used for measurement; For , tis menu is not sown; EL3: Element 3 is used for measurement. Setting te PLL source For armonic measurement, it is necessary to select te input to be used as te fundamental frequency (PLL source) for syncronization (PLL stands for Pase Locked Loop). V1: Sets te voltage of element 1 as te PLL source; 1: Sets te current of element 1 as te PLL source; V2: Sets te voltage of element 2 as te PLL source; 2: Sets te current of element 2 as te PLL source; V3: Sets te voltage of element 3 as te PLL source; 3: Sets te current of element 3 as te PLL source. Note If te fundamental frequency of te PLL source cannot be measured due to fluctuations or distortion, it is not possible to obtain correct measurement results. In tis case, it is suggested tat voltage wit relatively small distortion be selected as te PLL source. It is recommended to turn ON te frequency filter in cases were te fundamental frequency is 500 Hz or less and ig frequency components are present. Te cutoff frequency of tis filter is 500 Hz. Te filter is valid only for te PLL source. If te amplitude of te input signal selected as te PLL source is smaller tan te rated range value, PLL syncronization may sometimes fail. In tis case, it is suggested tat a suitable measurement range be selected so tat te input level exceeds 30% (greater tan or equal to 60% if te crest factor is set to 6) of te rated range value. 7 Setting te Computation Metod of Harmonic Distortion Te computation metod of armonic distortion can be selected from te following two. In te following explanation a maximum of 50 analysis orders is assumed. In case of a maximum less tan 50, computation/display will be performed up to tat order. iec: Computes te ratio of te rms value of te 2nd to 50t order component to tat of te fundamental (1st order). CS: Computes te ratio of te rms value of te 2nd to 50t order component to tat of te rms value of te 1st to 50t component. Computation Equation In case of iec n k=2 (Ck) 2 /C1 In case of CS n k=2 (Ck) 2 / n k=1 (Ck) 2 C1: Fundamental component (1st order) Ck: Fundamental or armonic component k: nalysis order n: Maximum order. Te maximum order depends on te fundamental frequency of te input set as te PLL source. Refer to Capter 16 for more details. 7-5

127 7.3 Turning ON/OFF te Harmonic Measurement Function Keys B C UPDTE CHECK RNGE VOLTGE FILTER MODE CURRENT RMS VOLTGE DC MEN MX HOLD m V V k Var M W TIME m V PF SCLING VG LINE FREQ STORE RECLL HRMONICS KEY LOCK k M W deg m V Hz k M W % ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT UTO VOLTGE CURRENT MODE STRT HRMONICS REMOTE LOCL KEY LOCK 1P 3W 3P 4W RNGE UTO MX HOLD STOP MEMORY SETUP OUTPUT 3P 3W 3V 3 HOLD TRIG CL INTEGRTOR RESET INTEG SET SHIFT WIRING Te explanation given in tis section uses WT230 as an example. For te differences between te WT210 and te WT230, see section 2.2, Operation Keys and Functions/Element Display. Procedure Operate te instrument by following te tick lines in te menu below. Press te key to confirm a selection or setting. To leave te current menu in te middle of te operation, press te key indicated in step 1. Te confirmed settings up to tat point are kept. Turning te Harmonic Measurement Function ON/OFF 1. (Display C) 3. STRT SHIFT HRMONICS 2. End of setting Explanation Turning te Harmonic Measurement Function ON/OFF on: Pressing te key after selecting on will result in starting of te armonic measurement and te HRMONICS indicator will ligt up. Te armonic order will be displayed on display. off: Pressing te key after selecing off will result in stopping of te armonic measurement and te HRMONICS indicator will extinguis. Note Wen te armonic measurement function is turned ON, te measurement mode will automatically cange to RMS mode. Wen te armonic measurement function is turned OFF, te measurement mode will stay te RMS mode. Wen te armonic measurement function is ON, integration cannot be started. nd accordingly, wen te integration is in progress, te armonic measurement function cannot be started (refer to page 6-10). 7-6

128 Harmonic Measurement Function (Option) 7.4 Setting te Harmonic Order and Displaying te Measured Harmonic Value Keys B C UPDTE CHECK RNGE VOLTGE FILTER MODE CURRENT RMS VOLTGE DC MEN MX HOLD m V V k Var M W TIME m V PF SCLING VG LINE FREQ STORE RECLL HRMONICS KEY LOCK k M W deg m V Hz k M W % ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT RNGE UTO UTO VOLTGE CURRENT HOLD MODE MX HOLD TRIG CL INTEGRTOR STRT STOP RESET HRMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET REMOTE LOCL SETUP KEY LOCK OUTPUT SHIFT 1P 3W 3P 3W WIRING 3P 4W 3V 3 Te explanation given in tis section uses WT230 as an example. For te differences between te WT210 and te WT230, see section 2.2, Operation Keys and Functions/Element Display. Procedure Te following operations assume tat te armonic measurement function is turned ON. Setting te Harmonics Order 1. Ligt up te display function indicator of display. Display Ligt up display function V W 7 2. Set te armonics order. (Display ) Displaying te Measured Harmonic Values Displays eac measured value after aving set te display function of eiter display B or C. Display B V W PF V% % deg Vdeg W% % V% Display C V W V Hz Hz Explanation Setting te Order of Harmonics Te maximum order for wic analysis results can be displayed varies depending on te frequency of te fundamental. Example Wen te fundamental frequency is 50 Hz, up to 50 orders can be displayed; Wen te fundamental frequency is 400 Hz, up to 30 orders can be displayed. Wen an order is set exceeding te maximum order, display B will cange to te dot display. Refer to Capter 16 for more details on upper limits of analysis orders. 7-7

129 7.4 Setting te Harmonic Order and Displaying te Measured Harmonic Value Displaying te Measured Harmonic Values Depending on te setting of display function of display B and C, te measured data of items will appear on te display as follows. In te following explanation a maximum of 50 analysis orders is assumed. In case of a maximum less tan 50, computation/ display will be performed up to tat order. Display B V: Sows te measured value of te voltage corresponding to te order sown on display ; : Sows te measured value of te current corresponding to te order sown on display ; W: Sows te measured value of te active power corresponding to te order sown on display ; PF: Sows te power factor of te fundamental (1st order); V%: Sows te armonic distortion of te voltage followed by te caracter t ; Two computation metods are available; Refer to page 7-5 for details. Te display range is 0.00 to to to 999.9%. %: Sows te armonic distortion of te current followed by te caracter t ; Two computation metods are available; Refer to page 7-5 for details. Te display range is 0.00 to to to 999.9%. V%: Sows te relative armonic content of te voltage corresponding to te order sown on display ; Te display range wen te number of displayed digits is 5 is to to to %. %: Sows te relative armonic content of te current corresponding to te order sown on display ; Te display range wen te number of displayed digits is 5 is to to to %. W%: Sows te relative armonic content of te active power corresponding to te order sown on display ; Te display range wen te number of displayed digits is 5 is to ± to ± to ±999.99%. V deg: In case te fundamental (1st order) is sown on display Sows te pase angle between te 1st order of te current and te 1st order of te voltage. G (pase lag) or d (pase lead) will also be displayed. In case te 2nd to 50t order is sown on display Sows te pase angle between te 1st order of te voltage and te 2nd to 50t order of eac voltage. (minus) will be displayed in front of te order only wen te 2nd to 50t order is pase-lagged. Te display range is to deg. deg: In case te fundamental (1st order) is sown on display Sows te same as in case of V deg. In case te 2nd to 50t order is sown on display Sows te pase angle between te 1st order of te current and te 2nd to 50t order of eac current. (minus) will be displayed in front of te order only wen te 2nd to 50t order is pase-lagged. Te display range is to deg. 7-8

130 Harmonic Measurement Function (Option) 7.4 Setting te Harmonic Order and Displaying te Measured Harmonic Value Display C V: Sows eac rms (computed) value of te 1st to 50t armonic component of te voltage; : Sows eac rms (computed) value of te 1st to 50t armonic component of te current; W: Sows eac rms (computed) value of te 1st to 50t armonic component of te active power; Computation Equation V= = n k=1 n k=1 (Vk) 2 (k) 2 W= n k=1 Wk Vk, k, Wk: Eac component of 1st to 50t order of voltage, current and active power; k: nalysis order n: Maximum order. Te maximum order depends on te fundamental frequency of te input set as te PLL source. Refer to Capter 16 for more details. 7 V Hz: Sows te fundamental frequency of te voltage of te PLL source. Tis frequency applies only to te element selected as PLL source. For details regarding te PLL source setting, refer to page 7-4. Te measurement range is te same as in case of normal measurement. Te range of fundamental frequencies in case of armonic measurement is 40 to 440 Hz. However, depending on internal timing, tere are cases were measurements in te 20 to 700 Hz range can be performed. Hz: Sows te fundamental frequency of te current of te PLL source. Te rest is te same as in case of V Hz. Note In case you select an input element using te ELEMENT key wic is not te assigned element for te armonic measurement or you selected a display function wic is not being measured, ten te bar display appears. Wen te armonic measurement function is turned ON on te WT230, pressing te ELEMENT key will not result in moving to Σ. Wen pressing te key on display, and te display function becomes V, or W, ten display will sow te same measured items as te V, or W sown on display C. Caracteristics suc as maximum reading, display range, units, and prefix. wic are not described on te previous page, are not different from te caracteristics of normal measurement. 7-9

131 Store/Recall Function of Measured/Computed Data and Setup Parameters Capter 8 Store/Recall Function of Measured/Computed Data and Setup Parameters 8.1 Storing/Recalling Measured/Computed Data Keys B C UPDTE CHECK RNGE VOLTGE FILTER MODE CURRENT RMS VOLTGE DC MEN MX HOLD m V V k Var M W TIME m V PF k M W deg m V Hz SCLING VG LINE FREQ STORE RECLL HRMONICS KEY LOCK k M W % ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT RNGE UTO UTO VOLTGE CURRENT HOLD MODE MX HOLD TRIG CL INTEGRTOR STRT STOP RESET HRMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET REMOTE LOCL SETUP KEY LOCK OUTPUT SHIFT 1P 3W 3P 3W WIRING 3P 4W 3V 3 Te explanation given in tis section uses WT230 as an example. For te differences between te WT210 and te WT230, see section 2.2, Operation Keys and Functions/Element Display. Procedure Operate te instrument by following te tick lines in te menu below. Press te key to confirm a selection or setting. To leave te current menu in te middle of te operation, press te key indicated in step 1. Te confirmed settings up to tat point are kept. Setting te Storage Interval for Measured/Computed Data 8 1. SHIFT STOP MEMORY Select te store function (Display C) (Display C) 5. Set te interval (Display C) our min sec 6. Up/down 8. End of setting 7. Sift cursor SHIFT Turning Measured/Computed Data Storage ON/OFF 1. SHIFT STOP MEMORY Select te store function (Display C) (Display C) 5. End of setting 8-1

132 8.1 Storing/Recalling Measured/Computed Data Setting te Recall Interval for Measured/Computed Data 1. SHIFT STOP MEMORY Select te recall function (Display C) (Display C) 5. Set te Interval (Display C) our min sec 6. Up/down 8. End of setting 7. Sift cursor SHIFT Recalling Measured/Computed Data ON/OFF 1. SHIFT STOP MEMORY Select te recall function (Display C) (Display C) End of setting Explanation Storing Measured/Computed Data (Storing into Internal Memory) One block consists of all data wic are obtained wen te display is updated once. Te data number increases by te number of used input elements and terefore te number of blocks tat can be stored depends on te model as described above. Te number of blocks wic can be stored into te internal memory is as follows. Model In case of normal measurement In case of armonic measurement Blocks 30 Blocks Blocks 30 Blocks Blocks 30 Blocks Items wic can be stored Wen storing normal measured data (armonic measurement function is turned OFF) Eac measured/computed/integrated data of normal measurement will be stored. However, only eiter te voltage frequency or current frequency will be stored.* * If eiter one of te display function, V Hz or Hz, is turned on, te frequency of te corresponding function is stored. If bot display functions are OFF, te voltage frequency of te element assigned to display C is stored. Wen storing armonic measurement data (armonic measurement function is turned ON) Normal measured data will not be stored. ll measured data of te elements wic are being used for te measurement, will be stored. borting Storage Te store operation stops in te following conditions. wen all te above described blocks are full; wen during te storage process off is selected at te store ON/OFF setting. 8-2

133 Store/Recall Function of Measured/Computed Data and Setup Parameters 8.1 Storing/Recalling Measured/Comupted Data Setting te Storage Interval Sets te time during wic storage will be carried out. Wen starting storage, te recalling interval (see next page) is also set to te same value as te specified store interval. Setting range: (0 rs, 00 min, 00 sec) to (99 rs, 59 min, 59 sec) Initial value: Wen set to , te store interval is set to te same value as te display update rate. Storage ON/OFF fter aving set te storage interval, select te store menu once again. Te initial value is off. on: Storing will start by pressing te key after selecting on ; te STORE indicator will ligt wile storage is in progress. off: Storing will stop by pressing te key after selecting off ; te STORE indicator will extinguis. Note fter storing as been stopped and storing is restarted, te existing data in te memory will be overwritten. Previous data will terefore be lost. Stored data will be kept even after te power as been turned OFF because of te internal litium battery. For a description of te litium battery life, see section Wen integrated values are not present, te bar display will be stored as data, wereas will be stored as integration preset time. Wen te fundamental frequency is ig and up to 50 orders of armonic measurement data are not present, te bar display will be stored as data. Wile storage is in progress, several settings cannot be canged, suc as switcing te armonic measurement function ON/OFF, canging te target element, te PLL source, te armonic distortion factor computation metod, nor can display update rate, scaling, averaging, filter, measurement syncronization source, and crest factor settings be canged, nor integration mode, integration time and storage interval. If you press te HOLD key wile storing data, te measurement operation and te counting operation of te store interval are suspended. Te storage operation itself is also suspended. However, if integration is in progress, measurement and integration continues internally. Te displayed values of V (voltage), (current), W (active power), V (apparent power), var (reactive power), Vpk (voltage peak), and pk (current peak) wile te MX old function (see section 4.8) is enabled will be te maximum values (MX) tat are eld. Te values for D/ output, output to external plotter and printer, and communication output are also set to te maximum values (MX) tat are eld. Te measured data tat are stored are also set to te maximum values (MX) tat are eld. Settings for te te MX old function cannot be canged during storage

134 8.1 Storing/Recalling Measured/Computed Data Recalling Measured/Computed Data (Retrieving Data from te Internal Memory) fter displaying data stored in te internal memory, you can use all display functions and carry out integration and display tese data. Furtermore, by using te communication function, data can be output. Items wic can be recalled all data wic can be stored. borting Recalling Te recall operation stops in te following conditions. wen all stored data are retrieved; wen during te recall process off is selected at te store ON/OFF setting. Setting te Recalling Interval Sets te time interval for repeating te recall operation. Setting range: (0 rs, 00 min, 00 sec) to (99 rs, 59 min, 59 sec) Initial value: Wen set to , te recalling interval is set to te display update rate as wen te data was stored. Recalling ON/OFF fter aving set te recalling interval, select te recall menu once again. Te initial value is off. on: Recalling will start by pressing te key after selecting on ; te RECLL indicator will ligt wile recalling is in progress. off: Recalling will stop by pressing te key after selecting off ; te RECLL indicator will extinguis Note During recalling, te measurement conditions/range * will become as tose of te data being recalled. fter recalling finises, te original measurement conditions will return. * Measurement range, measurement mode, measurement syncronization source, input filter ON/OFF, scaling ON/OFF, scaling constants, averaging ON/OFF, averaging mode, averaging coefficients, MX old ON/OFF, display update rate, crest factor, integration mode, integration time, armonic measurement function ON/OFF, PLL source, target element, computation metod of armonic distortion factor Wen recalling data to a personal computer by communication interface, data migt be cut due to te data lengt or used personal computer. In suc a case, increase te recalling interval. 8-4

135 Store/Recall Function of Measured/Computed Data and Setup Parameters 8.2 Storing/Recalling Setup Parameters Keys B C UPDTE CHECK RNGE VOLTGE FILTER MODE CURRENT RMS VOLTGE DC MEN MX HOLD m V V k Var M W TIME m V PF deg SCLING VG LINE FREQ STORE RECLL HRMONICS KEY LOCK k M W m V Hz k M W % ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT RNGE UTO UTO VOLTGE CURRENT HOLD MODE MX HOLD TRIG CL INTEGRTOR STRT STOP RESET HRMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET REMOTE LOCL SETUP KEY LOCK OUTPUT SHIFT 1P 3W 3P 3W WIRING 3P 4W 3V 3 Te explanation given in tis section uses WT230 as an example. For te differences between te WT210 and te WT230, see section 2.2, Operation Keys and Functions/Element Display. Procedure Operate te instrument by following te tick lines in te menu below. Press te key to confirm a selection or setting. To leave te current menu in te middle of te operation, press te key indicated in step 1. Te confirmed settings up to tat point are kept. Storing Setup Parameters 8 1. SHIFT Select storage of setup parameters (Display C) STOP MEMORY Select te file for storage (Display B) End of setting Recalling Setup Parameters Wen select parameters are already stored to te file, display C will sow " " Wen no data are stored yet, display C will sow " " 1. SHIFT Select recalling of setup parameters (Display C) STOP MEMORY Select te file for recalling (Display B) End of setting Wen select parameters are already stored to te file, display C will sow " " Wen no data are stored yet, display C will sow " " 8-5

136 8.2 Storing/Recalling Setup Parameters Explanation Storing Setup Parameters Stores te current setup parameters wic consist of te following. Four destinations (FiLE1/FilE2/FiLE3/FiLE4) are available. Measurement range, measurement mode, measurement syncronization source, scaling settings, averaging settings, input filter settings, MX old ON/OFF setting, computation settings, number of displayed digits, display update rate setting, crest factor, integration settings, armonic settings, plotter output settings, store/recall settings, and communication settings. Wen data are saved in a file and you want to save data in te same file, display C will sow SVEd. Pressing te key will result in overwriting te previously saved data. Setup parameters are saved in anoter internal memory tan measured data. Saved setup parameters are backed up by te litium battery in te same way as measured data. For a description of te litium battery life, see section Recalling Setup Parameters Wen setup parameters are being retrieved, all setup parameters are being set accordingly. fter tat, measurements can be carried out. 8-6

137 External In/Output Function Capter 9 External In/Output Function 9.1 Pin rrangement and Pin ssignments of te External I/O Connector (Option) WRNING Te connectors used in tis function ave protective covers. Wen te covers are removed or wen using connectors, te voltage ratings across te measuring input and te ground become as follows: Voltage between CURRENT, ±(VOLTGE and CURRENT side) input terminals and ground 400 Vrms max. Voltage between VOLTGE input terminal and ground 600 Vrms max. Put te protective cover on te connector wen tis function is not used. Using te external I/O connector, tis instrument can be remotely controlled and D/ output can be done. Te connector s pin sequence and signal assignment is as follows. Connector s Pin rrangement WT210: WT230: , (Rear panel) Pin ssignment Remote control:input circuit +5 V (Rear panel) Remote control:output circuit +5 V 10 kω 10 kω 100 Ω 0.01 µf µf TTL level L: 0 to 0.8V H: 2.0 to 5V TTL level L: 0 to 0.4 V (8 m) H: 2.4 to 5 V ( 400 µ) /D4 specifications (for WT210: only) remote control, 4 cannel D/ output Pin No. Signal Pin No. Signal DIGITL COM EXT HOLD EXT STRT EXT RESET (Input) (Input) (Input) DIGITL COM EXT TRIG EXT STOP INTEG BUSY No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection 10 D 3c (Output) 22 D 4c 11 D 1c (Output) 23 D 2c 12 D COM 24 D COM (Input) (Input) (Output) (Output) (Output) 9-1

138 9.1 Pin rrangement and Pin ssignments of te External I/O Connector (Option) /D12 specifications (for WT230: , ) remote control, 12 cannel D/ output Pin No. Signal Pin No. Signal DIGITL COM EXT HOLD EXT STRT EXT RESET (Input) (Input) (Input) DIGITL COM EXT TRIG EXT STOP INTEG BUSY 5 No Connection 17 No Connection 6 D 11c (Output) 18 D 12c 7 D 9c (Output) 19 D 10c 8 D 7c (Output) 20 D 8c 9 D 5c (Output) 21 D 6c 10 D 3c (Output) 22 D 4c 11 D 1c (Output) 23 D 2c 12 D COM 24 D COM (Input) (Input) (Output) (Output) (Output) (Output) (Output) (Output) (Output) /CMP specifications (for WT210/WT230: , , ) remote control, 4 cannel D/ output, 4 cannel comparator output Pin No. Signal Pin No. Signal 1 2 EXT STOP EXT HOLD (Input) (Input) DIGITL COM EXT TRIG RELY 3c NC COM NO RELY RELY 1c NC COM NO RELY 9 INTEG BUSY (Output) 21 EXT RESET 10 D 3c (Output) 22 D 4c 11 D 1c (Output) 23 D 2c 12 EXT STRT (Input) 24 D COM (Input) 4c NC COM NO 2c NC COM NO (Input) (Output) (Output) 9-2

139 External In/Output Function 9.2 Remote Control (Option) Controlling Integration To control integration, apply timing signals according to te timing cart below. Start Stop Reset Start Stop EXT STRT 5 ms min. 5 ms min. EXT STOP 5 ms min. EXT RESET pprox. 15 ms pprox. 15 ms pprox. 15 ms pprox. 15 ms INTEG BUSY s sown in te timing cart, te INTEG BUSY output signal level goes low wile integration is in progress. Te signal can be used to monitor integration, etc. Holding Display Data Update (same function as HOLD key) To old te display update, apply te EXT. HOLD signal according to te timing cart below. EXT. HOLD Display old 5 ms min. 9 Updating Display Data wic as been eld (same function as TRIG key) pplying an EXT.TRIG signal wen te display is on old updates te display data. Update timing during normal measurement/integration Measurement start Display update 250 ms or more and display update interval or more 5 ms min. EXT. TRIG Update timing wile armonic analysis function is in progress Measurement start Display update Display update interval or more 5 ms min. 5 ms min. EXT. TRIG Note If te period of te EXT. TRIG signal does not meet te conditions of te figure above, te signal may not be identified by te WT210/WT230. CUTION Do not apply a voltage wic exceeds te TTL level to te remote controller pin. lso, do not sort te output pins nor apply a voltage to tem. Te instrument migt be damaged. 9-3

140 9.3 D/ Output (Option) Keys B C UPDTE CHECK RNGE VOLTGE FILTER MODE CURRENT RMS VOLTGE DC MEN MX HOLD m V V k Var M W TIME m V PF deg SCLING VG LINE FREQ STORE RECLL HRMONICS KEY LOCK k M W m V Hz k M W % ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT RNGE UTO UTO VOLTGE CURRENT HOLD MODE MX HOLD TRIG CL INTEGRTOR STRT STOP RESET HRMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET REMOTE LOCL SETUP KEY LOCK OUTPUT SHIFT 1P 3W 3P 3W WIRING 3P 4W 3V 3 Te explanation given in tis section uses WT230 as an example. For te differences between te WT210 and te WT230, see section 2.2, Operation Keys and Functions/Element Display. Procedure Operate te instrument by following te tick lines in te menu below. Press te key to confirm a selection or setting. To leave te current menu in te middle of te operation, press te key indicated in step 1. Te confirmed settings up to tat point are kept. 1. SHIFT Setting te D/ Output Select te D/ output function ( Display C ) SETUP 2. OUTPUT 3. Select te output format ( Display C ) End of setting (select default setting) (Select original setting) Set output cannel*2 ( Display B ) 7. Set te output item ( Display C ) 11. *1 6., *1 Wen you press te key at step 11, te output cannel displayed at display B will cange to te next cannel, i.e. from c1 to c2 and so fort. *2 Te number of cannels depends on te installed options. In case of option /D4 or /CMP, tere are four cannels, in case of option /D12, tere are twelve cannels available. *3 Depends on te model number. Refer to te explanation for more details. 13. End of setting B 8. sets te column (output function) 9. moves to te B column SHIFT 10. *3 selects from element 1 to 4 (except ) 9-4

141 External In/Output Function 9.3 D/ Output (Option) Setting te Preset integration Time 1. SHIFT RESET INTEG SET Select te preset integration time ( Display C ) 2. Hour 3. ( Display ) sets te value 5. moves digits SHIFT Minute ( Display B ) Same as steps 4 and 5 above Second ( Display C ) Same as steps 4 and 5 above 12. End of setting Explanation D/ Output Voltage, current, active power, apparent power, reactive power, power factor, pase angle, armonic measurement data and integrated data values will be output as a 5 V FS analog voltage. Te number of items wic can be output (number of output cannels) depends on te installed options. Default Setting of te Output Format (D/) Te default items wic will be output can be selected as follows. dflt-n (normal measurement values are set as default) Select tis wen you want to output normal measurement values. Wic items are output to wic cannel is described below. 9 Option Model c1 c2 c3 c4 c5 Output c6 cannel c7 c8 c9 c10 c11 c12 /D V W Hz Tese cannels cannot be set. /D12 /CMP V1 *2 V1 *2 V *2 *2 - V2 V3 V3 W *1 ΣV 1-3 Σ W1 - W3 ΣW ΣV Σ W1 W2 W3 ΣW Hz *1 V1 1 W1 Hz *1 Tese cannels cannot be set. V1 1 W1 Hz *1 *1 *2 If eiter one of te display function, V Hz or Hz, is turned on, te frequency of te corresponding function is output. If bot display functions are OFF, te voltage frequency of te element assigned to display C is output. Te number corresponds to input element 1, 2, or

142 9.3 D/ Output (Option) dflt-i (integration measurement values are set as default) Select tis wen you want to output integration measurement values. Wic items are output to wic cannel is described below. Option Model c1 c2 c3 c4 c5 Output c6 cannel c7 c8 c9 c10 c11 c12 *1 *2 /D W W Hz Tese cannels cannot be set. /D12 /CMP W1 *2 W1 *2 W *2 *2 - W2 W W3 W3 *1 ΣW W1 - W3 ΣW 1-3 Σ ΣW W1 W2 W3 ΣW Σ Hz *1 W1 W1 1 Hz *1 Tese cannels cannot be set. W1 W1 1 Hz *1 If eiter one of te display function, V Hz or Hz, is turned on, te frequency of te corresponding function is output. If bot display functions are OFF, te voltage frequency of te element assigned to display C is output. Te number corresponds to input element 1, 2, or 3. Setting an Original Output Format Te items to be output (output function and element) are set per eac output cannel. Setting te output cannel Te number of cannels depends on te installed options and can be selected from te following. /D4: 4 cannels /D12: 12 cannels /CMP: 4 cannels Setting te output function (corresponds to column in te procedure) Te output function can be set to any of te following. V (voltage), (current), P (active power), Vr (reactive power), V (apparent power), PF (power factor), VFrq (voltage frequency *1 ), Frq (current frequency *1 ), P (total Watt-our W), (total mpere-our), deg (pase angle), VP (peak value of voltage), P (peak value of current), MTH (computation), P+ (positive watt our value W+), P (negative watt our value W ), + (positive ampere our value *2 ), (negative ampere our value *2 ), (D/ output 0 V; no furter elements can be set) *1 If eiter one of te display function, V Hz or Hz, is turned on, te frequency of te corresponding function is output. If bot display functions are OFF, te voltage frequency of te element assigned to display C tat was illuminated last wen display function V Hz or Hz was illuminated is output. *2 For details concerning te positive value of te ampere our, refer to page 6-3. Setting te element (corresponds to colum B in te procedure) WT210 (760401) no suc element setting available; WT230 (760502) element can be selected from 1, 3, or 4 WT230 (760503) element can be selected from 1, 2, 3, or 4 Te element number 4 represents Σ. 9-6

143 External In/Output Function 9.3 D/ Output (Option) Setting te rated integration time Te D/ output of integrated values is 5.0 VFS wen rated value is input continuously for te specified time (integration preset time). Tis is also true wen scaling or Σ is specified. Selectable range: (0 ours 00 minutes 00 seconds) to (10000 ours, 00 minutes, 00 seconds). Te initial value is If te time is set to , te D output value becomes 0 V. Note Te displayed values of V (voltage), (current), W (active power), V (apparent power), var (reactive power), Vpk (voltage peak), and pk (current peak) wile te MX old function (see section 4.8) is enabled will be te maximum values (MX) tat are eld. Te values for D/ output are also set to te maximum values (MX) tat are eld. Te D/ output of eac output item is configured so tat 5.0 VFS is output wen te value corresponding to te range rating of te voltage, current, or power is applied. Even wen scaling constants for voltage, current, and power are specified, te D/ output is adjusted so tat 5.0 VFS is output wen te value corresponding to te range rating is applied. lso wen Σ is specified for te element wit te scaling constant of eac element is different, te D/ output is adjusted so tat 5.0 VFS is output wen te value corresponding to te range rating is applied to eac element. If (computation) is specified, te D/ output is 0 V except for efficiency and average active power

144 9.3 D/ Output (Option) Relation between te output item and te D/ output voltage Frequency D/ output pprox. 7.5 V 5.0 V 2.5 V 0.5 V 10 Hz 0.5 Hz 1Hz 100 Hz 1 khz 10 khz 100 khz Displayed value Integrated value D/ output pprox. 7.0 V 140% of rated value input 5.0 V Rated input 0 Time t0 t0: rated integration time Oter items D/ output pprox. 7.5 V pprox. 7.0 V Displayed value Output 140% pprox. 7.0 V 100% 5.0 V 0% 0 V 100% 5.0 V 140% pprox. 7.0 V V Displayed value [%] 5.0 V pprox. 7.0 V pprox. 7.5 V For PF and deg, points in te range from +5 to +7 V and from 5 to 7 V are not output. If tere is an error, te output will be about ±7.5 V. If te MTH setting is set to efficiency, te output will be +5 V for 100% For Vp and p, te output will be ±5 V wen te value is tree times (six times if te crest factor is set to 6) te range. 9-8

145 External In/Output Function 9.4 Comparator Function (Option) Wen te instrument is equipped wit option /CMP you can compare te measured, computed, and integrated values wit previously set limits and tese results can be output by contact relay. Contact Relay Output Tis instrument is equipped wit four contact relays (4 c) as follows. If te relay is not operating, te NC (Normally Closed) contact is closed. If te relay is operating, te NC contact is opened and te NO (Normally Open) contact is closed. Relay specifications Contact rating: rated 24 V/0.5 (max. 30 V/0.5 ) Minimum load: 10 mv/10 µ Operating life wit load: approx times (at contact rating) Operating life witout load: approx. one undred million times Contact Response time: 2 times te display update rate or less Note Since tis relay is subject to wear, it is excluded from te 3-year warranty. CUTION Damage to te relays may occur wen a voltage or current exceeding te specified range is applied to te contact output terminal. 9 Comparator Mode Te following two comparator modes are available. Single Mode If te measured, computed, and integrated values exceed te previously set limits, te relay contact will become NO. Tis mode is useful wen you want to assign eac of te four relays individually. Refer to te figure below. Wen te current value is less tan 3 : NO-GO will be determined and te circuit becomes open. Wen te current value is 3 or more: GO will be determined and te circuit becomes closed. Current Below limit open status 3 Limit of c2 is set to 3 NO-GO determination area 24 V NC NO COM c 2 Time Current Exceeding limit closed status GO determination area 3 Limit of c2 is set to 3 24 V NC NO COM c 2 Time 9-9

146 9.4 Comparator Function (Option) Dual Mode Tis mode allows you to combine te limit values of two relays (e.g. te upper value (Hi) and te lower value (Lo)) to determine te contact status. Te four relays will be fixed as two pairs of c1 & c2 and c3 & c4. Setting te limit values of a pair of relays (e.g. c1 & c2) can only be done at te same display function. Te setting metod, relay operation, etc. are te same as in te single mode, and wen te measured, computed, and integrated values exceed te preset limits, te contact status will become NO. Te following sows an example. Wen te current value exceeds 1, but is less ten 3 : GO will be ditermined and te circuit becomes closed. Wen te current value lies below 1, or exceeds 3 : NO-GO will be determined and te circuit becomes open. Below lower limit open circuit Current COM 3 Upper limit (Hi) Limit of c1 is set to 3 24 V NC 1 Lower limit (Lo) Limit of c2 is set to 1 NO-GO determination area Time Exceeding lower limit, below upper closed circuit Current 3 Upper limit (Hi) Limit of c1 is set to 3 GO determination area 1 Lower limit (Lo) Limit of c2 is set to 1 Time 24 V NO COM NC NO NC NO NC NO COM COM c 1 c 2 c 1 c 2 Current 3 Upper limit (Hi) NO-GO determination area Limit of c1 is set to 3 Exceeding upper limit open circuit 24 V COM NC NO c 1 1 Lower limit (Lo) Limit of c2 is set to 1 Time NC NO COM c 2 Note In te dual mode, te combinations c1&c2, and c3&c4 are fixed. Te following combinations are not possible. Witin a pair you can set eiter cannel as upper or lower limit. Te values of V (voltage), (current), W (active power), V (apparent power), var (reactive power), Vpk (voltage peak), and pk (current peak) wile te MX old function (see section 4.8) is enabled will be displayed according to te maximum values (MX) tat are eld. Te values tat are compared against te limit values are also te maximum values (MX) tat are eld. 9-10

147 External In/Output Function 9.4 Comparator Function (Option) CUTION Make sure not to greatly vary te input signal wen using te comparator function. Depending on te input signal used for determination, te instrument may display error codes (i.e. overrange) and tis will cange te output relays as follows. Wen using te output relay as a control signal, make sure to matc tese control signals wit oter equipments to eliminate erroneuous control. Displayed error Relay status ol (over range) Te NC contact is closed. of (over flow) Te NC contact is closed. deger (pase angle error) Te NC contact is closed. PFErr (power factor error) Te NC contact is closed. ErrLo (frequency error) Te NC contact is closed. ErrHi (frequency error) Te NO contact is closed for tis case only. FrqErr (frequency error in case of armonic measurement) Te NC contact is closed. (error wen no data are present) Te NC contact is closed

148 9.5 Setting te Comparator Mode (Option) Keys B C UPDTE CHECK RNGE VOLTGE FILTER MODE CURRENT RMS VOLTGE DC MEN MX HOLD m V V k Var M W TIME m V PF k M W deg m V Hz SCLING VG LINE FREQ STORE RECLL HRMONICS KEY LOCK k M W % ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT RNGE UTO UTO VOLTGE CURRENT HOLD MODE MX HOLD TRIG CL INTEGRTOR STRT STOP RESET HRMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET REMOTE LOCL SETUP KEY LOCK OUTPUT SHIFT 1P 3W 3P 3W WIRING 3P 4W 3V 3 Te explanation given in tis section uses WT230 as an example. For te differences between te WT210 and te WT230, see section 2.2, Operation Keys and Functions/Element Display. Procedure 1. SHIFT SETUP OUTPUT Operate te instrument by following te tick lines in te menu below. Press te key to confirm a selection or setting. To leave te current menu in te middle of te operation, press te key indicated in step 1. Te confirmed settings up to tat point are kept. Select te comparator function (Display C) (Display C) Select te mode (Display C) 7. End of setting Explanation Setting te Comparator Mode Te following two settings are available. For details, see pages 9-9 and Te initial value is SinGL. SinGL: te comparator mode will be set to single mode; dul: te comparator mode will be set to dual mode. Note Wen you cange te comparator mode after aving set te comparator limit (see page 9-13 and succeeding pages), te situation will cange as follows. lso verify te comparator limits again. Wen you cange te mode to te dual mode after aving set limits in te single mode, te limit of c2 (see page 9-15) will take te value of te limit of c1, and te limit of c4 will take te value of te limit of c3. Wen you return again to te single mode, te previous values of eac cannel will be restored. CUTION Do not cange te comparator mode, measurement mode or armonic measurement ON/OFF, wile te comparator function is ON (see section 9.8). Similar to te Note above, canging te type of limit migt result in unexpected statuses of te output relay. 9-12

149 External In/Output Function 9.6 Setting te Comparator Limit Values (Option) Keys B C UPDTE CHECK RNGE VOLTGE FILTER MODE CURRENT RMS VOLTGE DC MEN MX HOLD m V V k Var M W TIME m V PF deg SCLING VG LINE FREQ STORE RECLL HRMONICS KEY LOCK k M W m V Hz k M W % ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT RNGE UTO UTO VOLTGE CURRENT HOLD MODE MX HOLD TRIG CL INTEGRTOR STRT STOP RESET HRMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET REMOTE LOCL SETUP KEY LOCK OUTPUT SHIFT 1P 3W 3P 3W WIRING 3P 4W 3V 3 Te explanation given in tis section uses WT230 as an example. For te differences between te WT210 and te WT230, see section 2.2, Operation Keys and Functions/Element Display. Procedure 1. SHIFT SETUP OUTPUT Operate te instrument by following te tick lines in te menu below. Press te key to confirm a selection or setting. To leave te current menu in te middle of te operation, press te key indicated in step 1. Te confirmed settings up to tat point are kept. Setting te Comparator Limit Values in case of Normal Measurement Select te comparator function ( Display C ) ( Display C ) ,18. Set te relay ( Display C ) Set te type of limit ( Display ) 11. Set te limit value ( Display B ) 12. sets te value Set te exponent ( Display C ) 17. *1 13. sifts digits SHIFT 14. moves te SHIFT decimal point *1 Wen you press te key at step 17, te output cannel displayed at display C will cange to te next cannel, i.e. from c1 to c2 and so fort. *2 Depends on te model number. Refer to te explanation for more details. B 19. End of setting 8. sets te column (type of limit) 9. moves to te B column SHIFT 10. *2 selects from element 1 to 4 (except ) 9-13

150 9.6 Setting te Comparator Limit Values (Option) 1. SHIFT SETUP OUTPUT Setting te Comparator Limit Values in case of Harmonic Measurement Select te comparator function ( Display C ) ( Display C ) 5. 6.,20. Set te relay ( Display C ) Set te type of limit ( Display ) 13. Set te limit value ( Display B ) *4 14. sets te value Set te exponent ( Display C ) 19. *1 15. sifts digits SHIFT 16. moves te SHIFT decimal point 21. End of setting B C 8. sets te column (type of limit) 9. moves to te B column SHIFT 10. selects from element 1 to 3*2 11. moves to te C column SHIFT 12. selects from armonic order 01 to 50*3 *1 Wen you press te key at step 19, te output cannel displayed at display C will cange to te next cannel, i.e. from c1 to c2 and so fort. *2 Depends on te model number. Refer to te explanation for more details. *3 s te maximum order of armonic analysis data varies by te fundamental frequency, tere migt be cases were no analysis data are present up to te 50t order (display sow bars). In suc a case, even setting te limit values will not result in proper operation. *4 Te first digit is for te polarity. Select " " in case of a negative value, and noting incase of a positive value. 9-14

151 External In/Output Function 9.6 Setting te Comparator Limit Values (Option) Explanation Setting te Comparator Limit Values in case of Normal Measurement You can set te type of te limit and its value for eac relay seperately. Selecting te relay Selects te relay for assigning te type of limit from C1 to c4. Selecting te type of limit (correspons to column in te procedure) Te following selections are available. Wen te comparator mode is dual, c1&c2 and c3&c4 are pairs and only te same type of limit can be selected for te cannels of one pair. V (voltage), (current), P (active power), Vr (reactive power), V (apparent power), PF (power factor), VFrq (voltage frequency), Frq (current frequency), P (total Watt-our W), (total mpere-our), deg (pase angle), VP(peak value of voltage), P(peak value of current), MTH(computation), P+ (positive watt our value W+), P (negative watt our value W ), + (positive ampere our value * ), (negative ampere our value * ), (no data) * For details concerning te positive value of te ampere our, refer to page 6-3. Selecting te element (corresponds to column B in te procedure) WT210 (760401) no suc element setting available; WT230 (760502) element can be selected from 1, 3, or 4 WT230 (760503) element can be selected from 1, 2, 3, or 4 Te element number 4 represents Σ. Setting te limit value No element setting is available on te WT210. Setting range: to ±9999 Initial setting: c1 : V (type) : 1 (element) : (value) : E+0 (exponent) [ 600 V voltage limit of element 1 for cannel 1] c2 : (type) : 1 (element) : (value) : E+0 (exponent) [ current limit of element 1 for cannel 2] c3 : P (type) : 1 (element) : (value) : E+3 (exponent) [ 1.2 kw active power limit of element 1 for cannel 3] c4 : PF (type) : 1 (element) : (value) : E+0 (exponent) [ Power factor 1 limit of element 1 for cannel 4] Selecting te exponent Te following selections are available. Te initial value is as described above. E 3 (10 3 ), E+0 (10 0 ), E+3 (10 3 ), E+6 (10 6 ) Setting te Comparator Limit Values in case of Harmonic Measurement You can set te type of te limit and its value for eac relay seperately. Selecting te relay Selects te relay (c1 to c4) for wic te type of limit and its value will be set. Selecting te type of limit (corresponds to column in te procedure) Te following selections are available. Wen te comparator mode is dual, c1&c2 and c3&c4 are pairs and only te same type of limit can be selected for te cannels of one pair. V (voltage), (current), P (active power), PF (power factor), Vt (armonic distortion of voltage), t (armonic distortion of current), CV (relative armonic content of eac voltage armonic order), C (relative armonic content of eac current armonic order), CP (relative armonic content of eac active power armonic order), Vd (voltage pase angle of eac order), d (current pase angle of eac order), (no data) * For details on te meaning of armonic measurement values, see capter

152 9.6 Setting te Comparator Limit Values (Option) Selecting te element (corresponds to column B in te procedure) WT210 (760401) no suc element setting available; WT230 (760502) element can be selected from 1 or 3 WT230 (760503) element can be selected from 1, 2, or 3 Selecting te armonic order (corresponds to column C in te procedure) Setting range: 01 to 50 Initial value: refer to te following. Te maximum order of armonic measurement data varies by te fundamental frequency. Terefore, tere migt be cases were no measure data is present up to te 50t order (and te display will sow bars). In suc a case, even if you select an armonic order, determination will not be carried out. Terefore, before setting, verify te maximum order (capter 16) and te fundamental frequency of te object of measurement. Setting te limit value No element setting is available on te WT210. Setting range: to ±9999 Initial setting: c1 : V (type) : 1 (element) : (value) : E+0 (exponent) [ 600 V voltage limit of element 1 for cannel 1] c2 : (type) : 1 (element) : (value) : E+0 (exponent) [ current limit of element 1 for cannel 2] c3 : P (type) : 1 (element) : (value) : E+3 (exponent) [ 1.2 kw active power limit of element 1 for cannel 3] c4 : PF (type) : 1 (element) : (value) : E+0 (exponent) [ Power factor 1 limit of element 1 for cannel 4] Selecting te exponent Te following selections are available. Te initial value is as described above. E 3 (10 3 ), E+0 (10 0 ), E+3 (10 3 ), E+6 (10 6 ) Note Te values of V (voltage), (current), W (active power), V (apparent power), var (reactive power), Vpk (voltage peak), and pk (current peak) wile te MX old function (see section 4.8) is enabled will be displayed according to te maximum values (MX) tat are eld. Te values tat are compared against te limit values are also te maximum values (MX) tat are eld. Wen you use limit values based on armonic measurement data, make sure to set te armonic measurement function to ON before you set te comparator function ON (see section 9.8). ltoug te four relays used in case of normal measurement and in case of armonic measurement are te same, te contents of te settings will be kept for bot seperately. For example, even after setting a limit for c1 in case of armonic measurement after previously aving set a limit for c1 in case of normal measurement, will result in keeping bot values. Te determination metod does not cange as a result of (minus) limit values. For example, if a limit of 1 is set, te relay will not be activated wen te input signal value reaces 2 coming from an even lower value, but will be activated wen te input signal value becomes 0. Make sure to set te polarity of te pase angle as well, + for pase lead (and can be ignored), for pase lag. 9-16

153 External In/Output Function 9.7 Comparator Display (Option) Keys B C UPDTE CHECK RNGE VOLTGE FILTER MODE CURRENT RMS VOLTGE DC MEN MX HOLD m V V k Var M W TIME m V PF deg SCLING VG LINE FREQ STORE RECLL HRMONICS KEY LOCK k M W m V Hz k M W % ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT RNGE UTO UTO VOLTGE CURRENT HOLD MODE MX HOLD TRIG CL INTEGRTOR STRT STOP RESET HRMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET REMOTE LOCL SETUP KEY LOCK OUTPUT SHIFT 1P 3W 3P 3W WIRING 3P 4W 3V 3 Te explanation given in tis section uses WT230 as an example. For te differences between te WT210 and te WT230, see section 2.2, Operation Keys and Functions/Element Display. Procedure Operate te instrument by following te tick lines in te menu below. Press te key to confirm a selection or setting. To leave te current menu in te middle of te operation, press te key indicated in step 1. Te confirmed settings up to tat point are kept. 1. SHIFT SETUP OUTPUT Select te comparator function (Display C) 2. 9 Select te display function 3. (Display C) (Display C) 7. End of setting 9-17

154 9.7 Comparator Display (Option) Explanation Comparator Display Function Tis function allows you to verify te set limits togeter wit measurement/computation data on te display wen using te comparator function. Te display is as follows, depending on weter te comparator function is set to single or dual mode. Display in case te comparator function is set to single mode Cannel (Relay) (Selectable from c1 to c4 by ) B V var TIME m V PF k deg M W % Unit prefix (Illuminates as necessary in eac display) Unit (One unit corresponding to relay on display illuminates. Te unit V,, or W corresponding to te measured, computed, or limit values sown on displays B and C is illuminated.) Input element (One element corresponding to relay on display illuminates) C m k M V W Hz Measured or computed data (Corresponding to te relay on display ) Limit value (Corresponding to te relay on display ) Display in case te comparator function is set to dual mode Limit value (Display te limit value of c1 or c3 by )* B m k M m k V W V V var TIME PF deg M W % Unit prefix (Illuminates as necessary in eac display) Unit (One unit corresponding to relay on display and B illuminates. Te unit V,, or W corresponding to te measured, computed, or limit values sown on displays, B, and C is illuminated.) Input element (One element corresponding to relay on display and B illuminates) C m k M V W Hz Measured or computed data (Corresponding to te relay on display and B) Limit value (Displays te limit value of c2 or c4 by )* * Te limit values on display and B will sow te pairs of c1&c2 and c3&c4 alternately by pressing te keys. Ceck te displayed limit value, unit, or te limit value setting menu to see wic pair is being displayed, Comparator Display Function ON/OFF Tis setting allows you to turn te above described display function ON or OFF. on: Te comparator display will appear by pressing te key after selecting on ; off: Te normal measurement or armonic measurement display will appear by pressing te key after selecting off. Note Pressing te or ELEMENT key will result in an error. Oter keys can be operated. Te values of V (voltage), (current), W (active power), V (apparent power), var (reactive power), Vpk (voltage peak), and pk (current peak) wile te MX old function (see section 4.8) is enabled will be displayed according to te maximum values (MX) tat are eld. Te values tat are compared against te limit values are also te maximum values (MX) tat are eld. Determination is done by internal data of te input signal, and not by displayed data. For example, wen te limit is set to and te internal data of te input signal coming from a lower value reaces 9.999, te relay will not be activated. Only wen te internal data reaces a value of , te relay will be activated. 9-18

155 External In/Output Function 9.8 Turning te Comparator Function ON/OFF (Option) Keys B C UPDTE CHECK RNGE VOLTGE FILTER MODE CURRENT RMS VOLTGE DC MEN MX HOLD m V V k Var M W TIME m V PF SCLING VG LINE FREQ STORE RECLL HRMONICS KEY LOCK k M W deg m V Hz k M W % ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT UTO VOLTGE CURRENT MODE STRT HRMONICS REMOTE LOCL KEY LOCK 1P 3W 3P 4W RNGE UTO MX HOLD STOP MEMORY SETUP OUTPUT 3P 3W 3V 3 HOLD TRIG CL INTEGRTOR RESET INTEG SET SHIFT WIRING Te explanation given in tis section uses WT230 as an example. For te differences between te WT210 and te WT230, see section 2.2, Operation Keys and Functions/Element Display. Procedure Operate te instrument by following te tick lines in te menu below. Press te key to confirm a selection or setting. To leave te current menu in te middle of te operation, press te key indicated in step 1. Te confirmed settings up to tat point are kept. 1. SHIFT SETUP OUTPUT Select te comparator function (Display C) (Display C) End of setting Explanation Turning te Comparator Function ON/OFF fter aving set all te items described on te previous pages, turn te comparator function ON. on: Te comparator function will start by pressing te key after selecting on ; off: Te comparator function will stop by pressing te key after selecting off. CUTION fter aving turned ON te comparator function, do not cange te comparator mode. Canging te type of limit migt result in unexpected statuses of te output relay. Make sure not to greatly vary te input signal before turning te comparator function ON. Depending on te input signal used for determination, te instrument may display error codes (i.e. overrange) and tis will cange te output relays as described on page Wen using te output relay as a control signal, make sure to matc tese control signals wit oter equipments to eliminate erroneuous control. 9-19

156 9.9 Outputting to an External Plotter or External Printer Keys B C UPDTE CHECK RNGE VOLTGE FILTER MODE CURRENT RMS VOLTGE DC MEN MX HOLD m V V k Var M W TIME m V PF SCLING VG LINE FREQ STORE RECLL HRMONICS KEY LOCK k M W deg m V Hz k M W % ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT UTO VOLTGE CURRENT MODE STRT HRMONICS REMOTE LOCL KEY LOCK 1P 3W 3P 4W RNGE UTO MX HOLD STOP MEMORY SETUP OUTPUT 3P 3W 3V 3 HOLD TRIG CL INTEGRTOR RESET INTEG SET SHIFT WIRING Te explanation given in tis section uses WT230 as an example. For te differences between te WT210 and te WT230, see section 2.2, Operation Keys and Functions/Element Display. Procedure Operate te instrument by following te tick lines in te menu below. Press te key to confirm a selection or setting. To leave te current menu in te middle of te operation, press te key indicated in step 1. Te confirmed settings up to tat point are kept. *1 1. LOCL Selecting te Output Mode 2. Select te output Mode (Display C) Communication setting *1 3. End Communication settings depend on your communication interface. Refer to capter 10 or 11 for te menu. Select plotter or printer (Display C) End If te communication interface tat you purcased is an serial interface, te menu proceeds to te "Handsaking metod" menu of section Set te relevant parameters suc as te andsaking metod, format, and baud rate, ten press te key to complete te settings. If te communication interface is a GP-IB, te procedure ends at step

157 External In/Output Function 9.9 Outputting to an External Plotter / Printer Select te Output Items 1. SHIFT SETUP OUTPUT 2. (Display C) 3. (Display C) Set te output items (Display C) 9. End of setting B 6. sets te column (output function) 7. moves to te B column SHIFT 8. selects from element 1 to 3 ctivating te Output Execute te output 1. (Display C) Select data or setup SETUP parameters SHIFT OUTPUT 2. (Display C) 3. End End of setting (Execute te output)

158 9.9 Outputting to an External Plotter / Printer Explanation Selecting te Output (Printing) Mode Select weter you are printing out on a plotter or a printer. HPGL: For printing on an external, HPGL - compatible plotter. ESCP: For printing on an external, ESC / P - compatible printer. PCL : For printing on an external, PCL5 (printer language of HP) - compatible printer. Setting te Output Contents in case of Normal Measurement ll measured and computed data is output. However, for frequency, if eiter one of te display function, V Hz or Hz, is turned on, te frequency of te corresponding function is output. If bot display functions are OFF, te voltage frequency of te element assigned to display C is output. Setting te Output Items and te Element in case of Harmonic Measurement Selecting te Output function (correspons to column in te procedure) One of te following items sould be select, wic ten will be printed out on an external plotter/ptinter. Te initial value is V. V: Prints te numerical values of te measured values and relative armonic content of te voltage; : Prints te numerical values of te measured values and relative armonic content of te current; P: Prints te numerical values of te measured values and relative armonic content of te active power; deg: Prints te numerical values of te pase angle; G-V: Prints te numerical values * and te grap of te measured voltage values; G-: Prints te numerical values * and te grap of te measured current values; G-P: Prints te numerical values * and te grap of te measured active power values; G-Vd: Prints te numerical values * and te grap of te pase angle between eac voltage of te 2nd to 50t order and te fundamental (1st order); G-d: Prints te numerical values * and te grap of te pase angle between eac current of te 2nd to 50t order and te fundamental (1st order); CG-V: Prints te numerical values * and te grap of te relative armonic content of voltage; CG-: Prints te numerical values * and te grap of te relative armonic content of current; CG-P: Prints te numerical values * and te grap of te relative armonic content of active power; LL: Prints te numerical values * and te grap of te measured values and relative armonic content of voltage and current (V and are bot printed). * HPGL/PCL plotters print bot numerical values and te grap, but ESCP printers only print te grap. Setting te Element (correspons to column B in te procedure) One of te following sould be selected. Te output items corresponding to te set element will ten be printed out on an external plotter. Te initial value is 1. On te WT210, tis setting is always 1. 1: Select tis wen te output items of element 1 sould be printed out; 2: Select tis wen te output items of element 2 sould be printed out; Tis setting is not available on model : Select tis wen te output items of element 3 sould be printed out. Executing Output fter connecting te external plotter/printer to te WT210/WT230, execute te output. dt: ll data selected as output items will be output. PnL: ll set-up parameters will be output. 9-22

159 External In/Output Function 9.9 Outputting to an External Plotter / Printer Note Te armonic measurement items tat are output via te communication interface (GP-IB or serial) vary depending on te output items of armonic measurement selected ere. Wen V,, P, or deg is selected, te item is output via communication interface as-is. Wen LL is selected, V,, P, and deg become items output via te communication interface. Wen grap printing G-V to CG-P is selected, only te numerical data of te item is output via te communication interface. Te orders are printed up to te maximum analysis order. Wen te fundamental frequency lies outside te measurement range of te armonic measurement (display B will sow FrqEr), an attempt to output will result in an error code. Wen you set an element wic is not te element of measurement (column B), an attempt to output will result in an error code. Wen no measured data is present, will be printed. Tere are cases were te active power value becomes negative. Te corresponding bargrap will be printed in tin print. Wen no plotter is connected, output time-out (approx. 60 s) will result in an error code. If te LOCL key is pressed during printing, printing stops. Example of Output to an External Plotter (Some sections in te following figure suc as fonts and grap lines differ in appearance from te actual output.) Output example in case of output item G-V of armonic measured data Voltage range Current range Function and element PLL source Frequency of PLL source Rms value of 1st to 50t order of voltage Rms value of 1st to 50t order of current Rms value of 1st to 50t order of active power Pase angle between te fundamental current and fundamental voltage Power factor of te fundamental (1st order) Harmonic distortion of te voltage Harmonic distortion of te current veraging Scaling Crest factor Model : M/760503/HRM V Range : 60V Range : 1 Function : V 1 Sync : PLL V1 Freq V1 = Hz V1 rms = V 1 rms = W1 = 0.02 W DEG1 = LED 50.1 deg PF1 = V1 THD(IEC) = % 1 THD(IEC) = % VG(EXP 8) = OFF Scaling = OFF Crest Factor = 3 #### Harmonic Spectrum (Voltage) #### [V] Measured Relative Harmonic Order Value Content ####### Harmonic Voltage List ####### Or Volt [ V ] Cont [ % ] Or Volt [ V ] Cont [ % ] Measured Value m 10.00m Order 9-23

160 9.9 Outputting to an External Plotter / Printer Example of Output to an External Printer (Some sections in te following figure suc as fonts and grap lines differ in appearance from te actual output.) Output example of setup parameters Output example of armonic measured data Voltage range Current range External sensor scaling values Items sown Update Rate Wiring metod Freuency filter Line filter Hold ON/OFF Scaling ON/OFF Voltage(PT)ratio Current(CT)ratio Power value veraging ON/OFF Type Coefficient Crest factor Integration mode Integration timer Rated integration time Storage ON/OFF Interval Recall ON/OFF Interval Sync source MX Hold Display digits PLL source Harmonics measurement function ON/OFF Order Element Distortion formula Comparator function ON/OFF Mode Display ON/OFF Cannel Comm. command Element Voltage Current ctive power pparent power Reactive power Power factor Pase angle Voltage peak Current peak Efficiency Frequency Integration status Elapsed integration time Watt-our mpere-our WT210/230 Setup Lists Rev. : 2.01 Model : C2/EX2/HRM/CMP V Range : 15 Vrms uto Range : 0.5 rms uto Ext. Sensor (Elem 1) = Ext. Sensor (Elem 2) = Ext. Sensor (Elem 3) = Display : V Element 1 Display B : Element 1 Display C : W Element 1 Matematics : Efficiency Update Rate : 250ms Wiring : 1 Pase 3 Wire Freq.Filter : Off Line.Filter : Off Hold : Off Scaling : Off PT Ratio (Elem 1) = CT Ratio (Elem 1) = Scaling Factor (Elem 1) = PT Ratio (Elem 2) = CT Ratio (Elem 2) = Scaling Factor (Elem 2) = PT Ratio (Elem 3) = CT Ratio (Elem 3) = Scaling Factor (Elem 3) = veraging : Off veraging Type : Linear veraging Coefficient : 8 Creset Factor : 3 Integrate Mode : Manual Integrate Timer : 00000:00:00 Rated Time (D) : 00001:00:00 Store : Off Store Interval : 00:00:00 Recall : Off Recall Interval : 00:00:00 Sync. Source : Max Hold : Off Resolution : Hig Sync. Source : PLL V1 Harmonics : Off Display Order : 01 Harmonics Element : Element 1 Distortion Formula : IEC Comparator : Off Comparator Mode : Single Comparator Display : Off Comparator Cannel : 1 Communication Command : 0 Output example of normal measured data Element 1, Element 2, Element 3, Sigma V 2.998, 2.993, 2.999, , , , W 0.00, , 0.00, k V , , , k Var , , , k PF , , , DEG 90.0, 90.0, 90.0, 90.0 Vpk 5.28, 5.23, 5.25 pk , , EFF HzV , , Integrator : Start Integrator Time : 00000:01:30 Element 1, Element 2, Element 3, Sigma W , , , W , , , W m, m, m, m , , , m, m, m, m , , , Refer to te previous page for a description Order Model : M/760503/HRM V Range : 15 V Range : 0.5 Function : V 1 Sync : PLL V1 Freq V1 = Hz V1 rms = 5.76 V 1 rms = 1.4 m W1 = W DEG1 = LED deg PF1 = V1 THD (IEC) = 15.71% 1 THD (IEC) = of vg (EXP 8 ) = OFF Scaling = OFF Crest Factor = 3 ####### Harmonic Voltage List ####### Or Volt[ V] Cont[ %] Or Volt[ V] Cont[ %] Measured Value #### Harmonic Spectrum (Voltage ) #### 10m 100m

161 GP-IB Interface (Option) Capter 10 GP-IB Interface (Option) 10.1 GP-IB Interface Functions and Specifications Tis instrument is equipped wit a GP-IB interface in accordance wit your preference. Tis interface permits remote control from a controller suc as a personal computer, and output of various data. Overview of te GP-IB Interface Te table below sows functions tat are available in eac mode. Mode Function ddressable mode Listener Functions performed by key operations (except for LOCL key and power ON/OFF) measured and computed data output request setting parameters output request error code output request Talker measured and computed data output setting parameters output, error code output, status byte output Talk-only mode Talker measured and computed data output ddressable Mode Tis mode allows te WT210/WT230 to be controlled using commands from te controller. Te command system before te IEEE St d standard can be used. Te WT210/WT230 outputs data wen a data output request command OD is received. Tis mode allows data to be read at an arbitrary time Mode Like te addressable mode, tis mode allows te WT210/WT230 to be controlled using commands from te controller. Tis mode allows commands conforming to te IEEE St d protocol to be used. Talk-only Mode Tis mode does not require a controller. Data is output at certain intervals. Tis interval can be set to any lengt. Tis mode is useful wen te instrument is connected to a listener-only device suc as a printer. 10 Print Mode Tis mode is useful wen armonic measurement data are output to te external plotter or external printer. For details, refer to section 9.9. Note Conventional power meters WT110, WT110E, WT130, WT200, WT1010, WT1030, WT1030M, WT2010, and WT2030 supported addressable mode and addressable mode B. Te WT210/WT230 supports addressable mode. 10-1

162 10.1 GP-IB Interface Functions and Specifications GP-IB Interface Specifications Electrical & mecanical specifications: conforms to IEEE st d Functional specifications: refer to te table below Protocol: Varies depending on te mode used. See te previous page. Code: ISO (SCII) code ddress setting: 0 to 30 listener and talker addresses, or talk-only can be selected using te front panel keys. Remote mode clear: remote mode can be cleared by pressing te LOCL key on te front panel. However, tis is not possible wen Local Lockout as been set by te controller. Function Subset name Description source andsake SH1 full source andsake capability acceptor andsake H1 full acceptor andsake capability talker T5 basic talker capability, serial polling, nontalker on ML (My Listen ddress), talk-only capability listener L4 Basic listener capability, nonlistener to MT (My Talk ddress), no listen-only capability service request SR1 full service request capability remote local RL1 full remote/local capability parallel poll PR0 no parallel polling capability device clear DC1 full device clear capability device trigger DT1 full device trigger capability controller C0 no controller function WRNING Te connectors used in tis function ave protective covers. Wen te covers are removed or wen using connectors, te voltage ratings across te measuring input and te ground become as follows: Voltage between CURRENT, ±(VOLTGE and CURRENT side) input terminals and ground 400 Vrms max. Voltage between VOLTGE input terminal and ground 600 Vrms max. Put te protective cover on te connector wen tis function is not used. 10-2

163 GP-IB Interface (Option) 10.2 Responses to Interface Messages, and Remote/Local Modes Responses to Interface Messages IFC (Interface Clear) Unaddresses talker and listener. REN (Remote Enable) Transfers te instrument from local control to remote control. GTL (Go To Local) Transfers te instrument from remote control to local control. SDC (Selective Device Clear), DCL (Device Clear) Cleasrs GP-IB input/output buffer, and resets an error. Te setup information and measurement state are not affected. DCL is applicable to all devices on te bus, wilst DSC is applicable to designated devices only. GET (Group Execute Trigger) Updates te measured/computed data wen in old mode. Same function as te SHIFT + HOLD (TRIG) key. LLO (Local Lockout) Invalidates te LOCL key on te front panel to inibit transfer from remote control to local control. Switcing between Remote and Local Mode Wen switced from local to remote mode Te REMOTE indicator will ligt up, and all panel keys except te LOCL key cannot be operated. Setup parameres entered in te local mode will be retained. Wen switced from remote to local mode Te REMOTE indicator will extinguis and all panel keys can be operated. Setup parameters entered in te remote mode will be retained. 10 Valid keys for remote control Pressing te LOCL key in remote control will switc te instrument to local control. However, tis is not possible in case te Local Lockout as been set by te controller. 10-3

164 10.3 Status Byte Format (before te IEEE Standard) DIO 8 DIO 7 DIO 6 DIO 5 DIO 4 DIO 3 DIO 2 DIO 1 Integration BUSY SRQ ERROR STORE/ RECLL BUSY OVER Syntax ERROR Integration Computation END END Integration Busy (DIO 8) Tis bit is set to 1 wen integration is in progress. Tis bit cannot be disabled by te IM command since it is a status bit. Even if tis bit is set to 1, SRQ will not be affected. SRQ (DIO 7) Tis bit is set to 1 wen computation End (DIO 1), integration End (DIO 2), OVER (DIO 4) or Syntax error (DIO 3) occurs. Wen RQS is set to 1, SRQ is set to True, issuing a service request to te controller. Tis bit is reset to 0 wen a response is sent to te serial poll. To prevent te SRQ and status byte being affected by computation End, integration End, Over or Syntax error, tis bit must be disabled by te IM command. fter an IM15, SRQ is affected by a computation End, integration End, Over, or Syntax error. fter an IM1, SRQ is affected only by a computation End. In case of IM4, SRQ is affected only by a Syntax error. ERROR (DIO 6) Wen a Syntax error or Over occurs, tis bit is set to 1 and te SRQ is set to True. Store/Recall Busy (DIO 5) Tis bit is set to 1 wen storing/recalling of data is in progress. Tis bit cannot be disabled by te IM command since it is a status bit. Even if tis bit is set to 1, SRQ will not be affected. Over (DIO 4) Tis bit is set to 1 and SRQ is set to True wen an overrange occurs in te measured data. However, tis is not valid if te bit as been disabled by te IM command. Tis bit is reset after a response is made to te serial poll. Te nature of Over can by identified by te OE command. Syntax error (DIO 3) Tis bit is set to 1 wen a command error, parameter error or execution error occurs. Te error No. can be identified by te OE command. Tis bit is reset after a response is made to te serial poll. However, tis is not valid if te bit as been disabled be te IM command. Integration End (DIO 2) Tis bit is set to 1 wen integration as been completed. Te bit is reset wen a response is made to te serial poll. However, tis is not valid if te bit as been disabled by te IM command. Computation End (DIO1) Tis bit is set to 1 wen computation as been completed and te display is updated. Te bit is reset wen a response is made to te serial poll. However, tis is not valid if te bit as been disabled by te IM command. 10-4

165 GP-IB Interface (Option) 10.4 Output Format for Measured/Computed Data, Setup Parameters, and Error Codes Tis section describes SCII data output format in addressable mode or talk-only mode. For te data output format in mode, see section , MESure Group and pages to Output Format of Normal Measured/Computed Data Data Format Normal measurement data consists of a 6-byte eader and 11-byte data (total of 17 bytes). Header (6 bytes) Data (11 bytes) Header Section to 3: data type (Types of data tat can be classified using 1 to 3) V : voltage : Current W : ctive power V_ : pparent power Var : Reactive power PF_ : Power factor HzV : Voltage frequency Hz : Current frequency W_ : Watt our _ : mpere our DEG: Pase angle Vpk : Peak voltage value pk : Peak current value EFF : Efficiency (WT230 only) CV1 : V1 crest factor CV2 : V2 crest factor* CV3 : V3 crest factor* C1 : 1 crest factor C2 : 2 crest factor* C3 : 3 crest factor* +B : (display )+(display B) B : (display ) (display B) B :(display ) (display B) /B : (display )/(display B) W+ : Positive watt our W : Negative watt-our + : Positive ampere our : Negative ampere our HMS : Elapsed time of integration MEM : Data number in case of recalling (Items tat can be output for efficiency and crest factor vary depending on te model.) 4: Element 1: Element 1 2: Element 2 3: Element 3 4: Σ 1-4: data type (Types of data tat is classified using 1 to 4) /B2: (display )/(display B)2 2/B: (display )2/(display B) VGW: verage active power of element 1 wile integration is in progress VW2: verage active power of element 2 wile integration is in progress VW3: verage active power of element 3 wile integration is in progress VW4: verage active power of element Σ wile integration is in progress (Te average active power of element Σ varies depending on te wiring system.) 5: Data state N: normal I: Overrange O: Computation overflow P: Peak overflow E: No data 6: Indicates data lag/lead in case of DEG data type. In case of oter data types, _ (space) will occur. G: Lag D: Lead _: Not detectable

166 10.4 Output Measured/Computed Data, Setup Parameters, and Error Codes Data Section d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 d7 d8 d9 d10 d11 d1: polarity; _ (space) or (minus) d2 to d8: mantissa, floating-point number of te maximum six digits d9 to d11: exponent; E 3 m, E+0, E+3 k, E+6 M Data state in case of an overrange ( ol is being displayed) I E + 3 Data state in case of a computation overflow ( of, PFErr, deger, ErrLo, ErrHi is being displayed) O E + 0 Data state in case of no data (wen te display is ) E E 3 Elapsed time of integration H M S _ d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 d7 d8 d9 d10 d11 d1 to d5: Hour d6: : d7 to d8: Minute d9: : d10 to d11: Second Note Wen te frequency is set by eiter of te following metods, only one value is measured, and tat value will be output. by panel keys : by te key and ELEMENT key of display C (except WT210) by communication command: by te DC or EC command. fter setting te measurement object of frequency, even canging te display C to someting different tan VHz or Hz will not result in canging te object of measurement of frequency. Wen selecting te output items yourself and you set a frequency item wic is not object of measurement, E+03 (no data) will be output. Te displayed values of V (voltage), (current), W (active power), V (apparent power), var (reactive power), Vpk (voltage peak), and pk (current peak) wile te MX old function (see section 4.8) is enabled will be te maximum values (MX) tat are eld. Te values output via communications are also set to te maximum values (MX) tat are eld. Output Format wen Self Selected Up to 14 normal measured/computed data can be output simultaneously, and te user is allowed to coose any output information type for tose 14 data. Eac output block is of te following format. Line 1 Data number Terminator (Te data number will only be output in case of recall) Line 2 c.1, c.2, c.3, c.4 Terminator Line 3 c.5, c.6, c.7, c.8 Terminator Line 4 c.9, c.10, c.11, c.12 Terminator Line 5 c.13, c.14 Terminator Line 6 END Terminator 10-6

167 GP-IB Interface (Option) 10.4 Output Measured/Computed Data, Setup Parameters, and Error Codes Eac output block usually consists of five lines (six in case of recall) including te block end line END. However, if all output types on a line are set to no output, tis line will be omitted, reducing te number of output lines by one. For example, if all output items of c.9 to c12 are set to no output, line 4 in te above example will be omitted. Furtermore, if any cannel on a line is set to no output, all data following tis cannel on te line will be sifted forward. For example, if te c.2 on line 1 is set to no output, data of c.1 will be followed by data of c.3. Output Format in case of Normal Measurement WT210 (760401) Data Line 1 number Terminator (Te data number will only be output in case of recall) Line 2 V1 data Terminator Line 3 1 data Terminator Line 4 W1 data Terminator Line 5 Frequency, Display C Terminator Line 6 END Terminator WT230 (760502) Data Line 1 number Terminator (Te data number will only be output in case of recall) Line 2 V1 data, V3 data, SV data Terminator Line 3 Line 4 1 data, 3 data, S data Terminator W1 data, W3 data, SW data Terminator 10 Line 5 Frequency, Display C Terminator Line 6 END Terminator WT230 (760503) Data Line 1 number Terminator (Te data number will only be output in case of recall) Line 2 V1 data, V2 data, V3data, SV data Terminator Line 3 1 data, 2 data, 3 data, S data Terminator Line 4 W1 data, W2 data, W3 data, SW data Terminator Line 5 Frequency, Display C Terminator Line 6 END Terminator 10-7

168 10.4 Output Measured/Computed Data, Setup Parameters, and Error Codes Default Output Format in case Integration Measurement WT210 (760401) Data Line 1 number Terminator (Te data number will only be output in case of recall) Line 2 W1 data Terminator Line 3 W1data Terminator Line 4 1data Terminator Line 5 Frequency, Elapsed integration time Terminator Line 6 END Terminator WT230 (760502) Data Line 1 number Terminator (Te data number will only be output in case of recall) Line 2 W1 data, W3 data, SW data Terminator Line 3 W1data, W3data, SWdata Terminator Line 4 1data, 3data, Sdata Terminator Line 5 Frequency, Elapsed integration time Terminator Line 6 END Terminator WT230 (760503) Data Line 1 number Terminator (Te data number will only be output in case of recall) Line 2 W1 data, W2 data, W3 data, SW data Terminator Line 3 W1data, W2data, W3data, SWdata Terminator Line 4 1data, 2data, 3data, Sdata Terminator Line 5 Frequency, Elapsed integration time Terminator Line 6 END Terminator 10-8

169 GP-IB Interface (Option) 10.4 Output Measured/Computed Data, Setup Parameters, and Error Codes Output Format of Harmonic Measurement Data Data Format Harmonic measurement data consists of an 8-byte eader and 11-byte data (total of 19 bytes). Header (8 bytes) Data (11 bytes) Header Section to 3: data type V : voltage : Current W_: ctive power DEG: Pase angle between te 1st order voltage and 1st order current DGV: Pase angle between te 1st order voltage and te 2nd to 50st order voltage DG: Pase angle between te 1st order current and te 2nd to 50st order current PF_: Fundamental power factor (1st order) HzV: Fundamental frequency of te voltage of te PLL source Hz: Fundamental frequency of te current of te PLL source THD: Harmonic distortion (eiter IEC or CS) CNT: Relative armonic content MEM: Data number in case of recalling 4: Element 1: Element 1 2: Element 2 3: Element 3 5: Data state N: normal I: Overrange O: Computation overflow P: Peak overflow E: No data 6, 7: Order 01 to 50: Order of fundamental or iger armonic (up to te maximum analysis order). (space) will be assigned in case of frequency, armonic distortion, power factor or in case of all computed values of te 1st to 50t order. 10 8: Indicates data lag/lead in case of DEG data type. In case of oter data types, (space) will occur. G: Lag D: Lead _: Not detectable Data Section d1 d2 d3 d4 d5 d6 d7 d8 d9 d10 d11 d1: polarity; (space) or (minus) d2 to d8: mantissa, floating-point number of te maximum six digits In case of armonic distortion and relative armonic content d9: % d10 to d11: (space) In oter cases d9 to d11: exponent E 3 m, E+0, E+3 k, E+6 M 10-9

170 10.4 Output Measured/Computed Data, Setup Parameters, and Error Codes Output Format Te output format depends on te selected output items wic can be selected by te OH command. In case of voltage and current ll computed values of Line 1 te 1st to 50t order, armonic distortion Terminator Line 2 Measured value for fundamental (1st order), Frequency Terminator Line 3 Measured value for 2nd armonic Relative armonic content, Terminator for 2nd armonic Line 51 Measured value for 50t armonic Relative armonic content, Terminator for 50t armonic Line 52 END Terminator In case of active power Line 1 ll computed values of te 1st to 50t order, Power factor Terminator Line 2 Line 3 Measured value for fundamental (1st order) Measured value for 2nd armonic, Frequency Terminator, Relative armonic content for 2nd armonic Terminator Line 51 Measured value for 50t armonic Relative armonic content, Terminator for 50t armonic Line 52 END Terminator In case of pase angle Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 50 Line 51 Pase angle between fundamentals of voltage and current Pase angle between fundamental and 2nd armonic of voltage Pase angle between fundamental and 3rd armonic of voltage Pase angle between fundamental and 50t armonic of voltage, Frequency Terminator Pase angle between, fundamental and Terminator 2nd armonic of current Pase angle between, fundamental and Terminator 3rd armonic of current Pase angle between, fundamental and Terminator 50t armonic of current END Terminator In case of LL setting Te data will be output in te sequence voltage current active power pase angle END <terminator> Te output format of eac item is as described for eac item above; Te END line is not output for eac item, but after finising te entire output operation. Output Format of Setup Parameters and Error Codes See te response examples of OS and OE commands in section For a description of te displayed information of te response examples, see te explanation of te respective command in section

171 GP-IB Interface (Option) 10.5 Setting te ddress and Mode Keys B C UPDTE CHECK RNGE VOLTGE FILTER MODE CURRENT RMS VOLTGE DC MEN MX HOLD m V V k Var M W TIME m V PF deg SCLING VG LINE FREQ STORE RECLL HRMONICS KEY LOCK k M W m V Hz k M W % ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT RNGE UTO UTO VOLTGE CURRENT HOLD MODE MX HOLD TRIG CL INTEGRTOR STRT STOP RESET HRMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET REMOTE LOCL SETUP KEY LOCK OUTPUT SHIFT 1P 3W 3P 3W WIRING 3P 4W 3V 3 Procedure Te explanation given in tis section uses WT230 as an example. For te differences between te WT210 and te WT230, see section 2.2, Operation Keys and Functions/Element Display. Operate te instrument by following te tick lines in te menu below. Press te key to confirm a selection or setting. To leave te current menu in te middle of te operation, press te key indicated in step 1. Te confirmed settings up to tat point are kept. 1. LOCL 2. Set te mode ( Display C ) 3. Set te address ( Display C ) 4. sets te value 5. sifts digits SHIFT 6. End of setting Setting te interval ( Display C ) our min sec Same as steps 4 to 5 above. 6. End of setting 10 (Select tis wen setting commands according to IEEE ) 10-11

172 10.5 Setting te ddress and Mode Explanation Setting te Mode Refer to page 10-1 for details. Setting te ddress particular address is assigned to eac device connected to te GP-IB interface so tat eac device can be recognized by every device. Terefore, an address must be assigned to tis instrument wen it is connected to a personal computer. ddress setting range: 0 to 30 Te initial value is 1. Te address is retained even if te instrument is initialized. Talk-only Function Tis function only allows te instrument to send data to oter devices. Data can be sent even wen talk-only is OFF. In talk-only mode, te instrument cannot be controlled by a controller. Interval In case of te talk-only mode, tis setting specifies te interval to output data. Setting range: (0 r 00 min 00 sec) to (99 rs 59 min 59 sec) Initial value: Wen set to , te interval is equal to te display update rate. In addition, wen te specified interval is sorter tat te display update rate, te data is output using te display update rate. Terminator Wen tis instrument is used as a listener Use CR+LF, LF, or EOI as te receiving terminator. Wen tis instrument is used as a talker Te sending terminator is set using te DL command. Te initial setting is CR+LF+EOI. Note It is not possible for tis instrument to receive data if te CR terminator is sent from te controller. It is also not possible to set CR as te terminator wic is to be sent from tis instrument

173 GP-IB Interface (Option) 10.6 Setting te Output Items Keys B C UPDTE CHECK RNGE VOLTGE FILTER MODE CURRENT RMS VOLTGE DC MEN MX HOLD m V V k Var M W TIME m V PF deg SCLING VG LINE FREQ STORE RECLL HRMONICS KEY LOCK k M W m V Hz k M W % ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT RNGE UTO UTO VOLTGE CURRENT HOLD MODE MX HOLD TRIG CL INTEGRTOR STRT STOP RESET HRMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET REMOTE LOCL SETUP KEY LOCK OUTPUT SHIFT 1P 3W 3P 3W WIRING 3P 4W 3V 3 Te explanation given in tis section uses WT230 as an example. For te differences between te WT210 and te WT230, see section 2.2, Operation Keys and Functions/Element Display. Procedure Operate te instrument by following te tick lines in te menu below. Press te key to confirm a selection or setting. To leave te current menu in te middle of te operation, press te key indicated in step 1. Te confirmed settings up to tat point are kept. Setting te Output Item in case of Normal Measurement 1. SHIFT SETUP OUTPUT Select communication (Display C) 2. Select normal measurement 3. (Display C) Select output format (Display C) 7. End of setting (Select default setting) 10 (Select original setting) 8.,14. Set te output cannel Set te output item (Display C) 9. (Display C) *1 *1 Wen you press te key at step 13, te output cannel displayed at display B will cange to te next cannel, i.e. from c1 to c2 and so fort. *2 Depends on te model number. Refer to te explanation for more details. 15. End of setting B 10. Sets te column (output function) 11. Moves to te B column SHIFT 12. *2 Select from element 1 to 4 (except and ) 10-13

174 10.6 Setting te Output Items Setting te Output Item in case of Harmonic Measurement 1. SHIFT SETUP OUTPUT 2. ( Display C ) 3. ( Display C ) Set te output item ( Display C ) * 9. End of setting * Wen grap printouts are selected as te output item, only data values will be output by communication B 6. Sets te column (output function) 7. Moves to te B column SHIFT 8. Select from element 1 to

175 GP-IB Interface (Option) 10.6 Setting te Output Items Explanation Setting te Output Item in case of Normal Measurement Selecting te Default Setting Predefined items will be output by te communication function. Te following types of default settings exist and tey depend on te model. For a description of te output format in addressable mode or talk-only mode, see 10-5 to For a description of te output pattern in mode, see te description for te MESure[:NORMal]:ITEM:PRESet command (page 14-31). Normal default setting: dflt-n Consists of V (voltage), (current), W (active power, te above menu sows P), frequency and displayed data of display C. Integration default setting: dflt-i Consists of W (active power, te above menu sows P), W (watt our), (ampere our), frequency, and integration time. Selecting Original Settings You can set original output items (output function and element) to eac output cannel from c1 to c14. Setting te cannel Select te output cannel for assigning te output item from c1 to c14. Setting te output function (corresponds to column in te procedure) ny of te following function can be selected. Te initial value is V. V (voltage), (current), P (active power), Vr (reactive power), V (apparent power), PF (power factor), VFrq (voltage frequency *1 ), Frq (current frequency *1 ), P (total watt our W), (total ampere our), deg (pase angle),vp(peak value of voltage), P(peak value of current), MTH(computation), t1 (elapsed integration time), P+ (positive watt our W+), P (negative watt our W ), + (positive ampere our *2 ), (negative ampere our *2 ), (no output) *1 If eiter one of te display function, V Hz or Hz, is turned on, te frequency of te corresponding function is output. If bot display functions are OFF, te voltage frequency of te element assigned to display C is output. *2 For details concerning te positive value of te ampere our, refer to page Setting te element (corresponds to column B in te procedure) Te element setting depends on te model and is as follows. Te initial value is 1. WT210 (760401) no suc element setting available; WT230 (760502) element can be selected from 1, 3, or 4 WT230 (760503) element can be sleected from 1, 2, 3, or 4 Te element number 4 represents Σ. Setting te Output Item in case of Harmonic Measurement Te setting is carried out in te same way as described in section 9.9, Outputting to an External Plotter or External Printer. However, grap printing is not possible for communication output. Only numerical data is output. For details, refer to page 9-23, For a description of te output format in addressable mode or talk-only mode, see 10-9 and For a description of te output pattern in mode, see te description for te MESure:HRMonics:ITEM:PRESet command (page 14-29)

176 10.7 Commands (before te IEEE Standard) For a detailed description of eac command, refer to section Command Description Wiring system WR m (WiRing) sets wiring system Voltage range RV m (Range Voltage) sets voltage range V m (uto Voltage range) sets voltage auto range Current range R m (Range current()) sets current range m (uto current() range) sets current auto range S m (Sensor mpere) sets external sensor scalling value Measurement mode MN m (MeaN) sets RMS, VOLTGE MEN, or DC Measurement SN m (SyNc source) sets te measurement syncronization source syncronization source Line filter LF m (Line Filter) sets line filter ON/OFF Frequency filter FL m (FiLter) sets frequency filter ON/OFF Update rate SI m (Sample Interval) sets display update rate Hold HD m (sampling HolD) olds display and output data Trigger E or ST or <GET> trigger Display D m (Display function) selects function to be displayed on display DB m (Display B function) selects function to be displayed on display B DC m (Display C function) selects function to be displayed on display C E m (Element display ) selects element to be displayed on display EB m (Element display B) selects element to be displayed on display B EC m (Element display C) selects element to be displayed on display C Scaling SC m (SCaling) sets scaling ON/OFF KV m (K*mplre) sets te scaling value K m (K*Wattage) KW m (K*Voltage) veraging G m (veraging) sets averaging ON/OFF T m (veraging Type) selects exponential averaging or moving C m (veraging Coefficient) averaging sets attenuation constant or averaging number Crest factor CF m (Crest Factor) Sets te crest factor MX old KH m (peak Hold) sets MX old MTH MT m (MaTematics) sets computing equation Number of displayed DS m (Display resolution) sets te number of displayed digits digits Display range DR (Display Range) displays te current range Key lock KL m (Key Lock) sets key lock ON/OFF Zero-level ZC (Zero Calibration) executes zero-level compensation compensation Integration IS (Integrate Start ) starts integration IP (Integrate stop) stops integration IR (Integrate Reset) resets integration IC m (Integrate Continuous) sets integration mode TM m1,m2,m3 (integrate TiMer)sets integration preset time Data storage SO (Store On) starts storage SR m1,m2,m3 (Store interval) sets storage interval Data recalling RO m (Recall On) starts recalling RR m1,m2,m3 (recall interval) sets recalling interval Setup parameters SL m (panel Setting Load) recalling setup parameters SS m (panel Setting Save) storing setup parameters RC (Reset Command) initialize setup parameters Communication CM m (Communication command) sets command group to be used commands OD (Output Data) requests output of measured data OF m1,m2,m3 (Output Function) sets output items OFD m (Output Function Default) sets default output items OS (Output panal Setting) requests output of setting parameters OE (Output Error code) requests output of error code H m (Header) sets output data eader DL m (DeLimiter) sets output data delimiter IM m (Interrupt Mask) sets status byte interrupt mask 10-16

177 GP-IB Interface (Option) 10.7 Commands (before te IEEE Standard) Command Description /HM (option) H m (Harmonics nalize) sets armonic measurement ON/OFF HE m (Harmonics Eiement) sets armonics element PS m (Pll Source ) sets PLL source DF m (Distortion Formula) sets distortion formula OR (armonics ORder) sets display order OH m1,m2 sets communication or output block (Output Harmonics function) /D (option) O m1,m2,m3 (Output nalog) sets output items yourself OD m (Output nalog Default) sets default output items RT m1,m2,m3 sets integration time (integrate Rated Time) /CMP (option) YO m (relay On) sets comparator function ON/OFF YM m (relay Mode) sets comparator mode DY m (Display relay) sets display relay ON/OFF for comparator YC m (relay Cannel) sets te display cannel wen comparator display is ON OY m1,m2,m3,m4,m5 sets te output relay function for normal (Output relay function) measurement OYH m1,m2,m3,m4,m5,m6 sets te output relay function for armonic (Output relay Harmonic function) measurement Note If commands relating to options are used on instruments wic do not ave te options installed, Err. 11 is displayed. lso, tere are no responses to inquiries

178 Serial Interface (Option) Capter 11 Serial Interface (Option) 11.1 Serial Interface Functions and Specifications Tis instrument is equipped wit a serial (RS-232-C) interface in accordance wit your preference. Tis interface permits remote control from a controller suc as a personal computer, and output of various data. Overview of te Serial Interface Te table below sows functions tat are available in eac mode. Mode Function Normal mode Reception Functions performed by key operations (except for LOCL key and power ON/OFF) measured and computed data output request setting parameters output request error code output request Transmission measured and computed data output setting parameters output error code output status byte output Talk-only mode Transmission measured and computed data output Normal Mode Tis mode is equivalent to te te addressable mode of te GP-IB function, and enables reception of commands and transmission of data. Measured data is output on reception of te OD command Mode Tis mode allows receiving of commands conforming to te IEEE St d protocol. Talk-only Mode Tis mode is equivalent to te Talk-only mode of te GP-IB function. Only measured data can be output and commands cannot be received. Print Mode Tis mode is useful wen armonic analysis data are output to te external plotter or external printer. For details, refer to section

179 11.1 Serial Interface Functions and Specifications Serial Interface Specifications Electrical caracteristics: Connection: Communications: Syncronization: conforms to EI-232 (RS-232) point-to-point full-duplex start-stop system Baud rate: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 Start bit: Data lengt (word lengt): Parity: Stop bit: Hardware andsaking: Software andsaking: Receive buffer size: 1 bit 7 or 8 bits Even, odd or no parity 1 or 2 bits User can select weter C, CB, CC and CD signals will always be True, or be used for control. User can select weter to control only transmission or bot transmission and reception using X-on and X-off signals. X-on (SCII 11H) X-off (SCII 13H) 256 bytes WRNING Te connectors used in tis function ave protective covers. Wen te covers are removed or wen using connectors, te voltage ratings across te measuring input and te ground become as follows: Voltage between CURRENT, ±(VOLTGE and CURRENT side) input terminals and ground 400 Vrms max. Voltage between VOLTGE input terminal and ground 600 Vrms max. Put te protective cover on te connector wen tis function is not used. 11-2

180 Serial Interface (Option) 11.2 Connecting te Interface Cable Wen connecting tis instrument to a personal computer, make sure tat te andsaking metod, data transmission rate and data format selected for te instrument matc tose selected fro te computer. For details, refer to te following pages. lso make sure tat te correct interface cable is used. Connector and Signal Names Numbers in te figure represent te Pin Nos. Pins 14 troug 19 are not used 20 Pins 21 troug 25 are not used Pins 8 troug 13 are not used SERIL Connector: DBSP-JB25S or equivalent 1 (GND: Protective Ground) Grounded to te case of tis instrument 2 B(TXD: Transmitted Data) Data transmitted to personal computer Signal direction: output 3 BB(RXD: Received Data) Data received from personal computer Signal direction: input 4 C(RTS: Request to Send) Signal used to andsake wen receiving data from personal computer Signal direction: output 5 CB(CTS: Clear to Send) Signal used to andsake wen transmitting data to personal computer Signal direction: input 6 CC(DSR: Data Set Ready) Signal used to andsake wen transmitting data to personal computer Signal direction: input 7 B(GND: Signal Ground) Ground for signals 20 CD(DTR: Data Terminal Ready) Signal used to andsake wen receiving data from personal computer Signal direction: output 11 Note Pins 8 to 19 and 21 to 25 are not used. Signal Direction Te figure below sows te direction of te signals used by te serial interface. Computer CC(DSR) CD(DTR) [data terminal ready] C(RTS) [request to send] CB(CTS) [clear to send ready] B(TXD) [transmitted data] BB(RXD) [received data] Tis instrument 11-3

181 11.2 Connecting te Interface Cable Table of RS-232 Standard Signals and teir JIS and CCITT bbreviations Pin No. (25-pin connector) / bbreviations RS-232 CCITT JIS (GND) 101 B(GND) 102 B(TXD) 103 BB(RXD) 104 C(RTS) 105 CB(CTS) 106 CC(DSR) 107 CD(DTR) 108/2 CE(RI) 125 CF(DCD) 109 CG(-) 110 CH/CI(-) 111 D/DB(TXC) 113/114 DD(RXC) 115 SB(-) 118 SBB(-) 119 SC(-) 120 SCB(-) 121 SCF(-) 122 FG SG SD RD RS CS DR ER CI CD SQD SRS ST1/ST2 RT BSD BRD BRS BCS BCD Name Protective ground Signal ground Transmitted data Received data Request to send Clear to send Data set ready Data terminal ready Ring indicator Data cannel received carrier detect Data signal quality detect Data signal rate select Transmitter signal element timing Receiver signal element timing Secondary transmitted data Secondary received data Secondary request to send Secondary clear to send Secondary received carrier detect Circles indicate pins used for te serial interface of tis instrument 11-4

182 Serial Interface (Option) 11.3 Setting te Mode, Handsaking Metod, Data Format and Baud Rate Keys B C UPDTE CHECK RNGE VOLTGE FILTER MODE CURRENT RMS VOLTGE DC MEN MX HOLD m V V k Var M W TIME m V PF deg SCLING VG LINE FREQ STORE RECLL HRMONICS KEY LOCK k M W m V Hz k M W % ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT RNGE UTO UTO VOLTGE CURRENT HOLD MODE MX HOLD TRIG CL INTEGRTOR STRT STOP RESET HRMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET REMOTE LOCL SETUP KEY LOCK OUTPUT SHIFT 1P 3W 3P 3W WIRING 3P 4W 3V 3 Te explanation given in tis section uses WT230 as an example. For te differences between te WT210 and te WT230, see section 2.2, Operation Keys and Functions/Element Display. Procedure Operate te instrument by following te tick lines in te menu below. Press te key to confirm a selection or setting. To leave te current menu in te middle of te operation, press te key indicated in step 1. Te confirmed settings up to tat point are kept. 1. LOCL 2. Set te mode (Display C) Select te andsaking metod Set te data format 3. (Display ) 5. (Display B) * 11. End of setting For mode " " or " " Set te terminator (Display C) Set te baud rate (Display C) For mode " " * Select tis wen setting commands according to IEEE Set te interval (Display C) our min sec 12. sets te value 13. sifts digits SHIFT 14. End of setting 11-5

183 11.3 Setting te Mode, Handsaking Metod, Data Format and Baud Rate Explanation Mode Setting Refer to page 11-1 for more details. Handsaking To use an RS-232-C interface to transfer data between tis instrument and a computer, it is necessary to use certain procedures by mutual agreement to ensure te proper transfer of data. Tese procedures are called andsaking. Various andsaking systems are available depending on te computer to be used; te same andsaking system must be used for bot computer and tis instrument. Tis instrument allows you to coose any andsaking metod from te following eigt using te panel keys. Handsaking metod combinations (a circle indicates tat te function is available) Mode selection no Data sending control (Control metod wen sending data to computer) Software Hardware andsake andsake Sending stops wen X-off is received, and sending is resumed wen X-on is received. Ο Ο Ο Sending stops wen CB (CTS) is False, and sending is resumed wen CB is True. Ο Ο Sending stops wen CC (DSR) is False,and sending is resumed wen CC is True. Ο Ο No andsake Ο Data receiving control (Control metod wen receiving data from computer) Software Hardware andsake andsake X-off is sent wen received data buffer becomes 3/4- full, and X-on is sent wen received data buffer becomes 1/4- full. Ο CD(DTR) is C(RTS) is set to False set to False wen wen received data received data buffer buffer becomes 3/4- becomes 3/4- full, and is set full, and is set to True wen to True wen received data received data buffer buffer becomes 1/4- becomes 1/4- full. full. Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο Ο No andsake Ο Precautions Regarding Data Receiving Control Wen andsaking is used to control received data, data may still be sent from te computer even if te free space in te receive buffer drops below 64 bytes. In tis case, after te receive buffer becomes full, te excess data will be lost, weter andsaking is in use or not. Data storage to te buffer will start again wen tere is free space in te buffer. 256 bytes Used Free, 64 bytes Wen andsaking is in use,reception of data will stop wen te free space in te buffer drops to 64 bytes since data cannot be passed to te main program fast enoug to keep up wit te transmission. Used Free, 192 bytes fter reception of data stops, data continues to be passed to te internal program. Reception of data starts again wen te free space in te buffer inceases to 192 bytes. Used Weter andsaking is in use or not, if te buffer becomes full, any additional data received is no longer stored and is lost. 11-6

184 Serial Interface (Option) 11.3 Setting te Mode, Handsaking Metod, Data Format and Baud Rate Data Format Te serial interface of tis instrument performs communications using start-stop syncronization. In start-stop syncronization, one caracter is transmitted at a time. Eac caracter consists of a start bit, data bits, a parity bit, and a stop bit. Refer to te figure below. Circuit idle state 1 caracter Data bit (7 or 8 bits) Level returns to idle state (dotted line) or te start bit te next data (solid line) Start bit Parity bit Even, odd or none Stop bit 1 1 or 2 bits 2 Te table below sows te data format combinations supported. Preset value Start bit Data lengt Parity Stop bit No Odd Even No 2 Baud Rate Te baud rate can be selected from 1200, 2400, 4800, and bout te Terminator Data can be received wit eiter CR+LF or LF terminator. For transmission terminator, you can select from CR+LF, LF, and CR. Interval In case of te talk-only mode, tis setting specifies te interval to output data. Setting range: (0 r 00 min 00 sec) to (99 rs 59 min 59 sec) Initial value: Wen set to , te interval is equal to te display update rate. In addition, wen te specified interval is sorter tat te display update rate, te data is output using te display update rate. 11 Note Te error code 390 may appear depending on te status of tis instrument. In suc a case, lower te baud rate. 11-7

185 11.4 Format and Commands of Output Data (before te IEEE488.2 Standard) Output Format Te format of output data is te same as te GP-IB interface. Refer to section 10.4 for more details. Commands Te commands used in serial communications on te WT210/WT230 are common wit GP-IB commands. However, te following commands are different. DL/DL?<terminator> Sets or inquires about output data terminator. Syntax DLm <terminator> m indicates terminator m=0: CR + LF 1: LF 2: CR Query DL?<terminator> Example DL1 In te serial communications on te WT210/WT230, te GP-IB interface message functions are assigned to te following commands. <ESC>S<terminator> Equivalent to GP-IB s serial poll function. Status byte is output wen te S command is received following reception of te <ESC> code (1BH). For a description of te status byte format, see section However, in te serial communications of te WT210/WT230, SRQ (DI07) is always 1. <ESC>R<terminator> Equivalent to GP-IB s remote/local control function. Te instrument is placed in remote status and panel keys become invalid wen te R command is received following reception of te <ESC> code (1BH). Press te LOCL key to exit from te remote status. <ESC>L<terminator> Equivalent to GP-IB s remote/local control function. Wen te instrument is in remote status, te instrument will be placed in local status wen te L command is received following reception of te <ESC> code (1BH). <ESC>C<terminator> Equivalent to GP-IB s device clear function. Te communication devices of tis instrument are initialized wen te C command is received following reception of te <ESC> code (1BH). 11-8

186 Initializing Setup Parameters, Zero-Level Compensation, and Key Lock Capter 12 Initializing Setup Parameters, Zero-Level Compensation, and Key Lock 12.1 Back-up of Setup Parameters In order to protect setup parameters in case of a power failure and suc, tis instrument is equipped wit a litium battery wic protects tese parameters. Te following setup parameters are being kept. Wiring metod Voltage range Current range Measurement mode of voltage and current Data old Line filter ON/OFF Frequency filter ON/OFF Measurement syncronization source Scaling ON/OFF MX old function ON/OFF PT/CT scaling constant External sensor scaling constant veraging ON/OFF veraging type veraging sample number/attenuation constant Crest factor Computing Equation of MTH function Display function/element for eac display Number of displayed digits Display update rate Integration mode Integration timer preset time Integration value Integration elapsed time Data stored in internal memory Storage interval Recalling interval Output items for plotter/communication Harmonic measurement ON/OFF (only wen equipped wit te armonic measurement option) PLL source (only wen equipped wit te armonic measurement option) D/ output items (only wen equipped wit te D/ output option) D/ rated integration time (only wen equipped wit te D/ output option) Comparator determination function (only wen equipped wit te comparator option) Comparator determination limit value (only wen equipped wit te comparator option) Communication output mode Delimiter Header Output interval in case of talk-only GP-IB address (wen GP-IB is installed) Handsaking metod (wen serial interface is installed) Data format (wen serial interface is installed) Baud rate (wen serial interface is installed)

187 12.2 Initializing Setup Parameters Keys B C UPDTE CHECK RNGE VOLTGE FILTER MODE CURRENT RMS VOLTGE DC MEN MX HOLD m V V k Var M W TIME m V PF deg SCLING VG LINE FREQ STORE RECLL HRMONICS KEY LOCK k M W m V Hz k M W % ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT RNGE UTO UTO VOLTGE CURRENT HOLD MODE MX HOLD TRIG CL INTEGRTOR STRT STOP RESET HRMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET REMOTE LOCL SETUP KEY LOCK OUTPUT SHIFT 1P 3W 3P 3W WIRING 3P 4W 3V 3 Te explanation given in tis section uses WT230 as an example. For te differences between te WT210 and te WT230, see section 2.2, Operation Keys and Functions/Element Display. Procedure Operate te instrument by following te tick lines in te menu below. Press te key to confirm a selection or setting. To leave te current menu in te middle of te operation, press te key indicated in step 1. Te confirmed settings up to tat point are kept. 1. SETUP 2. Select initialization (Display C) Confirming te Execution of te Initialization (Display C) End of setting Settings will be initialized 12-2

188 Initializing Setup Parameters, Zero-Level Compensation, and Key Lock 12.2 Initializing Setup Parameters Explanation Initializing Setup Parameters Select YES in te confirmation menu of te setup procedure and press te key to execute te initialization. Te initial settings are as follows. Item Initial setting Display Display function: V, element: 1 Display B Display function:, element: 1 Display C Display function: W, element: 1 Number of displayed digits Hi (5 digits) Display update rate 0.25 s Line filter OFF Frequency filter OFF Measurement syncronization source Measurement range uto range Measurement mode RMS Wiring metod (only WT230) 1P3W Hold OFF MX old OFF PC/CT scaling constant P: 1.000, C: 1.000, F: scaling ON/OFF: OFF External sensor scaling constant veraging veraging type: exponential, attenuation constant: 8 veraging ON/OFF: OFF Crest factor 3 MTH computing equation WT210: Voltage crest factor WT230: Efficiency Frequency VHz Integration Reset condition, integration mode: manual Integration preset time: 0 r, 00 min, 00 s Harmonic measurement (option)pll source: V1, armonic distortion factor computation format: IEC, element: 1 Harmonic measurement function ON/OFF: OFF Storage/recalling Interval: 0r 00min 00sec, storage/recalling ON/OFF: OFF D/ output (option) Output items: normal measurement items, rated integration time: 1 r, 00 min, 00 s Comparator (option) Mode: single, determination function: (V1, 1, P1, PF1) Limit value: refer to section 9.6, display function ON/OFF: OFF Data output Communication, item: normal measurement setting GP-IB Mode: addressable mode, address: 1, status byte: 15, delimiter: 0 Serial Mode: normal mode, andsaking mode: 0, format: 0, Baud rate: 9600, delimiter: 0, status byte: Note Be careful since measurement data will be lost wen initializing. However, measurement data or setup parameters stored in te internal memory will be kept. If te setup parameters are initialized by a communication command (RC command or *RST command), parameters related to GPIB and serial communication will not be initialized. Wen Initializing Setup Parameters at Power-On If te power switc is turned ON wile olding down te key, te WT210/WT230 powers up using initial settings. Keep olding down te key until te illumination of all LEDs turn off (step of te Opening Message on page 3-10). ll setup parameters including communication parameters will be initialized as indicated above. Wen te setup parameters are initialized, error codes Err. 60 and Err. 78 are sown as messages to indicate te initialization; tey do not indicate a malfunction. 12-3

189 12.3 Performing Zero-Level Compensation Keys B C UPDTE CHECK RNGE VOLTGE FILTER MODE CURRENT RMS VOLTGE DC MEN MX HOLD m V V k Var M W TIME m V PF deg SCLING VG LINE FREQ STORE RECLL HRMONICS KEY LOCK k M W m V Hz k M W % ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT RNGE UTO UTO VOLTGE CURRENT HOLD MODE MX HOLD TRIG CL INTEGRTOR STRT STOP RESET HRMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET REMOTE LOCL SETUP KEY LOCK OUTPUT SHIFT 1P 3W 3P 3W WIRING 3P 4W 3V 3 Te explanation given in tis section uses WT230 as an example. For te differences between te WT210 and te WT230, see section 2.2, Operation Keys and Functions/Element Display. Procedure SHIFT CL (Execute zero-level compensation) Explanation Zero-Level Compensation Tis function is used to create a zero input condition using te internal circuit of te WT210/WT230 and setting te level at tat point to zero level. Zero-level compensation must be performed to meet te specifications of te WT210/WT230 (see capter 16). Zero-level compensation is executed wen you carry out te following operations. Wen you press te SHIFT key to illuminate te indicator above and to te left of te SHIFT key followed by te key. Wen you cange te measurement range. Note For making accurate measurements, we recommend zero level compensation to be performed after warming up te instrument for at least 30 minutes. In addition, te ambient temperature needs to be witin te specifications (see capter 16) and stable. If te measurement mode, measurement range, and input filter are not canged over a long period of time, te zero level may cange due to te canges in te environment surrounding te instrument. It is recommended tat zero level compensation be performed in tis case. 12-4

190 Initializing Setup Parameters, Zero-Level Compensation, and Key Lock 12.4 Key Lock Keys B C UPDTE CHECK RNGE VOLTGE FILTER MODE CURRENT RMS VOLTGE DC MEN MX HOLD m V V k Var M W TIME m V PF SCLING VG LINE FREQ STORE RECLL HRMONICS KEY LOCK k M W deg m V Hz k M W % ELEMENT ELEMENT ELEMENT RNGE UTO UTO VOLTGE CURRENT HOLD MODE MX HOLD TRIG CL INTEGRTOR STRT STOP RESET HRMONICS MEMORY INTEG SET REMOTE LOCL SETUP KEY LOCK OUTPUT SHIFT 1P 3W 3P 3W WIRING 3P 4W 3V 3 Te explanation given in tis section uses WT230 as an example. For te differences between te WT210 and te WT230, see section 2.2, Operation Keys and Functions/Element Display. Procedure Turning ON te key lock SHIFT LOCL KEY LOCK (Key lock ON) Te KEY LOCK indicator on te front panel illuminates. From tis point, you can only operate te power switc or carry out te operation to turn OFF te key lock. Turning OFF te key lock Carry out te following procedure wile te KEY LOCK indicator is lit. SHIFT LOCL KEY LOCK (Key lock OFF) Explanation Te KEY LOCK indicator on te front panel turns OFF. ll key operations are enabled. Key Lock You can disable (key lock) te front panel key operation. However, te following switc and key operations are enabled even during key lock. ON/OFF of te power switc Operation to turn OFF key lock

191 Communication Commands 1 (System of Commands before te IEEE Standard) Capter 13 Communication Commands 1 (System of Commands before te IEEE Standard) 13.1 Commands /? Sets te current auto range ON or OFF/ inquires about te current setting. Syntax m <terminator> m indicates auto range ON/OFF m= 0: auto range OFF (fixed range) 1: auto range ON Query? <terminator> Example 0 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value. uto range is not allowed wile integration is in progress; execution error 13 will occur. If te range is canged during auto range mode, manual range mode will be validated instead of auto range mode. If integration is started during auto range mode, auto range mode will be invalidated. uto range mode is not allowed if te external sensor range is selected; execution error 14 will occur. Wile recalling is in progress, execution error 19 will occur. C/C? Sets attenuation constant/inquires about te current setting. Te constant set is used as te attenuation constant for exponential averaging, or as te number of data for moving averaging. Syntax C m <terminator> m indicates attenuation constant m= 1: 8 2: 16 3: 32 4: 64 Query C? <terminator> Example C1 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value. Wile recalling or storing is in progress, execution error 19 will occur. G/G? Determines weter or not averaging sould be performed/inquires about te current setting. Syntax G m <terminator> m indicates if averaging is ON or OFF m= 0: OFF 1: ON Query G? <terminator> Example G1 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value. veraging cannot be set to ON wile integration is in progress; Error 13 will occur. Wile recalling or storing is in progress, execution error 19 will occur. T/T? Sets averaging type (exponential or moving)/inquires about te current setting. Syntax T m <terminator> m indicates averaging type m= 0: Exponential averaging 1: Moving averaging Query T? <terminator> Example T1 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value. Wile recalling or storing is in progress, execution error 19 will occur. V/V? Sets te voltage auto range ON or OFF/ inquires about te voltage setting Syntax V m <terminator> m indicates auto range ON/OFF m= 0: auto range OFF (fixed range) 1: auto range ON Query V? <terminator> Example V0 Description uto range is not allowed wile integration is in progress; execution error 13 will occur. If te range is canged during auto range mode, manual range mode will be validated instead of auto range mode. If integration is started during auto range mode, auto range mode will be invalidated. Wile recalling is in progress, execution error 19 will occur. CF/CF? Sets te crest factor and queries te current setting. Syntax CF m <terminator> m is te crest factor value m = 0: Crest factor 3 1: Crest factor 6 Query CF? <terminator> Example CF0 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if "m" is set to an illegal value. You cannot cange te setting wile integration is in progress. Error 13 will occur. Wile recalling or storing is in progress, execution error 19 will occur

192 13.1 Commands CM/CM? Selects scaling constants simultaneous setting command group or individual setting command group for command data wic come after tis command/ inquires about te current setting. Syntax CM m <terminator> m indicates command group used. m= 0: WT210/230 command/output format group (scaling constant simultaneous setting command group) 1: command/output format group by element (scaling constant individual setting command group) Query CM? <terminator> Example CM1 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value. Te output format of te WT210 is te same for m=0 or 1. D/D? Sets te function for display /inquires about te current setting. Syntax D m <terminator> m indicates one of te following functions. in case of normal measurement m= 1: voltage (V) 2: current () 3: power (W) 4: reactive power (var) 5: apparent power (V) 15: Elapsed integration time (TIME) in case of armonic measurement m= 1: Eac relative armonic content of 1st to 50 (or 30) t order of voltage (V) 2: Eac relative armonic content of 1st to 50 (or 30) t order of current () 3: Eac relative armonic content of 1st to 50 (or 30) t order of active power (W) 28: armonic measurement order (order) Query D? <terminator> Example D1 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value. DB/DB? Sets te function for display B/inquires about te current setting. Syntax DB m <terminator> m indicates one of te following functions. in case of normal measurement m= 1: voltage (V) 2: current () 3: power (W) 6: power factor (PF) 11: pase angle (deg) in case of armonic measurement m= 1: Measured value of eac component of voltage (V) 2: Measured value of eac component of current () 3: Measured value of eac component of active power (W) 6: power factor (PF) 16: armonic distortion factor of voltage (V THD) 17: armonic distortion factor of current ( THD) 19: Relative armonic content of eac voltage component (V %) 20: Relative armonic content of eac current component ( %) 21: Relative armonic content of eac active power component (W %) 22: Pase angle between eac voltage of te 2nd to 50 (or 30) t order and te fundamental (1st order) voltage. 23: Pase angle between eac current of te 2nd to 50 (or 30) t order and te fundamental (1st order) current. Query DB? <terminator> Example DB1 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value. DC/DC? Sets te function for display C/inquires about te current setting Syntax DC m <terminator> m indicates one of te following functions. in case of normal measurement m= 1: voltage (V) 2: current () 3: power (W) 13-2

193 Communication Commands 1 (System of Commands before te IEEE Standard) 7: Input voltage frequency (V Hz) 8: Input current frequency ( Hz) 9: watt our (W) 10: ampere our () 12: Peak voltage value (Vpk) 13: Peak current value (pk) 14: Computation result (MTH) 24: positive watt our (W+) 25: negative watt our (W ) 26: positive ampere our (+) 27: negative ampere our ( ) in case of armonic measurement m= 1: Rms value of te 1st to 50 (or 30) t order of voltage (V) 2: Rms value of te 1st to 50 (or 30) t order of current () 3: Rms value of te 1st to 50 (or 30) t order of active power (W) 7: Input voltage frequency (V Hz) 8: Input current frequency ( Hz) Query DC? <terminator> Example DC1 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value. DF/DF? Sets te computation metod for armonic distortion (THD)/inquires about te current setting. Syntax DF m <terminator> m indicates te computation metod for armonic distortion (refer to section 7.2) m= 0: IEC 1: CS Query DF? <terminator> Example DF0 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value. Wile recalling or storing is in progress, execution error 19 will occur. DL/DL? Sets te terminator for communication output data/inquires about te current setting. Syntax Query Example DL <terminator> m indicates terminator GP-IB Serial m= 0: CR+LF+EOI CR+LF 1: IF LF 2: EOI CR DL? <terminator> DL Commands Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value. DR/DR? Displays te current range. Syntax DR m <terminator> m indicates te range. m= 0: cancels te range display and returns to measurement display 1: displays voltage, current and sunt value of element 1 on display, B and C respectively. 2: displays te sunt value of element 1, 2 and 3 on display, B and C respectively (WT230 only). Query DR? <terminator> Example DR0 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value. DS/DS? Sets te number of displayed digits/ inquires about te current setting. Syntax DS m <terminator> m indicates te number of digits. m= 0: 4 digits 1: 5 digits Query DS? <terminator> Example DS0 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value. DY/DY? Sets te display for comparator ON/OFF, or inquires about te current setting. Syntax DY m <terminator> m indicates display for comparator ON/OFF m= 0: cancels te display for comparator 1: sets te display for comparator ON Query DY? <terminator> Example DY1 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value. E/E? Sets te element for display /inquires about te current setting. Syntax E m <terminator> m indicates element. m= 1: Element 1 2: Element 2 (for WT230 model only) 3: Element 3 (for WT230 only) 4: (for WT230 only) Query E? <terminator> Example E1 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value

194 13.1 Commands EB/EB? Syntax Sets te element for display B/inquires about te current setting. EB m <terminator> m indicates element. m= 1: Element 1 2: Element 2 (for WT230 model only) 3: Element 3 (for WT230 only) 4: (for WT230 only) Query EB? <terminator> Example EB1 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value. EC/EC? Sets te element for display C/inquires about te current setting. Syntax EC m <terminator> m indicates element. m= 1: Element 1 2: Element 2 (for WT230 model only) 3: Element 3 (for WT230 only) 4: (for WT230 only) Query EC? <terminator> Example EC1 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value. E,ST,<interface message GET> Generates a trigger. Syntax E <terminator> ST <terminator> <interface message GET> Description Tis command is valid only during old mode. FL/FL? Determines weter or not frequency filter is used/inquires about te current setting. Syntax FL m <terminator> m indicates weter frequency filter is ON or OFF. m= 0: OFF 1: ON Query FL? <terminator> Example FL1 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value. Filter cannot be switced ON or OFF wile integration is in progress; error 13 will occur. Wile recalling or storing is in progress, execution error 19 will occur. H/H? Determines weter or not to add a ead to measured data output via communication/inquires about te current setting. Syntax H m <terminator> m indicates weter a eader is added or not. m= 0: No eader added 1: Header added Query H? <terminator> Example H0 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value. H/H? Determines weter or not to turn ON te armonic measurement function/ inquires about te current setting. Syntax H m <terminator> m indicates weter te armonic measurement function or normal measurement function is set. m= 0: Normal measurement 1: Harmonic measurement Query H? <terminator> Example H1 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value. Wen integration is in progress or being aborted, armonic measurement cannot be performed; error 13 will occur. Integration cannot be started wen te armonic measurement function is in progress; error 16 will occur. Wile recalling or storing is in progress, execution error 19 will occur. If you switc te armonic measurement mode ON/OFF using tis command and query te measurement mode using te OD command immediately afterwards, te measured data of te previous measurement mode may be output. To retrieve te measured data in te new measurement mode, a wait of approximately 2 seconds is required after issuing tis command. HD/HD? Determines weter or not output data (display, communications, etc.) sould be updated/inquires about te current setting. Syntax HD m <terminator> m indicates te sampling mode. m= 0: Updates te data at eac sampling rate. 1: Hold Query HD? <terminator> Example HD0 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value. HE/HE? Determines te element of te armonic measurement function/inquires about te current setting. Syntax HE m <terminator> m indicates te element of te armonic measurement function. m= 1: Element 1 2: Element 2 (for WT230 model only) 13-4

195 Communication Commands 1 (System of Commands before te IEEE Standard) 3: Element 3 (for WT230 only) Query HE? <terminator> Example HE1 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value. Wile recalling or storing is in progress, execution error 19 will occur. IC/IC? Sets te integration mode/inquires about te current setting. Syntax IC m <terminator> m indicates one of te following integration modes. m= 0: Normal integration mode 1: Continuous integration mode Query IC? <terminator> Example IC1 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value. Canging te integration mode is not allowed wile integration is in progress; execution error 13 will occur. If continuous integration mode is selected, make sure tat te timer preset time is set to a value larger tan 0. If normal integration mode is selected, set te timer preset time to any desired value. Wile recalling or storing is in progress, execution error 19 will occur. IM/IM? Specifies wic causes will be allowed to generate a status byte/inquires about te current setting. Syntax IM m <terminator> m is assigned as follows (0 m 15). m= 1: Computation end 2: Integration end 4: Syntax error 8: OVER Query IM? <terminator> Example IM15 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value. If more tan one of tese causes is to be allowed, set m to te sum of teir individual m values. For instance, if all causes are to be allowed, set m to 15 (= ). IP Stops integration. Syntax IP <terminator> Description If an attempt is made to stop integration wen integration as already been interrupted (stopped), execution error 45 will occur. Wile recalling or storing is in progress, execution error 19 will occur. IR Resets integration. Syntax IR <terminator> Description If an attempt is made to reset integration wile integration is in progress, execution error 45 will occur. Wile recalling or storing is in progress, execution error 19 will occur. IS Starts integration. Syntax IS <terminator> Description 1If an attempt is made to start integration wen integration is already in progress, execution error 42 will occur. If a voltage or current peak overflow, or overrange takes place wen an attempt is made to start integration, execution error 46 will occur, and integration will not be started. Wile recalling or storing is in progress, execution error 19 will occur. KH/KH? Sets MX old/inquires about te current setting. Syntax KH m <terminator> m indicates MX old ON/OFF. m= 0: OFF 1: ON Query KH? <terminator> Example KH0 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value. Wile recalling or storing is in progress, execution error 19 will occur. Cannot be canged in armonic measurement mode. Execution error 19 will occur. KL/KL? Turns ON/OFF key lock/inquires about te current setting. Syntax KL m <terminator> "m" indicates weter key lock is ON or OFF. m= 0: OFF 1: ON Query KL? <terminator> Example KL0 KV/KV?, K/K?, KW/KW? Sets te scaling constant/inquires about te current setting. KV is used for voltage measurement, K for current measurement, and KW for power measurement. Syntax 13.1 Commands Wen CM0 is set: KV n <terminator> K n <terminator> KW n <terminator> Wen CM1 is set: KV m,n <terminator> K m,n <terminator> KW m,n <terminator> m indicates element. m= 0: ll elements (Setting not allowed during inquiry)

196 13.1 Commands 1: Element 1 2: Element 2 (for WT230 model only) 3: Element 3 (for WT230 only) n indicates scaling value n 9999 Query Wen CM0 is set: KV? <terminator> K? <terminator> KW? <terminator> Wen CM1 is set: KV1? <terminator> K2? <terminator> KW3? <terminator> Example Wen CM0 is set: KV1.000 K1.000 KW1.000 Wen CM1 is set: KV1,1.000 K2,1.000 KW3,1.000 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value. n must be floating-point or integer. Error 12 will occur wen an inquiry is made if te scaling values set for eac element by CM0 differ from eac oter. Wile recalling or storing is in progress, execution error 19 will occur. LF/LF? Turns ON/OFF te line filter/inquires about te current setting. Syntax LF m <terminator> "m" indicates weter te line filter is ON or OFF. m= 0: OFF 1: ON Query LF? <terminator> Example LF0 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if "m" is set to an illegal value. You cannot cange te setting wile integration is in progress. Execution error 13 will occur. Wile recalling or storing is in progress, execution error 19 will occur. MN/MN? Sets te measurement mode for voltage and current/inquires about te current setting. Syntax Query MN m <terminator> m indicates te measurement mode. m= 0: RMS 1: VOLTGE MEN (MEN in case of voltage, RMS in case of current) 2 :DC MN? <terminator> Example MN0 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value. Canging of te measurement mode is not allowed wile integration is in progress; execution error 13 will occur. Wile recalling or storing is in progress, execution error 19 will occur. MT/MT? Sets te computing equation of MTH function/inquires about te current setting. Syntax MT m<terminator> m indicates te computing equation. m= 0: Efficiency (for WT230 only) 1: Crest factor of te voltage input waveform of element 1 2: Crest factor of te voltage input waveform of element 2 (for WT230 model only) 3: Crest factor of te voltage input waveform of element 3 (for WT230 only) 4: Crest factor of te current input waveform of element 1 5: Crest factor of te current input waveform of element 2 (for WT230 model only) 6: Crest factor of te current input waveform of element 3 (available only on 7: display + display B 8: display display B 9: display display B 10: display / display B 11: display / (display B) 2 12: (display ) 2 / display B 13: verage active power of element 1 wile integration is in progress 14: verage active power of element 2 wile integration is in progress (for WT230 model only) 15: verage active power of element 3 wile integration is in progress (for WT230 only) 16: verage active power of element S wile integration is in progress (for WT230 only) 13-6

197 Communication Commands 1 (System of Commands before te IEEE Standard) Query MT?<terminator> Example MT0 Description verage active power (MT13, 14, 15, 16) is displayed only during integration. O/O? Sets D/ output items/inquires about te current settings. Up to 4 or 12 measured data can be selected and output as analog signal from te D/ converter. Syntax O m1,m2,m3 <terminator> m1 indicates D/ output cannel, and must be set witin te following range. 1 m1 12 or 4 m2 indicates output item no. m2= 0: No output 1: Voltage (V) 2: Current () 3: Power (W) 4: Reactive power (var) 5: pparent power (V) 6: Power factor (PF) 7: Input voltage frequency (V Hz) 8: Input current frequency ( Hz) 9: Watt-our (W) 10: mpere-our () 11: Pase angle (deg) 12: Peak voltage value (Vpk) 13: Peak current value (pk) 14: Computation result (MTH) 24: Positive watt-our (W+) 25: Negative watt-our (W ) 26: Positive ampere-our (+) 27: Negative ampere-our ( ) m3 indicates element. m= 1: Element 1 2: Element 2 (for WT230 model only) 3: Element 3 (for WT230 only) 4: (for WT230 only) Query O1? <terminator> Example O1,3,2 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if any of m1, m2 and m3 is set to an illegal value. If computation result is selected and te MTH computing equation is set to anyting oter tan efficiency (MT0) or te average active power (MT13 to 16) wen integration is in progress, te D/ output is fixed to 0 (V). No output and computation result ave no relation to te element, but wen using tem wit te O command, set m3=1. OD/OD? Initializes D/ output items/inquires about te current settings. Two sets of default settings are available: one is for normal measurement and te oter is for integration. Te same initialization can also be performed using a key operation. Syntax OD m <terminator> m indicates default no. m= 2: Select mode 0: Default for normal measurement 1: Default for integration Query OD? <terminator> Example OD1 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value. Select mode (OD2) is validated wen te O command is executed if m as been set to 0 (default for normal measurement) or 1 (default for integration). OD Requests output of measurement data. Syntax OE Syntax Example 13.1 Commands OD <terminator> Requests output of error codes via communications. OE <terminator> ERR11 <terminator> Error code Description 11 Command error 12 Parameter error 13 ttempted to cange settings wic cannot be canged wile integration was in progress. 14 ttempted to set auto range mode wile external sensor range was selected. 15 ttempted to execute a command tat was protected. 16 ttempted to execute a command tat was protected wile armonic measurement was being performed. 17 Time-out in print output. 18 Not in printing mode, or no data available. 19 ttempted to execute commands wile recalling/ storing is in progress. 30 File data failure 31 File is damaged. 32 Not stored in internal memory. 33 No data to be stored in internal memory. 41 ttempted to start integration wen integration ad been stopped due to an irregularity. 42 ttempt made to start integration during integration

198 13.1 Commands OF/OF? Syntax 43 Measurement stopped due to overflow during integration or due to a power failure. 44 ttempt made to stop integration wile integration was interrupted. 45 ttempt made to reset integration wile integration was in progress. 46 ttempt made to start integration wen peak overflow was detected. 47 Te integration timer is set to zero wen integration is started in continuous integration mode. 51 Measurement data overflow occurred. -ol is displayed. 52 Voltage peak overflow occurred 53 Current peak overflow occurred 54 Power factor exceeded 2. PFErr is displayed. 55 degerr was displayed. 56 Frequency input level was too low or below measurement range. ErrLo is displayed. 57 Frequency was above te measurement range. ErrHi, is displayed. 58 Computation overflow occurred. of is displayed. 59 Wen armonic measurement is carried out, FrqEr is displayed Sets communication output information types/inquires about te current settings. Up to 14 measured data can be selected and output. OF m1,m2,m3 <terminator> m1 indicates communication output cannel, and must be set witin te following range. 1 m1 14 m2 indicates output type no. m2= 0: No output 1: Voltage (V) 2: Current () 3: Power (W) 4: Reactive power (var) 5: pparent power (V) 6: Power factor (PF) 7: Input voltage frequency (V Hz) 8: Input current frequency ( Hz) 9: Watt-our (W) 10: mpere-our () 11: Pase angle (deg) 12: Peak voltage value (Vpk) 13: Peak current value (pk) 14: Computation result (MTH) 15: Integration time 24: Positive watt-our (W+) 25: Negative watt-our (W ) 26: Positive ampere-our (+) 27: Negative ampere-our ( ) m3 indicates element, and must be set witin te following range. 1 m3 4 Query OF1? <terminator> Example OF1,3,2 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m1, m2 or m3 is set to an illegal value. No output, computation range, and elapsed integration time ave no relation to te element, but wen using tem wit te OF command, set m3=1. OFD/OFD? Initializes communication output information type/inquires about te current settings. Two sets of default setting are available: one is for normal measurement and te oter is for integration. Syntax OFD m <terminator> m indicates default no. m= 2: Select mode (valid only for te inquiry command) 0: Default for normal measurement 1: Default for integration Query OFD? <terminator> Example OFD1 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value. Select mode (OFD2) is validated wen te OF command is executed if m is set to 0 (default for normal measurement) or 1 (default for integration). If you select default for normal measurement, te output of cannel 13 is te information on te frequency target function tat is currently measured, and te output of cannel 14 is te information displayed on display C. If you cange eiter te frequency measurement target or display information of display C, te output also canges. 13-8

199 Communication Commands 1 (System of Commands before te IEEE Standard) OH/OH? Syntax Sets communication output information types in case of armonic measurement/ inquires about te current settings. OH m1,m2 <terminator> m1 indicates output type no. in case of print mode m1= 1: (V) outputs measured voltage value and relative armonic content as a numerical value 2: () outputs measured current value and relative armonic content as a numerical value 3: (W) outputs measured active power value and relative armonic content as a numerical value 4: (deg) outputs te pase angle as a numerical value 5: (GV) outputs measured voltage value as numerical value and grap 6: (G) outputs measured current value as numerical value and grap 7: (GW) outputs measured active power value as numerical value and grap 8: (GVD) outputs te pase angle between te 2nd to 50 (or 30) t order voltage and te fundamental (1st order) as numerical value and grap 9: (GD) outputs te pase angle between te 2nd to 50 (or 30) t order current and te fundamental (1st order) as numerical value and grap 10:(CGV) outputs te relative armonic content of voltage as numerical value and grap 11:(CG) outputs te relative armonic content of current as numerical value and grap 12: (CGW) outputs te relative armonic content of active power as numerical value and grap 13: (LL) outputs te relative armonic content and measured value of bot voltage and current 13.1 Commands in case of any oter mode m1= 1: (V) outputs measured voltage value and relative armonic content as a numerical value 2: () outputs measured current value and relative armonic content as a numerical value 3: (W) outputs measured active power value and relative armonic content as a numerical value 4: (deg) outputs te pase angle between te first order voltage(current) and te 2nd to 50 (or 30) t voltage(current) as a numerical value 5: (GV) outputs measured voltage value and relative armonic content as numerical value 6: (G) outputs measured current value and relative armonic content as numerical value 7: (GW) outputs measured active power value and relative armonic content as numerical value 8: (GVD) outputs te pase angle between te first order voltage(current) and te 2nd to 50 (or 30) t voltage(current) as a numerical value 9: (GD) outputs te pase angle between te first order voltage(current) and te 2nd to 50 (or 30) t voltage(current) as a numerical value 10: (CGV) outputs te measured value of voltage and relative armonic content as numerical value 11: (CG) outputs te measured value of current and relative armonic content as numerical value 12: (CGW) outputs te measured value of active power and relative armonic content as numerical value

200 13.1 Commands 13: (LL) outputs te relative armonic content and measured value of bot voltage and current m2 indicates element m2= 1: Element 1 2: Element 2 (for WT230 model only) 3: Element 3 (for WT230 only) Query OH? <terminator> Example OH13,1 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m1 or m2 is set to an illegal value. OR/OR? Designates te armonic order of te armonic component sown on display B (V,,W,V %, %, W%, V deg, deg)/ inquires about te current settings. Syntax OR m <terminator> m indicates te armonic order m= Integer between 1 to 50 (or 30) Query OR? <terminator> Example OR50 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value. Depending on te fundamental frequency of te PLL source set as te input, te maximum number of orders varies. Wen an order exceeding te maximum as been set, display B will sow [ ]. OS Requests output of setting parameters via communications. Syntax OS <terminator> Example Line 1: Model MODEL <terminator> Line 2: Voltage range RV9;V1 <terminator> Line 3: Current range (for CM0) R9;1;S50.00 <terminator> (for CM1) R9;1;S1,50.00; S2,50.00; S3,50.00 <terminator> Line 4: Display function D1;DB2;DC3 <terminator> Line 5: Display element E1;EB1;EC1 <terminator> Line 6: Measurement condition WR2;FL0;SC0;G0;HD0; MT0 <terminator> Line 7: Measurement mode MN0 <terminator> Line 8: Scaling (for CM0) KV1.000;K1.000; KW1.000 <terminator> (for CM1, WT210) KV1,1.000;K1,1.000; KW1,1.000 <terminator> (for CM1, WT230) KV1,1.000;KV2,1.000; KV3,1.000; K1,1.000;K2,1.000; K3,1.000; KW1,1.000;KW2,1.000; KW3,1.000 <terminator> Line 9: veraging setting T1;C1 <terminator> Line 10: Integration setting IC0; TM0,0,0 <terminator> Line 11: Store and recall settings SO0;SR0,0,0:RO0; RR0,0,0 <terminator> Line 12: Harmonic measurement (for models wit /HRM option) PS1;H0;OR1;HE1; DF0 <terminator> Line 13: D/ output setting (for models wit /D4, /D12, or /CMP option) RT1,0,0 <terminator> Line 14: Comparator output setting (for models wit /CMP option) YO0;YM1;DY0; YC1 <terminator> Line 15: Command system used CM0 <terminator> Line 16: Measurement syncronization source, integration type, MX old, and number of displayed digits SN1;IG0;KH0; DS1 <terminator> Line 17: Display update rate and line filter SI1;LF0;FL0 <terminator> Line 18: Output end END <terminator> Description Te number of lines varies depending on te options used. Wen a CM0 is issued, if te sunt current values or scaling values set for eac element differ from eac oter, te value set for element 1 will be output

201 Communication Commands 1 (System of Commands before te IEEE Standard) OY/OY? Sets te relay output items in case of normal measurement/inquires about te current setting. Up to four items can be set. Syntax OY m1,m2,m3,m4,m5 <terminator> m1 indicates te output relay cannel 1 m1 4 m2 indicates te output item number m2= 0: no output 1: Voltage (V) 2: Current () 3: Power (W) 4: Reactive power (var) 5: pparent power (V) 6: Power factor (PF) 7: Input voltage frequency (V Hz) 8: Input current frequency ( Hz) 9: Watt-our (W) 10: mpere-our () 11: Pase angle (deg) 12: Peak voltage value (Vpk) 13: Peak current value (pk) 14: Computation result (MTH) 24: Positive watt-our (W+) 25: Negative watt-our (W ) 26: Positive ampere-our (+) 27: Negative ampere-our ( ) m3 indicates element. m= 1: Element 1 2: Element 2 (for WT230 model only) 3: Element 3 (for WT230 only) 4: (for WT230 only) m4 indicates setting value m4 ±9999 m5 indicates prefix m5= 0: m(e-3) 1: (E+0) 2: k(e+3) 3: M(E+6) Query OY1? <terminator> Example OY1,1,1,600.0,1 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value. No output and computation result ave no relation to te element, but wen using tem wit te OY command, set m3=1. OYH/OYH? Sets te relay output items in case of armonic measurement/inquires about te current setting. Up to four items can be set. Syntax OYH m1,m2,m3,m4,m5,m6 <terminator> m1 indicates te output relay cannel 13.1 Commands 1 m1 4 m2 indicates te output item number m2= 0: no output 1: Voltage (V) 2: Current () 3: Power (W) 6: Power factor (PF) 16: armonic distortion factor of voltage (V THD) 17: armonic distortion factor of current ( THD) 19: Relative armonic content of eac voltage component (V %) 20: Relative armonic content of eac current component ( %) 21: Relative armonic content of eac active power component (W %) 22: Pase angle between eac voltage of te 2nd to 50 (or 30) t order and te fundamental (1st order) voltage (V deg) 23: Pase angle between eac current of te 2nd to 50 (or 30) t order and te fundamental (1st order) current ( deg) m3 indicates element. m= 1: Element 1 2: Element 2 (for WT230 model only) 3: Element 3 (for WT230 only) m4 indicates order of te armonic. m4= Integer between 1 and 50 (or 30) m5 indicates setting value m5 ±9999 m6 indicates prefix. m6= 0: m(e-3) 1: (E+0) 2: k(e+3) 3: M(E+6) Query OYH3? <terminator> Example OYH3,3,1,1,1,200,2 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value. No output is not related to any element, order or setting value, so in case te OYH command is set, set tese all to 1 as a dummy. PF, VTHD and THD are not related to any order, so in case te OYH command is used, set 1 as a dummy

202 13.1 Commands PS/PS? Syntax Sets te input as te PLL source/ inquires about te current setting. PS m <terminator> m indicates te input as te PLL source m= 1: V1 2: 1 3: V2 (for WT230 model only) 4: 2 (for WT230 model only) 5: V3 (for WT230 only) 6: 3 (for WT230 only) Query PS? <terminator> Example PS1 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if any illegal value is set. Wile recalling or storing is in progress, execution error 19 will occur. R/R? Sets current range/inquires about te current setting. Syntax R m <terminator> m indicates current range. Wen te crest factor is set to 3 m= 4: 0.5 range 5: 1 range 6: 2 range 7: 5 range 8: 10 range 9: 20 range 15: 50 mv range (only wen equipped wit option EX2) 16: 100 mv range (only wen equipped wit option EX2) 17: 200 mv range (only wen equipped wit option EX2) 18: 2.5 V range (only wen equipped wit option EX1) 19: 5 V range (only wen equipped wit option EX1) 20: 10 V range (only wen equipped wit option EX1) 21: 5 m range (WT210 only) 22: 10 m range (WT210 only) 23:20 m range (WT210 only) 24:50 m range (WT210 only) 25:100 m range (WT210 only) 26:200 m range (WT210 only) Wen te crest factor is set to 6 m = 4: 0.25 range 5: 0.5 range 6: 1 range 7: 2.5 range 8: 5 range 9: 10 range 15: 25 mv range (only wen equipped wit option /EX2) 16: 50 mv range (only wen equipped wit option /EX2) 17: 100 mv range (only wen equipped wit option /EX2) 18: 1.25 V range (only wen equipped wit option /EX2) 19: 2.5 V range (only wen equipped wit option /EX2) 20: 5 V range (only wen equipped wit option /EX2) 21: 2.5 m range (only wen equipped wit option /EX2) 22: 5 m range (WT210 only) 23: 10 m range (WT210 only) 24: 25 m range (WT210 only) 25: 50 m range (WT210 only) 26: 100 m range (WT210 only) Query R? <terminator> Example R9 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value. Canging of te current range is not allowed wile integration is in progress; execution error 13 will occur. Te 50 mv, 100 mv and 200 mv or 2.5V, 5V and 10V ranges are for te external sensor. Wen using any of tese ranges, be sure to set a valid sensor value using te S command. Wile recalling or storing is in progress, execution error 19 will occur. RC Initializes setting parameters. Syntax RC <terminator> Description For details on initialization, see section 12.2, Initializing Setup Parameters. Setup parameters excluding tose related to communication are initialized. RO/RO? Sets te recall function ON/OFF or inquires about te current setting. Syntax RO m <terminator> m indicates recall ON or OFF. m= 0: recall OFF 1: recall ON Query RO? <terminator> Example RO1 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value. RR/RR? Sets te recalling interval/inquires about te current setting. Syntax RR m1,m2,m3 <terminator> m1 indicates te ours 0 m1 99 m2 indicates te minutes 0 m2 59 m3 indicates te seconds 0 m

203 Communication Commands 1 (System of Commands before te IEEE Standard) Query RR? <terminator> Example RR0,0,0 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if an illegal value is set. If te recalling interval is set to 0 0 min 0 s, te recalling interval is set to te display update rate as wen te data was stored. Wile recalling or storing is in progress, execution error 19 will occur. RT/RT? Sets te rated integration time wen integrated values are to be output as an analog signal/inquires about te current setting. Syntax RT m1,m2, m3 <terminator> m1 indicates te ours 0 m m2 indicates te minutes 0 m2 59 m3 indicates te seconds 0 m3 59 Query RT? <terminator> Example RT1,0 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if an illegal value is set. Te maximum time tat can be specified is (ours). RV/RV? Sets voltage range/inquires about te current setting. Syntax RV m <terminator> m indicates voltage range. Wen te crest factor is set to 3 m= 3: 15V range 4: 30 V range 5: 60 V range 6: 100 V range 7: 150 V range 8: 300 V range 9: 600 V range Wen te crest factor is set to 6 m= 3: 7.5 V range 4: 15 V range 5: 30 V range 7: 75 V range 8: 150 V range 9: 300 V range Query RV? <terminator> Example RV9 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if an illegal value is set. Canging of te voltage range is not allowed wile integration is in progress; execution error 13 will occur. Wile recalling or storing is in progress, execution error 19 will occur. S/S? Sets te external sensor scaling value/ inquires about te current setting. Syntax Wen CM0 is set: 13.1 Commands S n <terminator> Wen CM1 is set: S m,n <terminator> m indicates element. m= 0: ll elements (Setting not allowed during inquiry) 1: Element 1 2: Element 2 (for WT230 model only) 3: Element 3 (for WT230 only) n indicates external sensor scaling value n 9999 Query Wen CM0 is set: S? <terminator> Wen CM1 is set: Sm? <terminator> Example Wen CM0 is set: S50.00 Wen CM1 is set: S1,50.00 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value. Error 12 will occur wen an inquiry is made if te sunt current values set for eac element by CM0 differ from eac oter. Wile recalling or storing is in progress, execution error 19 will occur. SC/SC? Determines weter or not to use te scaling function/inquires about te current setting. Syntax SC m <terminator> m indicates weter scaling is ON or OFF. m= 0: OFF 1: ON Query SC? <terminator> Example SC1 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value. Wile recalling or storing is in progress, execution error 19 will occur. SI/SI? Sets te display update rate/inquires about te current setting. Syntax SI m <terminator> "m" indicates te display update rate. m= 0: 0.1 s 1: 0.25 s 2: 0.5 s 3: 1 s 4: 2 s 5: 5 s Query SI? <terminator> Example SI1 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value

204 13.1 Commands SL You cannot cange te setting wile integration is in progress. Execution error 13 will occur. Wile recalling or storing is in progress, execution error 19 will occur. Recalls setup parameters from a selected file. Syntax SL m <terminator> m indicates file no., and must be set witin te following range. 1 m 4 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value. It is not possible to recall communicationsrelated information (communication mode, address etc.) using tis command. Wile recalling or storing is in progress, execution error 19 will occur. SN/SN? Sets te measurement syncronization source/inquires about te current setting. Syntax SN m <terminator> m indicates te type of measurement syncronization source. m= 0: V (voltage) 1: (current) 2: OFF Query SN? <terminator> Example SN0 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value. You cannot cange te setting wile integration is in progress. Execution error 13 will occur. Wile recalling or storing is in progress, execution error 19 will occur. SO/SO? Sets te store function ON/OFF or inquires about te current setting. Syntax SO m <terminator> m indicates weter storage is ON or OFF. m= 0: OFF 1: ON Query SO? <terminator> Example SO1 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value. Wile recalling or storing is in progress, execution error 19 will occur. SR/SR? Sets te storage interval/inquires about te current setting. Syntax SR m1,m2,m3 <terminator> m1 indicates te ours 0 m1 99 m2 indicates te minutes 0 m2 59 m3 indicates te seconds 0 m3 59 Query SR? <terminator> Example SR0,0,0 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if an illegal value is set. If te store interval is set to 0 0 min 0 s, te store interval is set to te same interval as te display update rate. Wile recalling or storing is in progress, execution error 19 will occur. SS Stores setup parameters into a selected file. Syntax SS m <terminator> m indicates file no., and must be set witin te following range. 1 m 4 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value. Te following setup parameters can be stored: ll setup parameters wic can be output by te OS command Information related to communications (GP- IB, serial, etc.) TM/TM? Sets integration preset time/inquires about te current setting. Syntax TM m1,m2, m3 <terminator> m1 indicates te ours 0 m m2 indicates te minutes 0 m2 59 m3 indicates te seconds 0 m3 59 Query TM? <terminator> Example TM0,0,0 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if an illegal value is set. Wile recalling or storing is in progress, execution error 19 will occur. Te maximum time tat can be specified is (ours). WR/WR? Sets te wiring system/inquires about te current setting. Syntax WR m <terminator> m= 2: 1P3W (for WT230 only) 3: 3P3W (for WT230 only) 4: 3P4W (for WT230 model only) 5: 3V3 (for WT230 model only) Query WR? <terminator> Example WR2 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if an illegal value is set

205 Communication Commands 1 (System of Commands before te IEEE Standard) 13.1 Commands YC/YC? Sets te display cannel wile te comparator function is ON/inquires about te current setting. Syntax YC m <terminator> m indicates te cannel number for display in case of single mode m= 1: Displays limit and measurement value on display 1 2: Displays limit and measurement value on display 2 3: Displays limit and measurement value on display 3 4: Displays limit and measurement value on display 4 in case of dual mode m=1,2:displays limit and measurement value on display 1 and 2 respectively m=3,4:displays limit and measurement value on display 3 and 4 respectively Query YC? <terminator> Example YC1 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value. Description Zero-level compensation is not allowed wile integration is in progress; execution error 13 will occur. Wile recalling is in progress, execution error 19 will occur. YM/YM? Sets te mode of te comparator function/inquires about te current setting. Syntax YM m <terminator> m indicates te display mode m= 0: Single mode 1: Dual mode Query YM? <terminator> Example YM0 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value. 13 YO/YO? Sets te comparator function ON/OFF or inquires about te current setting. Syntax YO m <terminator> m indicates weter te comparator function is ON/OFF m= 0: OFF 1: ON Query YO? <terminator> Example YO1 Description Parameter error 12 will occur if m is set to an illegal value. ZC Syntax Executes zero-level compensation. ZC <terminator> 13-15

206 13.2 Before Programming Environment Model: IBM-compatible PC Language: Visual Basic Ver5.0 Professional Edition or later. GP-IB board: T-GPIB/TNT IEEE by National Instruments. Settings on Visual Basic Standard modules used: Niglobal.bas Vbib-32.bas WT210/WT230 Settings GP-IB address Te sample programs given in tis capter use a GP-IB address of 1 for te WT210/WT230. Set te GP-IB address to 1 according to te procedures described in section Setting te GP-IB Board Te sample programs in tis capter use te GP-IB serial polling function (ilrsp function). Turn OFF automatic serial polling (clear te utomatic Serial Polling ceck box) to make te sample programs work properly. Basic Form of Programming Te program data structure of te WT210/WT230 is as follows: Command + Parameter + Terminator SCII codes are used. Example D 2 CR LF Command Parameter Terminator Command Defined by one to tree uppercase alpabet caracters. Parameter Value or caracter string in SCII code. Terminator For GP-IB communication Wen te WT210/WT230 is a listener, CR+LF, LF, or EOI can be received as a terminator. Wen te WT210/WT230 is a listener, te terminator specified by te DL command (see page 13-3) is sent. For Serial communication See pages 11-8 and

207 Communication Commands 1 (System of Commands before te IEEE Standard) 13.2 Before Programming Multiple Command Statements Multiple commands can be written on a single line. In tis case, delimit eac command statement (command + parameter) using a semicolon. Note space or a tab can eiter exist or not exist between a command and a parameter. Query Commands query command as a question mark attaced to te end of te command. Te returned data in response to a query command is as follows: Query D? ===> Returned data D1 Numeric Parameters Digits tat exceed 5 digits in floating-point parameters are truncated

208 13.3 Sample Program Image 13-18

209 Communication Commands 1 (System of Commands before te IEEE Standard) 13.4 Sample Program (Initialization, Error, and Execution Functions) Option Explicit Dim StartFlag s Integer 'Start Flag Dim addr s Integer 'GPIB ddress Dim Timeout s Integer 'Timeout Dim Dev s Integer 'Device ID(GPIB) Dim term s String 'Terminator Dim Query(1100) s String 'Query String Dim Dummy s Integer Private Function InitGpib() s Integer Dim eos s Integer Dim eot s Integer Dim brd s Integer Dim sts s Integer eos = &HC0 eot = 1 term = Cr(10) Timeout = T10s brd = ilfind("gpib0") If (brd < 0) Ten GoTo GPIBError End If Dev = ildev(0, addr, 0, Timeout, eot, eos) If (Dev < 0) Ten GoTo GPIBError End If sts = ilsic(brd) If (sts < 0) Ten GoTo GPIBError End If InitGpib = 0 Exit Function 'EOS 'EOI 'GPIB Board ID 'Terminator = LF 'EOI = Enable 'Timeout = 10s 'Set IFC GPIBError: Call DisplayGPIBError(sts, "ilsic") InitGpib = 1 End Function Private Sub DisplayGPIBError(ByVal sts s Integer, ByVal msg s String) Dim wrn s String Dim ers s String Dim ern s Integer If (sts nd TIMO) Ten wrn = "Time out" + Cr(13) Else wrn = "" End If If (sts nd EERR) Ten ern = iberr If (ern = EDVR) Ten ers = "EDVR:System error" ElseIf (ern = ECIC) Ten ers = "ECIC:Function requires GPIB board to be CIC" ElseIf (ern = ENOL) Ten ers = "ENOL:No Listeners on te GPIB" ElseIf (ern = EDR) Ten ers = "EDR:GPIB board not addressed correctly" ElseIf (ern = ERG) Ten ers = "ERG:Invalid argument to function call" ElseIf (ern = ESC) Ten ers = "ESC:GPIB board not System Controller as required" ElseIf (ern = EBO) Ten ers = "EBO:I/O operation aborted(timeout)" ElseIf (ern = ENEB) Ten ers = "ENEB:Nonexistent GPIB board" ElseIf (ern = EDM) Ten ers = "EDM:DM error" ElseIf (ern = EOIP) Ten ers = "EOIP:I/O operation started before previous operation completed" ElseIf (ern = ECP) Ten ers = "ECP:No capability for intended operation" ElseIf (ern = EFSO) Ten ers = "EFSO:File system operation error" ElseIf (ern = EBUS) Ten ers = "EBUS:GPIB bus error" ElseIf (ern = ESTB) Ten ers = "ESTB:Serial poll status byte queue overflow" ElseIf (ern = ESRQ) Ten ers = "ESRQ:SRQ remains asserted"

210 13.4 Sample Program (Initialization, Error, and Execution Functions) ElseIf (ern = ETB) Ten ers = "ETB:Te return buffer is full" ElseIf (ern = ELCK) Ten ers = "ELCK:ddress or board is locked" Else ers = "" End If Else ers = "" End If MsgBox ("Status No. " + Str(sts) + Cr(13) + wrn + "Error No. " + Str(ern) + Cr(13) + ers + Cr(13) + msg), vbexclamation, "Error!" Call ibonl(dev, 0) Dev = -1 End Sub Private Sub Command1_Click() Dim sts s Integer If (StartFlag = 1) Ten Exit Sub End If StartFlag = 1 Text1.Text = "STRT" List1.Clear Dummy = DoEvents() sts = GpibNormal 'Run Sample1(GPIB) Get Normal Data If (sts = 0) Ten Text1.Text = "END" Else Text1.Text = "ERROR" End If StartFlag = 0 End Sub Private Sub Command2_Click() Dim sts s Integer If (StartFlag = 1) Ten Exit Sub End If StartFlag = 1 Text1.Text = "STRT" List1.Clear Dummy = DoEvents() sts = GpibHarmonics 'Run Sample2(GPIB) Get Harmonics Data If (sts = 0) Ten Text1.Text = "END" Else Text1.Text = "ERROR" End If StartFlag = 0 End Sub Private Sub Command3_Click() Dim sts s Integer If (StartFlag = 1) Ten Exit Sub End If StartFlag = 1 Text1.Text = "STRT" List1.Clear List1.ddItem "NOT MKE" Text1.Text = "END" StartFlag = 0 End Sub Private Sub Command4_Click() Dim sts s Integer If (StartFlag = 1) Ten Exit Sub End If StartFlag = 1 Text1.Text = "STRT" List1.Clear List1.ddItem "NOT MKE" Text1.Text = "END" StartFlag = 0 End Sub

211 Communication Commands 1 (System of Commands before te IEEE Standard) 13.4 Sample Program (Initialization, Error, and Execution Functions) Private Sub Command5_Click() Dim sts s Integer If (StartFlag = 1) Ten Exit Sub End If StartFlag = 1 Text1.Text = "STRT" List1.Clear List1.ddItem "NOT MKE" Text1.Text = "END" StartFlag = 0 End Sub Private Sub Command6_Click() Dim sts s Integer If (StartFlag = 1) Ten Exit Sub End If StartFlag = 1 Text1.Text = "STRT" List1.Clear List1.ddItem "NOT MKE" Text1.Text = "END" StartFlag = 0 End Sub Private Sub Form_Load() StartFlag = 0 'Clear Start Flag Dev = -1 'Clear device id addr = 1 'GPIB ddress = 1 Command1.Caption = "Sample1(GPIB)" + Cr(13) + "Get Normal Data" Command2.Caption = "Sample2(GPIB)" + Cr(13) + "Get Harmonics Data" Text1.Text = "" End Sub

212 13.5 Sample Program (Output of Normal Measurement Data) Sample1(GPIB) Get Normal Data Private Function GpibNormal() s Integer Dim msg s String Dim qry s String Dim qrytemp s String Dim sts s Integer Dim item s Integer Dim comma s Integer Dim cnt s Integer Dim spr s Integer term = Cr$(10) msg = Space$(100) qry = Space$(500) qrytemp = Space$(200) 'terminator List1.ddItem "Now Initializing. Wait a moment." Dummy = DoEvents() sts = InitGpib If (sts <> 0) Ten GpibNormal = 1 Exit Function End If 'Initialize te settings msg = "RC" + term sts = ilwrt(dev, msg, Len(msg)) If (sts < 0) Ten GoTo GPIBError End If 'Initialize GPIB 'Initialize te settings 'Send Command 'Set te measurement condition 'Hold off, Frequency Filter off, Line Filter off, 'Scaling off, veraging off msg = "HD0;FL0;LF0;SC0;G0" + term sts = ilwrt(dev, msg, Len(msg)) 'Send Command If (sts < 0) Ten GoTo GPIBError End If 'Set function and element of display 'Display : V,Element1, DisplayB :,Element1, DisplayC : W,Element1 msg = "D1;E1;DB2;EB1;DC3;EC1" + term sts = ilwrt(dev, msg, Len(msg)) If (sts < 0) Ten GoTo GPIBError End If 'Set te measurement range msg = "RV7" + term sts = ilwrt(dev, msg, Len(msg)) If (sts < 0) Ten GoTo GPIBError End If msg = "R7" + term sts = ilwrt(dev, msg, Len(msg)) If (sts < 0) Ten GoTo GPIBError End If 'Set te measurement mode msg = "MN0" + term sts = ilwrt(dev, msg, Len(msg)) If (sts < 0) Ten GoTo GPIBError End If 'Voltage range = 150V 'Current range = 5 'Measurement mode = RMS 'Set te communication output items (Default for normal measurement) 'Set te communication output delimiter (CR+LF+EOI) msg = "OFD0;DL0" + term sts = ilwrt(dev, msg, Len(msg)) If (sts < 0) Ten GoTo GPIBError End If 13-22

213 Communication Commands 1 (System of Commands before te IEEE Standard) 13.5 Sample Program (Output of Normal Measurement Data) 'Clear te RQS of status byte (Read and tras te response) Sleep 1000 sts = ilrsp(dev, spr) 'Serial Poll List1.Clear 'Read and display te numerical data (It is repeated 10 times in tis program) For cnt = 1 To 10 GoSub Readdata Next cnt List1.ddItem " ll end" List1.ListIndex = List1.ListIndex + 1 Call ibonl(dev, 0) GpibNormal = 0 Exit Function GPIBError: Call DisplayGPIBError(sts, msg) GpibNormal = 1 Exit Function Readdata: sts = ilrsp(dev, spr) If (sts < 0) Ten GoTo GPIBError End If 'Serial Poll If ((spr nd &H41) <> &H41) Ten cnt = cnt - 1 Return End If 'Read out te measurement data till END qry = "" msg = "OD" + term sts = ilwrt(dev, msg, Len(msg)) If (sts < 0) Ten GoTo GPIBError End If Do Wile qrytemp <> "END" qrytemp = Space$(200) sts = ilrd(dev, qrytemp, Len(qrytemp)) If (sts < 0) Ten GoTo GPIBError End If qrytemp = Left(qrytemp, InStr(qrytemp, term) - 2) qry = qry + qrytemp If (qrytemp <> "END") Ten qry = qry + "," End If Loop 'Extract items tat are separated by commas(,) from te received data List1.ddItem "Measurement - " + CStr(cnt) List1.ListIndex = List1.ListIndex + 1 item = 1 Do Wile qry <> "END" comma = InStr(qry, ",") If (comma = 0) Ten Exit Do Query(item) = Left(qry, comma - 1) If item < 10 Ten List1.ddItem " " + CStr(item) + " " + Query(item) Else List1.ddItem CStr(item) + " " + Query(item) End If qry = Mid(qry, comma + 1) List1.ListIndex = List1.ListIndex + 1 item = item + 1 Loop List1.ddItem "" List1.ListIndex = List1.ListIndex + 1 qrytemp = Space$(200) qry = Space$(500) Dummy = DoEvents() 13 Return End Function

214 13.5 Sample Program (Output of Normal Measurement Data) 13-24

215 Communication Commands 1 (System of Commands before te IEEE Standard) 13.6 Sample Program (Output of Harmonic Measurement Data) Sample2(GPIB) Get Harmonics Data Private Function GpibHarmonics() s Integer Dim msg s String Dim qrytemp s String Dim sts s Integer Dim cnt s Integer Dim spr s Integer term = Cr$(10) msg = Space$(100) 'terminator List1.ddItem "Now Initializing. Wait a moment." Dummy = DoEvents() sts = InitGpib If (sts <> 0) Ten GpibHarmonics = 1 Exit Function End If 'Initialize te settings msg = "RC" + term sts = ilwrt(dev, msg, Len(msg)) If (sts < 0) Ten GoTo GPIBError End If 'Set te measurement condition msg = "SI2" + term sts = ilwrt(dev, msg, Len(msg)) If (sts < 0) Ten GoTo GPIBError End If 'Set te measurement range msg = "RV7" + term sts = ilwrt(dev, msg, Len(msg)) If (sts < 0) Ten GoTo GPIBError End If msg = "R7" + term sts = ilwrt(dev, msg, Len(msg)) If (sts < 0) Ten GoTo GPIBError End If 'Initialize GPIB 'Initialize te settings 'Send Command 'Update rate = 500ms 'Voltage range = 150V 'Current range = 5 'Setting related to armonic measurement 'Object element = 1, PLL source = V1, Computation metod of THD = IEC msg = "HE1;PS1;DF0;H1" + term sts = ilwrt(dev, msg, Len(msg)) 'Send Command If (sts < 0) Ten GoTo GPIBError End If 'Set te communication output items (,Element1) msg = "OH2,1" + term sts = ilwrt(dev, msg, Len(msg)) If (sts < 0) Ten GoTo GPIBError End If 13 'Clear te RQS of status byte (Read and tras te response) Sleep 1000 sts = ilrsp(dev, spr) 'Serial Poll List1.Clear 'Read and display te armonics data (It is repeated 10 times in tis program) For cnt = 1 To 10 GoSub Readdata Next cnt List1.ddItem " ll end" List1.ListIndex = List1.ListIndex + 1 Call ibonl(dev, 0) GpibHarmonics = 0 Exit Function 13-25

216 13.6 Sample Program (Output of Harmonic Measurement Data) GPIBError: Call DisplayGPIBError(sts, msg) GpibHarmonics = 1 Exit Function Readdata: sts = ilrsp(dev, spr) If (sts < 0) Ten GoTo GPIBError End If 'Serial Poll If ((spr nd &H41) <> &H41) Ten cnt = cnt - 1 Return End If 'Read out numerical data till END msg = "OD" + term sts = ilwrt(dev, msg, Len(msg)) If (sts < 0) Ten GoTo GPIBError End If List1.ddItem "Measurement - " + CStr(cnt) List1.ListIndex = List1.ListIndex + 1 Do Wile qrytemp <> "END" qrytemp = Space$(200) sts = ilrd(dev, qrytemp, Len(qrytemp)) If (sts < 0) Ten GoTo GPIBError End If qrytemp = Left(qrytemp, InStr(qrytemp, term) - 2) If (qrytemp = "END") Ten Exit Do End If List1.ddItem qrytemp List1.ListIndex = List1.ListIndex + 1 Loop Dummy = DoEvents() qrytemp = Space$(200) List1.ddItem "" List1.ListIndex = List1.ListIndex + 1 Return End Function

217 Communication Commands 2 (System of Commands Complying to te IEEE Standard) Capter 14 Communication Commands 2 (System of Commands Complying to te IEEE Standard) 14.1 Overview of IEEE Te GP-IB interface provided wit tis instrument conforms to IEEE Tis standard requires te following 23 points be stated in tis document. Tis appendix describes tese points. 1 Subsets supported by IEEE interface functions Refer to te specifications on page Operation of device wen te device is assigned to an address oter tan one of te addresses 0 to 30 Tis instrument does not allow assignment to an address oter tan 0 to Reaction wen te user initializes address settings. Cange of te current address is acknowledged wen a new address is set using te LOCL key menu (see page 10-11). Te newly set address is valid until anoter new address is set. 4 Device setup at power ON. Commands wic can be used at power ON Basically, te previous settings (i.e. te settings wic were valid wen power was turned OFF) are valid. ll commands are available at power ON. 5 Message transmission options a Input buffer size and operation Te input buffer s capacity is 1024 bytes. b Types of queries wic return multiple response messages Refer to te examples of eac command in section c Types of queries wic generate response data during analysis of te syntax Every query generates response data wen analysis of te syntax is performed. d Types of queries wic generate response data during reception No query generates response data wen it is received by te controller. e Types of commands wic ave pairs of parameters. No suc commands. 6 List of function elements wic configure commands used for te device. ll tose wic are included in elements of composite command program eaders Refer to section 14.2 or Buffer size wic affects transmission of block data During block data transmission, te output queue is expanded according to te size. 8 List of program data elements wic can be used in equations and nesting limit Cannot be used. 9 Syntax of response data to queries Refer to te examples of eac command in section Communication between devices wic do not follow te rules regarding response data No oter modes tan conforming to IEEE are supported. 11 Size of data block of response data φ to bytes 12 List of supported common 5commands Refer to section Common Command Group. 13 Condition of device wen calibration is successfully completed *CL? is not supported. 14 Maximum lengt of block data wic can be used for definition of trigger macro wen *DDT is used *DDT is not supported. 15 Maximum lengt of macro label if macro definition is used; maximum lengt of block data wic can be used for definition of macro; processing wen recursion is used in definition of macro Macro functions are not supported. 16 Response to *IDN? Refer to section Common Command Group

218 14.1 Overview of IEEE Size of storage area for protected user data if PUD and *PUD? are used. *PUD and *PUD? are not supported. 18 Lengt of resource name if *RDT and *RDT? are used. *RDT and *RDT? are not supported. 19 Cange in status if *RST, *LRN?, *RCL, and *SV are used. *RST Refer to section Common Command Group. *LRN?, *RCL, *SV Tese commands are not supported. 20 Execution range of self-test using *TST? Refer to section Common Command Group. 21 Structure of extended return status Refer to section To find out weter eac command is performed in parallel or sequentially Refer to section , Syncronization wit te Controller, or Section Functions performed until a message indicating completion of te command is displayed Refer to te function description of eac command in Section 14.3, and to te corresponding capters. 14-2

219 Communication Commands 2 (System of Commands Complying to te IEEE Standard) 14.2 Program Format Symbols Used in Syntax Descriptions Symbols wic are used in te syntax descriptions in Section 14.3 are sown below. Tese symbols are referred to as BNF notation (Backus-Naur Form). For detailed information, refer to pages 14-7 to Symbol Description Example Example < > Defined value ELEMENT<x> <x>=1 to 3 ELEMENT3 {} One of te options in MODE {RMS VMEan DC} MODE RMS {} is selected. Exclusive OR MODE {RMS VMEan DC} MODE RMS [ ] bbreviated SCLing[:STTe] {<Boolean>}... may be repeated Messages Blocks of message data are transferred between te controller and tis instrument during communications. Messages sent from te controller to tis instrument are called program messages, and messages sent back from tis instrument to te controller are called response messages. If a program message contains a query command, i.e. a command wic requests a response, tis instrument returns a response message. single response message is always returned in reply to a program message. Program Messages s explained above, te data (message) sent from te controller to tis instrument is called a program message. Te format of a program message is sown below. ; Program message unit <PMT> <Program message unit> program message consists of one or more program message units; eac unit corresponds to one command. Tis instrument executes commands one by one according to te order in wic tey are received. Program message units are delimited by a ;. For a description of te format of te program message unit, refer to te explanation given furter below. Example :CONFIGURE:MODE RMS;FILTER ON<PMT> Unit Unit <PMT> PMT is a terminator used to terminate eac program message. Te following tree types of terminator are available. NL (New Line): Same as LF (Line Feed). SCII code 0H is used. ^END: END message defined in IEEE (EOI signal) (Te data byte sent wit an END message will be te final item of te program message unit.) NL^END: NL wit an END message attaced (NL is not included in te program message unit.)

220 14.2 Program Format Program message unit format Te format of a program message unit is sown below. <Program eader> Space, <Program data> <Program eader> program eader is used to indicate te command type. For details, refer to page <Program data> If certain conditions are required for te execution of a command, program data must be added. Program data must be separated from te eader by a space (SCII code 20H ). If multiple items of program data are included, tey must be separated by a, (comma). Example :CONFIGURE:VERGING:TYPE LINER,8<PMT> Header Data Response Messages Te data returned by tis instrument to te controller is called a response message. Te format of a response message is sown below. ; <Response message unit> <RMT> <Response message units> response message consists of one or more response message units: eac response message unit corresponds to one response. Response message units are delimited by a ;. For te response message format, refer to te next item. Example :CONFIGURE:VOLTGE:RNGE 15.0E+00;UTO 0<RMT> Unit Unit <RMT> RMT is te terminator used for every response message. Only one type of response message is available; NL^END. Response message unit format Te format of a program message unit is sown below. <Rsps. eader> Space, <Response data> <Response eader> response eader sometimes precedes te response data. Response data must be separated from te eader by a space. For details, refer to page <Response data> Response data is used to define a response. If multiple items of response data are used, tey must be separated by a, (comma). Example :500.0E-03<RMT> :CONFIGURE:MODE RMS<RMT> Data Header Data If a program message contains more tan one query, responses are made in te same order as te queries. Normally, eac query returns only one response message unit, but tere are some queries wic return more tan one response message unit. Te first response message unit always responds to te first query, but it is not always true tat te n t unit always responds to te n t query. Terefore, if you want to make sure tat a response is made to eac query, te program message must be divided up into individual messages. Points to Note concerning Message Transmission It is always possible to send a program message if te previous message wic was sent did not contain any queries. If te previous message contained a query, it is not possible to send anoter program message until a response message as been received. n error will occur if a program message is sent before a response message as been received in its entirety. response message wic as not been received will be discarded. If an attempt is made by te controller to receive a response message, even if tere it no response message, an error will occur. n error will also occur if te controller makes an attempt to receive a response message before transmission of a program message as been completed. If a program message of more tan one unit is sent and some of te units are incomplete, tis instrument receives program message units wic te instrument tinks complete and attempts to execute tem. However, tese attempts may not always be successful and a response may not always be returned, even if te program message contains queries. 14-4

221 Communication Commands 2 (System of Commands Complying to te IEEE Standard) 14.2 Program Format Dead Lock Tis instrument as a buffer memory in wic bot program and response messages of 1024 bytes or more can be stored (Te number of bytes available will vary depending on te operating state of te instrument). If bot buffer memories become full at te same time, tis instrument becomes inoperative. Tis state is called dead lock. In tis case, operation can be resumed by discarding te response message. No dead lock will occur, if te size of te program message including te PMT is kept below 1024 bytes. Furtermore, no dead lock will occur if te program message does not contain a query Commands Tere are two types of command (program eader) wic can be sent from te controller to tis instrument. Tey differ in te format of teir program eaders. Tey are Common command eader Compound eader Common Command Header Commands defined in IEEE are called common commands. Te eader format of a common command is sown below. n asterisk (*) must always be attaced to te beginning of a command. <Mnemonic>? n example of a common command *CLS Compound Header Commands designed to be used only wit tis instrument are classified and arranged in a ierarcy according to teir function. Te format of a compound eader is illustrated below. colon (:) must be used wen specifying a lower-level eader. : : <Mnemonic>? n example of a compound eader CONFIGURE:MODE RMS Note mnemonic is a caracter string made up of alpanumeric caracters. Consecutive Commands Command Group command group is a group of commands wic ave te same compound eader. command group may contain sub-groups. Example Commands relating to integration INTEGRTE? INTEGRTE:MODE INTEGRTE:TIMer INTEGRTE:STRt INTEGRTE:STOP INTEGRTE:RESet

222 14.2 Program Format Wen Consecutive Commands are in te Same Group Tis instrument stores te ierarcical level of te command wic is currently being executed, and performs analysis on te assumption tat te next command to be sent will also belong to te same level. Terefore, it is possible to omit te eader if te commands belong to te same group. Example DISPLY1: V;ELEMENT 1<PMT> Wen Consecutive Commands are in Different Groups colon (:) must be included before te eader of a command, if te command does not belong to te same group as te preceding command. Example DISPLY1: V;:SMPLE:HOLD ON<PMT> In Case of Consecutive Common Commands Common commands defined in IEEE are independent of ierarcical level. Tus, it is not necessary to add a colon (:) before a common command. Example DISPLY1: V;*CLS;ELEMENT 1<PMT> Header Interpretation Rules Tis instrument interprets te eader received according to te following rules. Mnemonics are not case sensitive. Example FUNCtion can also be written as function or Function. Te lower-case part of a eader can be omitted. Example FUNCtion can also be written as FUNCT or FUNC. If te eader ends wit a question mark, te command is a query. It is not possible to omit te question mark. Example FUNCtion? cannot be abbreviated to anyting sorter tan FUNC?. If te x at te end of a mnemonic is omitted, it is assumed to be 1. Example If ELEMent<x> is written as ELEM, tis represents ELEMent1. ny part of a command enclosed by [ ] can be omitted. Example [CONFigure]:SCLing[:STTe] ON can be written as SCL ON. However, a part enclosed by [ ] cannot be omitted if is located at te end of an upper-level query. Example SCLing? and SCLing:STTe? belong to different upper-level query levels. Wen Separating Commands by <PMT> If a terminator is used to separate two commands, eac command is a separate message. Terefore, te common eader must be typed in for eac command even wen commands of te same command group are being sent. Example DISPLY1: V<PMT>DISPLY1: ELEMENT 1<PMT> Upper-level Query n upper-level query is a compound eader to wic a question mark is appended. Execution of an upperlevel query allows all settings of one group to be output at once. Some query groups comprising more tan tree ierarcical levels can output all teir lower level settings. Example INTEGRTE?<PMT> -> INTEGRTE:MODE NORML; TIMER 0,0,0<RMT> In reply to a query, a response can be returned as a program message to tis instrument. 14-6

223 Communication Commands 2 (System of Commands Complying to te IEEE Standard) 14.2 Program Format Responses On receiving a query from te controller, tis instrument returns a response message to te controller. response message is sent in one of te following two forms. Response consisting of a eader and data If te query can be used as a program message witout any cange, a command eader is attaced to te query, wic is ten returned. Example INTEGRTE:MODE?<PMT>-> :INTEGRTE:MODE NORML<RMT> Response consisting of data only If te query cannot be used as a program message unless canges are made to it (i.e. it is a query-only command), no eader is attaced and only te data is returned. Some query-only commands can be returned after a eader is attaced to tem. Example STTUS:ERROR?<PMT> -> 0,"NO ERROR" <RMT> Wen returning a response witout a eader It is possible to remove te eader from a response consisting of a eader and data. Te COMMunicate:HEDer command is used to do tis. bbreviated form Normally, te lower-case part is removed from a response eader before te response is returned to te controller. Naturally, te full form of te eader can also be used. For tis, te COMMunicate:VERBose command is used. Te part enclosed by [ ] is also omitted in te abbreviated form Data data section comes after te eader. space must be included between te eader and te data. Te data contains conditions and values. Data is classified as below. Data Description <Decimal> Value expressed as a decimal number (Example: PT setting -> CONFigure:SCLing PT:ELEMENT1 100) <Voltage><Current> Pysical value (Example: Voltage range -> CONFigure:VOLTage:RNge 150V) <Register> Register value expressed as eiter binary, octal, decimal or exadecimal (Example: Extended event register value -> STTus:EESE #HFE) <Caracter data> Specified caracter string (mnemonic). Can be selected from { } (Example: Selecting measurement mode -> CONFigure:MODE {RMS VMEan DC}) <Boolean> Indicates ON/OFF. Set to ON, OFF or value (Example: veraging ON -> [CONFigure]:VERaging[:STTe] ON) <Caracter string data> rbitrary caracter string (Example: Timer -> INTEGrate:TIMer "1:00:00") <Block data> Data containing 8-bit arbitrary values (Example: Response of measured/computed data (binary format) -> #500012BCDEFGHIJKL) <Decimal> <Decimal> indicates a value expressed as a decimal number, as sown in te table below. Decimal values are given in te NR form specified in NSI X Data Description Example <NR1> Integer <NR2> Fixed point number <NR3> Floating point number 125.0E+0-9E-1 +.1E4 <NRf> ny of te forms <NR1> to <NR3> is allowed. Decimal values wic are sent from te controller to tis instrument can be sent in any of te forms <NR1> to <NR3>. Tis is represented by <NRf>. For response messages wic are returned from tis instrument to te controller, te form (<NR1> to <NR3> to be used) is determined by te query. Te same form is used, irrespective of weter te value is large or small. 14 In te case of <NR3>, te + after te E can be omitted, but te cannot. If a value outside te setting range is entered, te value will be normalized so tat it is just inside te range. If te value as more tan te significant number of digits, te value will be rounded. 14-7

224 14.2 Program Format <Voltage>, <Current>, <Time> <Voltage>, <Current>, and <Time> indicate decimal values wic ave pysical significance. <Multiplier> or <Unit> can be attaced to <NRf>. Tey can be entered in any of te following forms. Form Example <NRf><Multiplier><Unit> 5MV <NRf><Unit> 5E-3V <NRf><Multiplier> 5M <NRf> 5E-3 <Multiplier> Multipliers wic can be used are sown below. Symbol Word Description EX Exa PE Peta T Tera G Giga 10 9 M Mega 10 6 K Kilo 10 3 M Mili 10-3 U Micro 10-6 N Nano 10-9 P Pico F Femto <Unit> Units wic can be used are sown below. Symbol Word Description V Volt Voltage mpere Current S Second Time <Multiplier> and <Unit> are not case sensitive. U is used to indicate µ. M is used for Mega (M) to distinguis it from Mili. However, wen using M for current, Mili-ampere will be valid; terefore use M to assign Mega-ampere. If bot <Multiplier> and <Unit> are omitted, te default unit will be used. Response messages are always expressed in <NR3> form. Neiter <Multiplier> nor <Unit> is used, terefore te default unit is used. <Register> <Register> indicates an integer, and can be expressed in exadecimal, octal or binary as well as as a decimal number. <Register> is used wen eac bit of a value as a particular meaning. <Register> is expressed in one of te following forms. Form Example <NRf> 1 #H<Hexadecimal value made up of te digits 0 to 9, and to F> #H0F #Q<Octal value made up of te digits 0 to 7> #q777 #B<Binary value made up of te digits 0 and 1> #B <Caracter Data> <Caracter data> is a specified string of caracter data (a mnemonic). It is mainly used to indicate options, and is cosen from te caracter strings given in { }. For interpretation rules, refer to Header Interpretation Rules on page Form {RMS VMEan DC} Example RMS s wit a eader, te COMMunicate:VERBose command can be used to return a response message in its full form. lternatively, te abbreviated form can be used. Te COMMunicate:HEDer command does not affect <caracter data>. <Boolean> <Boolean> is data wic indicates ON or OFF, and is expressed in one of te following forms. Form Example {ON OFF <NRf>} ON OFF 1 0 Wen <Boolean> is expressed in <NRf> form, OFF is selected if te rounded integer value is 0 and ON is selected if te rounded integer is Not 0. response message is always 1 if te value is ON and 0 if it is OFF. <Caracter String Data> <Caracter string data> is not a specified caracter string like <Caracter data>. It is an arbitrary caracter string. caracter string must be enclosed in single quotation marks (') or double quotation marks ("). Form <Caracter string data> Example 'BC' "IEEE " If te caracter string enclosed in single quotation marks contains a double quotation mark ("), it is represented as (""). Tis rule also applies to double quotation marks ("). Te caracter string data of a response message is always enclosed in double quotation marks ("). Because <Caracter string data> is an arbitrary caracter string, if te last single quotation mark (') or double quotation mark (") is missing, te instrument may assume tat te remaining program message units are part of te <Caracter string data> and may not detect te error. <Register> is not case sensitive. Response messages are always expressed as <NR1>. 14-8

225 Communication Commands 2 (System of Commands Complying to te IEEE Standard) 14.2 Program Format <Block data> <Block data> is arbitra 8-bit data. <Block data> is only used for response messages. Response messages are expressed in te following form. Form Example #N<N-digit decimal value><data byte string> #500012BCDEFGHIJKL #N Indiates tat te data is <Block data>. N is an SCII caracter string number (digits) wic indicates te number of data bytes tat follow. <N-digits decimal value> Indicates tat number of bytes of data. (Example: = 12bytes) Syncronization wit te Controller Tere are two kinds of command; overlap commands and sequential commands. Execution of an overlap command may start before execution of te previously sent command is completed. For example, if te next program message is transmitted after te measurement range as been canged and an query is made about te measurement data, it may occur tat regardless weter te measurement data ave been updated, MESure[:NORMal]:VLue? will be executed. Te display becomes (no data) and 9.91E+37 (Not a number) will be output. <Data byte string> Te actual data. (Example: BCDEFGHIJKL) Data is comprised of 8-bit values (0 to 255). Tis means tat te SCII code 0H, wic stands for NL, can also be a code used for data. Hence, care must be taken wen programming te controller. [CONFigure:]VOLTage:RNGe 60V;: MESure[:NORMal:VLue?<PMT> In tis case, syncronization wit te time at wic te update of measurement data is completed must be accomplised, as sown next. Using STTus:CONDition? query STTus:CONDition? query is used to make an inquiry about te contents of te condition register (section 14.4). It is possible to judge weter updating measurement data is in progress or not by reading bit 0 of te condition register. Bit 0 is 1 if updating is in progress, and 0 if updating is stopped. Using te extended event register Canges in te condition register are reflected in te extended event register (section 14.4). Example STTus:FILTer1 FLL;:STTus:EESE 1; EESR?;*SRE 8;[:CONFigure]:VOLTage: RNGe 60V<PMT> (Service request is awaited.) MESure[:NORMal]:VLue?<PMT> STTus:FILTer1 FLL indicates tat te transit filter is set so tat bit 0 is set to 1 wen bit 0 (FILTer1) of te condition register is canged from 1 to 0. STTus:EESE 1 is a command used only to reflect te status of bit 0 of te extended event register in te status byte. STTus:EESR? is used to clear te extended event register. Te *SRE 8 command is used to generate a service request caused solely by te extended event register. MESure[:NORMal]:VLue? will not be executed until a service request is generated

226 14.2 Program Format Using te COMMunicate:WIT command Te COMMunicate:WIT command alts communications until a specific event is generated. Example STTus:FILTer1 FLL;:STTus:EESR?; [:CONFigure]:VOLTage: RNGe 60V<PMT> (Response to STTus:EESR? is decoded.) COMMunicate:WIT 1;: MESure[:NORMal]:VLue?<PMT> For a description of STTus:FILTer1 FLL and STTus:EESR?, refer to Using te extended event register on tis page. COMMunicate:WIT 1 means tat communications is alted until bit 0 of te extended event register is set to 1. MESure[:NORMal]:VLue? will not be executed until bit 0 of te extended event register is set to

227 Communication Commands 2 (System of Commands Complying to te IEEE Standard) 14.3 Commands Command List Command Description Page OUTput Group :OUTput? Queries all settings related to D/ output :OUTput:CHNnel<x> Sets/queries te D/ output item :OUTput:IRTime Sets/queries te preset integration time for D/ output of integrated values :OUTput:PRESet Sets te default value as D/ output items COMMunicateG roup :COMMunicate? Queries all settings related to communication :COMMunicate:HEDer Sets/queries weter a eader is to be added :COMMunicate:LOCKout Sets/cancels local lockout :COMMunicate:REMote Sets remote/local condition :COMMunicate:STTus? Queries te status of a specified circuit :COMMunicate:VERBose Sets/queries te response to be in full or abbreviated form :COMMunicate:WIT Waits until one of te specified extended event occurs :COMMunicate:WIT? Generates a response wen on of te specified extended events occurs CONFigure Group :CONFigure? Queries all settings related to te measurement conditions [:CONFigure]:VERaging? Queries all settings related to te averaging function [:CONFigure]:VERaging[:STTe] Sets/queries averaging ON/OFF [:CONFigure]:VERaging:TYPE Sets/queries averaging type and coefficient [:CONFigure]:CFCtor Sets te crest factor or queries te current setting [:CONFigure]:CURRent? Queries all settings related to te current range [:CONFigure]:CURRent:UTO Sets/queries te current auto range ON/OFF [:CONFigure]:CURRent:ESCaling? Queries all settings related to te external sensor [:CONFigure]:CURRent:ESCaling[:LL] Sets te scaling constants for te external sensor for all elements at once [:CONFigure]:CURRent:ESCaling:ELEMent<x> Sets/queries te scaling constants for te external sensor for eac element [:CONFigure]:CURRent:RNGe Sets/queries te current range [:CONFigure]:FILTer Sets/queries te frequency filter ON/OFF [:CONFigure]:LFILter Sets/queries te line filter ON/OFF [:CONFigure]:MHold[:STTe] Sets/queries te MX old ON/OFF [:CONFigure]:MODE Sets/queries te measurement mode [:CONFigure]:SCLing? Queries all settings related to te scaling function [:CONFigure]:SCLing:{PT CT SFCtor}? Queries all settings related to scaling constants for {voltage current power} [:CONFigure]:SCLing:{PT CT SFCtor}[:LL] Sets te scaling constants for all elements of {voltage current power} [:CONFigure]:SCLing:{PT CT SFCtor}:ELEMent<x> Sets te scaling values for eac element of {voltage current power} [:CONFigure]:SCLing[:STTe] Sets/queries te scaling function ON/OFF [:CONFigure]:SYNCronize Sets/queries te measurement syncronization source [:CONFigure]:VOLTage? Queries all settings related to te voltage range [:CONFigure]:VOLTage:UTO Sets/queries te voltage auto range ON/OFF [:CONFigure]:VOLTage:RNGe Sets/queries te voltage range [:CONFigure]:WIRing Sets/queries te wiring metod

228 14.3 Commands Command Description Page DISPlay Group :DISPlay<x>? Queries all te display settings :DISPlay<x>:ELEMent Sets/queries te element to be displayed :DISPlay<x>:FUNCtion Sets/queries te function to be displayed :DISPlay<x>:MODE Sets/queries te contents of te display :DISPlay<x>:RESolution Sets/queries te number of display digits HRMonics Group :HRMonics? Queries all settings related to armonic measurement :HRMonics:DISPlay? Queries all settings related to te display in case of armonic measurement :HRMonics:DISPlay:ORDer Sets/queries te order of te armonic component to be sown on display B :HRMonics:ELEMent Sets/queries te element for armonic measurement :HRMonics[:STTe] Sets/queries te armonic measurement mode ON/OFF :HRMonics:SYNCronize Sets/queries te input to be used as PLL source :HRMonics:THD Sets/queries te computation metod for armonic distortion INTEGrate Group :INTEGrate? Queries all settings related to integration :INTEGrate:MODE Sets/queries te integration mode :INTEGrate:RESet Resets te integration values :INTEGrate:STRt Starts integration :INTEGrate:STOP Stops integration :INTEGrate:TIMer Sets/queries te integration timer MTH Group :MTH? Queries all settings related to te computing function :MTH:RITmetic Sets/queries te computing equation of te four aritmetic operations :MTH:VERage Sets/queries te average active power computation during integration :MTH:CFCtor Sets/queries te computing equation of te crest factor :MTH:TYPE Sets/queries te computing equation MESure Group :MESure? Queries all settings related to measurement/computation data :MESure:HRMonics? Queries all settings related to armonic measurement data :MESure:HRMonics:ITEM? Queries all settings related to te output items of armonic measurement data :MESure:HRMonics:BINary? Queries armonic measurement data set by commands oter tan MESure:HRMonics:ITEM (binary format) :MESure:HRMonics:ITEM:PRESet Sets te ON/OFF pattern for all communication outputs of te armonic measurement function :MESure:HRMonics:ITEM:{SYNCronize <armonic measurement function>} Sets/queries te communication output item of armonic measurement ON/OFF :MESure:HRMonics:VLue? Queries armonic measurement data set by commands oter tan MESure:HRMonics:ITEM (SCII format) :MESure:HEDer Turns ON/OFF te additional information output wen outputting measured/computed data in binary format :MESure:NORMal? Queries all settings related to normal measured/computed data :MESure[:NORMal]:BINary? Queries normal measurement data set by commands oter tan MESure[:NORMal]:ITEM (binary format) :MESure[:NORMal]:ITEM? Queries all settings related to te output items of normal measured/computed data :MESure[:NORMal]:ITEM:PRESet Sets te ON/OFF pattern for all communication outputs of te normal measurement function

229 Communication Commands 2 (System of Commands Complying to te IEEE Standard) 14.3 Commands Command Description Page :MESure[:NORMal]:ITEM:{TIME MTH} Sets/queries te ON/OFF state of te communication output of {integration time MTH} :MESure[:NORMal]:ITEM:<normal measurement function>? Queries communication output settings of te normal measurement function :MESure[:NORMal]:ITEM:<normal measurement function>[:ll] Sets te communication output items concerning all elements or S ON/ OFF at once :MESure[:NORMal]:ITEM:<normal measurement function>:element<x> Sets/queries te communication output items concerning eac element ON/OFF :MESure[:NORMal]:ITEM:<normal measurement function>:sigma Sets/queries te communication output items concerning S ON/OFF :MESure[:NORMal]:VLue? Queries normal measured/computed data set by commands oter tan MESure[:NORMal]:ITEM (SCII format) RECall Group :RECall? Queries all settings related to recalling data :RECall:INTerval Sets/queries te recalling interval :RECall:PNel Retrieves te setup parameters file :RECall[:STTe] Sets/queries recalling ON/OFF RELay Group :RELay? Queries all settings related to te comparator function :RELay:DISPlay Sets/queries te comparator display OFF, or in case of ON, te cannel to be displayed :RELay:HCHannel<x>? Queries all settings related to relay output items in case of armonic measurement :RELay:HCHannel<x>:FUNCtion Sets/queries function of te relay output item in case of armonic measurement :RELay:HCHannel<x>:THResold Sets/queries te tresold level for te relay output item :RELay:MODE Sets/queries te mode of te comparator function :RELay:NCHannel<x>? Queries all settings related to te relay output items in case of normal measurement :RELay:NCHannel<x>:FUNCtion Sets/queries te function of te relay output in case of normal measurement :RELay:NCHannel<x>:THResold Sets/queries te tresold level for te relay output item :RELay[:STTe] Sets/queries te comparator function ON/OFF SMPle Group :SMPle? Queries all settings related to sampling :SMPle:HOLD Sets/queries to old te output of data (display, communication) :SMPle:RTE Sets te display update rate or queries te current setting STTus Group :STTus? Queries all settings related to te status of communication :STTus:CONDition? Queries te contents of te condition filter :STTus:EESE Sets/queries te extended event register :STTus:EESR? Queries te contents of te extended event register and clears it :STTus:ERRor? Queries te occurred error code and message :STTus:FILTer<x> Sets/queries te transit filter :STTus:QMESsage Sets/queries weter or not to apply te corresponding message to te query STTus:ERRor? :STTus:SPOLl?(Serial Poll) Executes serial polling

230 14.3 Commands Command Description Page STORe Group :STORe? Queries all settings related to storing data :STORe:INTerval Sets/queries te interval for storing data :STORe:PNel Saves te setup parameters to a file :STORe[:STTe] Sets/queries te store function ON/OFF Common Command Group *CL? Executes zero-level compensation and queries te results *CLS Clears te standard event register, extended event register and error queue *ESE Sets/queries te value of te standard event enable register *ESR? Sets/queries te value of te standard event register and clears it *IDN? Queries te instrument model *OPC Tis command is not supported by tis instrument *OPC? Tis command is not supported by tis instrument, and is always *OPT? Queries installed options *PSC Sets/queries weter or not to clear some registers at power ON *RST Initializes te setup parameters *SRE Sets/queries te value of te service request enable register *STB? Queries te value of te status byte register *TRG Executes te same operation as te TRIG(SHIFT+HOLD) key *TST? Executes a self-test and queries te results *WI Tis command is not supported by tis instrument

231 Communication Commands 2 (System of Commands Complying to te IEEE Standard) 14.3 Commands OUTput Group Te commands in te OUTput group are used to make settings relating to, and inquires about D/ output (option). Tis allows you to make te same settings and inquiries as can be set using te lower menus of [OUTPUT]- d or [INTEG SET]- dtime. ; :OUTput : PRESet <Space> NORMal INTEGrate CHNnel <x> <Space> <Normal measurement>, <NRf> ELEMent <x> SIGMa OFF? IRTime <Space> <NRf>, <NRf> <Caracter string>?? OUTput? Function Queries all te settings relating to D/ output. Description If <normal measurement function> is set to MTH, te element setting is void. You can omit it. Syntax OUTput? OUTput:IRTime Example OUTPUT? -> :OUTPUT:CHNNEL1 V,1; Function Sets te preset integration time for D/ output of CHNNEL2 V,2;CHNNEL3 V,3;CHNNEL4 V, integrated values, or queries te current setting. SIGM;CHNNEL5,1;CHNNEL6,2; Syntax OUTput:IRTime CHNNEL7,3;CHNNEL8,SIGM; {<NRf>,<NRf>,<NRf> <String>} CHNNEL9 W,1;CHNNEL10 W,2; {<NRf>,<NRf>,<NRf>}=0,0,0 to CHNNEL11 W,3;CHNNEL12 W,SIGM;: 10000,0,0 OUTPUT:IRTIME 1,0 {<String>}=HHHHH:MM:SS HHHHH ours MM OUTput:CHNnel<x> minutes SS seconds Function Sets te D/ output item, or queries te current setting. Example OUTPUT:IRTIME 1,0,0 OUTPUT:IRTIME "1:00:00" Syntax OUTput:CHNnel<x> {<normal measurement function>,(<nrf> OUTPUT:IRTIME? -> :OUTPUT:IRTIME 1,0,0 ELEMent<1-3> SIGMa) OFF} OUTput:PRESet <x>= 1 to 12(in case of /D12) Function Initializes te output items for D/ output. 1 to 4 (in case of /D4 or /CMP) Syntax OUTput:PREset {NORMal INTEGrate} <normal measurement function>={v W NORMal = default for normal V VR PF DEGRee VHZ HZ WH WHP WHM measurement H HP HM MTH VPK PK} INTEGrate = default for integration Example OUTPUT:CHNNEL1 V,1 Example OUTPUT:PRESET NORML OUTPUT:CHNNEL1? -> :OUTPUT: Description Refer to section 9.3 for a description of default CHNNEL1 V,1 D/ output items for normal measurement and OUTPUT:CHNNEL2? -> :OUTPUT: integration. CHNNEL2 OFF Note In te following pages, te alpanumeric caracter strings used in te descriptions of te <normal measurement function> or te <armonic measurement function> indicates te following data. <Normal measurement function> V: voltage, : current, W: effective power, V: apparent power, VR: reactive power, PF: power factor, DEGRee: pase angle, VHZ: voltage frequency, HZ: current frequency, WH: watt our, WHP: positive watt our, WHM: negative watt our, H: current our, HP: positive current our, HM: negative current our, MTH: MTH computation result, VPK: peak voltage, PK: peak current <Harmonic measurement function> See page Oter TIME: elapsed integration time, ORDer: armonic order

232 14.3 Commands COMMunicate Group Te commands in te COMMunicate group are used to make settings relating to, and inquires about communications. Tere is no front panel key for tis function. ; :COMMunicate : HEDer <Space> OFF ON <NRf>? VERBose <Space> OFF ON <NRf>? WIT <Space> <Register>? REMote <Space> OFF ON <NRf>? LOCKout <Space> OFF ON <NRf>? STTus?? COMMunicate? COMMunicate:REMote Function Queries all te communication settings. Function Sets remote (ON) or local mode (OFF). Syntax COMMunicate? Syntax COMMunicate:REMote {<Boolean>} Example COMMUNICTE? -> :COMMUNICTE:HEDER 1;VERBOSE 1 Example COMMunicate:HEDer Function Determines weter a eader is to be added (for example: CONFIGURE:VOLTGE:RNGE 150.0E+00 ) or not (for example:150.0e+00) wen sending a response to a query, or queries te current setting. Syntax COMMunicate:HEDer {<Boolean>} COMMunicate:HEDer? Example COMMUNICTE:HEDER ON COMMUNICTE:HEDER? -> :COMMUNICTE:HEDER 1 COMMunicate:LOCKout Function Sets local lockout ON or OFF. Syntax COMMunicate:LOCKout {<Boolean>} COMMunicate:LOCKout? Example COMMUNICTE:LOCKOUT ON COMMUNICTE:LOCKOUT? -> :COMMUNICTE:LOCKOUT 1 Description Tis command is used for te serial interface. COMMunicate:REMote? COMMUNICTE:REMOTE ON COMMUNICTE:REMOTE? -> :COMMUNICTE:REMOTE 1 Description Tis command is used for te serial interface. n interface message is available for te GP-IB interface. COMMunicate:STTus? Function Queries te status of a specified circuit. Syntax COMMunicate:STTus? Example COMMUNICTE:STTUS? -> :COMMUNICTE:STTUS 0 Description Te status condition for eac bit is as follows. bit GP-IB Serial 0 permanent Parity error comm. error 1 always 0 framing error 2 always 0 break caracter occurrence 3 and up always 0 always 0 Wen a status occurs wic results in canging of te bits, reading it will clear te error. n interface message is available for te GP-IB interface

233 Communication Commands 2 (System of Commands Complying to te IEEE Standard) 14.3 Commands COMMunicate:VERBose Function Determines weter a response to a query is to be returned in full form (for example: CONFIGURE: VOLTGE:RNGE 150.0E+00), or in abbreviated form (for example: VOLT:RNG 150.0E+00), or queries te current setting. Syntax COMMunicate:VERBose {<Boolean>} COMMunicate:VERBose? Example COMMUNICTE:VERBOSE ON COMMUNICTE:VERBOSE? -> :COMMUNICTE:VERBOSE 1 COMMunicate:WIT Function Waits until one of te specified extended event occurs. Syntax COMMunicate:WIT <Register> <Register>= 0 to (For a description of te extended event register, refer to page ) Example COMMUNICTE:WIT Description For a description of syncronization using COMMunicate:WIT, refer to page COMMunicate:WIT? Function Generates a response wen one of te specified extended events occurs. Syntax COMMunicate:WIT? <Register> <Register>= 0 to (For a description of te extended event register, refer to page ) Example COMMUNICTE:WIT? >

234 14.3 Commands CONFigure Group Te CONFigure group relates to te measurement settings. Te same function can be performed using te WIRING key, VOLTGE key, CURRENT key, MODE (SHIFT + VOLTGE) key and SETUP key (except for PnLrSt, u.rte ) on te front panel. Te external sensor input range and external sensor scaling values are only vald if equipped wit te external sensor option (/EX1 or /EX2). ; :CONFigure : WIRing <Space> P1W3 P3W3 P3W4 V33? MODE <Space> RMS VMEan DC? ; VOLT age : RNGe <Space> <Voltage>? UTO <Space> OFF ON <NRf>?? ; CURRent : RNGe <Space> <Current> EXTernal, <Voltage>? UTO <Space> OFF ON <NRf>? ; ESCaling : LL <Space> <NRf> ELEMent <x> <Space> <NRf>?? FILTer <Space> OFF? ON <NRf>? LFILter <Space> OFF ON <NRf>? ; SCLing : STT e <Space> OFF ON <NRf>? ; PT : LL <Space> <NRf> CT SFCtor ELEMent <x> <Space> <NRf>??? ; MHOLd : STT e <Space> OFF ON <NRf>?? 14-18

235 Communication Commands 2 (System of Commands Complying to te IEEE Standard) 14.3 Commands SYNCronize <Space> VOLTage CURRent OFF? CFCtor <Space> <NRf>? ; VERaging : STT e <Space> OFF ON <NRf>? TYPE <Space> LINear, <NRf> EXPonent??? CONFigure? Function Syntax Example Queries all te settings related to te measurement conditions. CONFigure? CONFIGURE? -> :CONFIGURE:WIRING P1W3; MODE RMS;VOLTGE:RNGE 600.0E+00; UTO 1;:CONFIGURE:CURRENT: RNGE 20.0E+00;UTO 1;ESCLING: ELEMENT E+00; ELEMENT E+00; ELEMENT E+00;:CONFIGURE: FILTER 0;LFILTER 0;SCLING: STTE 0;PT: ELEMENT E+00; ELEMENT E+00; ELEMENT E+00; :CONFIGURE:SCLING: CT:ELEMENT E+00; ELEMENT E+00; ELEMENT E+00; :CONFIGURE:SCLING: SFCTOR:ELEMENT E+00; ELEMENT E+00; ELEMENT E+00;:CONFIGURE: VERGING:STTE 0; TYPE LINER,8;:CONFIGURE: SYNCHRONIZE CURRENT;MHOLD:STTE 0 [CONFigure]:VERaging? Function Queries all te setting values related to te averaging function. Syntax [CONFigure]:VERaging? Example [CONFIGURE]:VERGING? -> :CONFIGURE: VERGING:STTE 0;TYPE LINER,8 [CONFigure]:VERaging[:STTe] Function Sets averaging ON/OFF, or queries te current status. Syntax [CONFigure]:VERaging[: STTe] {<Boolean>} [CONFigure]:VERaging:STTe? Example [CONFIGURE]:VERGING:STTE OFF [CONFIGURE]:VERGING:STTE? -> :CONFIGURE:VERGING:STTE 0 [CONFigure]:VERaging:TYPE Function Sets te averaging type and coefficient, queries te current setting. Syntax [CONFigure]:VERaging:TYPE {(LINear EXPonent),<NRf>} [CONFigure]:VERaging:TYPE? {<NRf>}=8, 16, 32, 64 (averaging coefficient) Example [CONFIGURE]:VERGING:TYPE LINER,8 [CONFIGURE]:VERGING:TYPE? -> :CONFIGURE:VERGING:TYPE LINER,8 [CONFigure]:CFCtor? Function Sets te crest factor or queries te current setting. Syntax [CONFigure]:CFCtor {<NRf>} [CONFigure]:CFCtor? {<NRf>} = 3, 6 Example [CONFIGURE]:CFCTOR 3 [CONFIGURE]:CFCTOR? -> :CONFIGURE:CFCTOR 3 [CONFigure]:CURRent? Function Queries all setting values relating to te current range (external sensor range) Syntax [CONFigure]:CURRent? Example [CONFIGURE]:CURRENT? -> :CONFIGURE: CURRENT:RNGE 20.0E+00;UTO 1; ESCLING:ELEMENT E+00; ELEMENT E+00;ELEMENT E+00 [CONFigure]:CURRent:UTO Function Sets te current auto range ON/OFF, or queries te current setting. Syntax [CONFigure]:CURRent:UTO {<Boolean>} [CONFigure]:CURRent:UTO? Example [CONFIGURE]:CURRENT:UTO ON [CONFIGURE]:CURRENT:UTO? -> :CONFIGURE:CURRENT:UTO

236 14.3 Commands [CONFigure]:CURRent:ESCaling? Function Queries all scaling constants for te external sensor. Syntax [CONFigure]:CURRent:ESCaling? Example [CONFIGURE]:CURRENT:ESCLING? -> :CONFIGURE:CURRENT:ESCLING: ELEMENT E+00; ELEMENT E+00; ELEMENT E+00 [CONFigure]:CURRent:ESCaling[:LL] Function Sets te scaling constants for te external sensor for all elements at once. Syntax [CONFigure]:CURRent:ESCaling[: LL] {<NRf>} {<NRf>}= to 9999 Example [CONFIGURE]:CURRENT:ESCLING: LL Description Te setting values differ as follows. Less tan : Tree digits after te floatingpoint are valid to 9999 : Te first five digits are valid. [CONFigure]:CURRent:ESCaling:ELEMent<x> Function Sets te scaling constants for te external sensor for eac element separately, queries te current setting. Syntax [CONFigure]:CURRent:ESCaling: ELEMent<x> {<NRf>} [CONFigure]:CURRent:ESCaling: ELEMent<x>? <x>= 1 (WT210 single-pase model) 1, 3 (WT230 tree-pase, tree-wire model) 1 to 3 (WT230 tree-pase, four-wire model) {<NRf>}=0.001 to 1000 Example [CONFIGURE]:CURRENT:ESCLING: ELEMENT [CONFIGURE]:CURRENT: ESCLING:ELEMENT1? -> :CONFIGURE: CURRENT:ESCLING:ELEMENT E+00 Description Setting values differ as described at [CONFigure]: CURRent:ESCaling[:LL]. [CONFigure]:CURRent:RNGe Function Sets te current range (external sensor input range), queries te current setting. Syntax [CONFigure]:CURRent:RNGe {<current> (EXTernal,<voltage>)} [CONFigure]:CURRent:RNGe? Wen te crest factor is set to 3 <current> =500m to 20 (0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10, 20) Te following settings available only on WT210. 5m to 200m (5m, 10m, 20m, 50m, 100m, 200m) <voltage> =50mV to 200mV (50, 100, 200mV, for /EX2 option) =2.5V to 10V (2.5, 5, 10V, for /EX1 option) Wen te crest factor is set to 6 <Current> = 250 m to 10 (0.25, 0.5, 1, 2.5, 5, or 10 ) Te following settings available only on WT m to 100 m (2.5 m, 5 m, 10 m, 25 m, 50 m, or 100 m) <Voltage> = 25 mv to 100 mv (25, 50, 100 mv, for /EX2 option) = 1.25 V to 5 V (1.25, 2.5, 5 V, for /EX1 option) Example Setting of current range/query [CONFIGURE]:CURRENT:RNGE 20 [CONFIGURE]:CURRENT:RNGE? -> :CONFIGURE:CURRENT:RNGE 20.0E+00 Setting of external sensor input range/query (in case of /EX2 option) [CONFIGURE]:CURRENT:RNGE EXTERNL, 50MV [CONFIGURE]:CURRENT:RNGE? -> :CONFIGURE:CURRENT:RNGE EXTERNL, 50.0E-03 [CONFigure]:FILTer Function Sets te frequency filter ON/OFF, queries te current setting. Syntax [CONFigure]:FILTer {<Boolean>} [CONFigure]:FILTer? Example [CONFIGURE]:FILTER OFF[CONFIGURE]: FILTER? -> :CONFIGURE:FILTER 0 [CONFigure]:LFILter Function Sets te line filter ON/OFF queries te current setting. Syntax [CONFigure]:LFILter {<Boolean>} [CONFigure]:LFILter? Example [CONFIGURE]:LFILTER OFF [CONFIGURE]:LFILTER? -> :CONFIGURE:LFILTER 0 [CONFigure]:MHOLd[:STTe] Function Sets te MX old ON/OFF, queries te current setting. Syntax [CONFigure]:MHold[ :STTe] {<Boolean>} [CONFigure]:MHold[:STTe]? Example [CONFIGURE]:MHOLD:STTE OFF [CONFIGURE]:MHOLD:STTE? -> :CONFIGURE:MHOLD:STTE

237 Communication Commands 2 (System of Commands Complying to te IEEE Standard) [CONFigure]:MODE Function Syntax Example Sets te measurement mode of current and voltage, queries te current setting. [CONFigure]:MODE {RMS VMEan DC} [CONFigure]:MODE? [CONFIGURE]:MODE RMS [CONFIGURE]:MODE? -> :CONFIGURE: MODE RMS [CONFigure]:SCLing? Function Queries all settings relating to te scaling function. Syntax [CONFigure]:SCLing? Example [CONFIGURE]:SCLING? -> :CONFIGURE: SCLING:STTE 0;PT: ELEMENT E+00; ELEMENT E+00; ELEMENT E+00; :CONFIGURE:SCLING:CT: ELEMENT E+00; ELEMENT E+00; ELEMENT E+00;:CONFIGURE: SCLING:SFCTOR:ELEMENT E+00; ELEMENT E+00; ELEMENT E+00 [CONFigure]:SCLing:{PT CT SFCtor}? Function Queries all scaling constants related to {voltage current power}. Syntax [CONFigure]:SCLing: {PT CT SFCtor}? Example [CONFIGURE]:SCLING:PT?-> :CONFIGURE:SCLING:PT: ELEMENT E+00; ELEMENT E+00; ELEMENT E+00 [CONFigure]:SCLing:{PT CT SFCtor}[:LL] Function Sets te scaling constants for all elements of {voltage current power} at once. Syntax [CONFigure]:SCLing:{PT CT SFCtor}[:LL] {<NRf>} {<NRf>}=0.001 to 9999 Example [CONFIGURE]:SCLING:PT:LL Description Te setting values are rounded as follows. Less tan : Tree digits after te decimal point are valid to 9999 : Te first five digits are valid Commands 1, 3 (WT230 tree-pase, tree-wire model) 1 to 3 (WT230 tree-pase, four-wire model) {<NRf>}=0.001 to 9999 Example [CONFIGURE]:SCLING:PT: ELEMENT [CONFIGURE]:SCLING:PT:ELEMENT1? -> :CONFIGURE:SCLING:PT: ELEMENT E+00 Description Te setting values are rounded as described at [CONFigure]:SCLing:{PT CT SFCtor}[:LL] [CONFigure]:SCLing[:STTe] Function Sets scaling ON/OFF, queries te current setting. Syntax [CONFigure]:SCLing[: STTe] {<Boolean>} [CONFigure]:SCLing:STTe? Example [CONFIGURE]:SCLING:STTE OFF [CONFIGURE]:SCLING:STTE? -> :CONFIGURE:SCLING:STTE 0 [CONFigure]:SYNCronize? Function Sets te measurement syncronization source/ queries te current setting. Syntax [CONFigure]:SYNCronize {VOLTage CURRent OFF} [CONFigure]:SYNCronize? Example [CONFIGURE]:SYNCHRONIZE VOLTGE? [CONFIGURE]:SYNCHRONIZE? -> :CONFIGURE:SYNCHRONIZE VOLTGE [CONFigure]:VOLTage? Function Queries all settings relating to voltage range. Syntax [CONFigure]:VOLTage? Example [CONFIGURE]:VOLTGE? -> :CONFIGURE: VOLTGE:RNGE 600.0E+00;UTO 1 [CONFigure]:VOLTage:UTO Function Sets te voltage auto range ON/OFF, queries te current setting. Syntax [CONFigure]:VOLTage:UTO {<Boolean>} [CONFigure]:VOLTage:UTO? Example [CONFigure]:VOLTage:UTO ON [CONFIGURE]:VOLTGE:UTO? -> :CONFIGURE:VOLTGE:UTO 1 14 [CONFigure]:SCLing:{PT CT SFCtor}: ELEMent<x> Function Sets te scaling constant for {voltage current power} of eac element, queries te current setting. Syntax [CONFigure]:SCLing:{PT CT SFCtor}:ELEMent<x> {<NRf>} [CONFigure]:SCLing:{PT CT SFCtor}: ELEMent<x>? <x>= 1 (WT210 single-pase model) [CONFigure]:VOLTage:RNGe Function Sets te voltage range/queries te current setting. Syntax [CONFigure]:VOLTage:RNGe {<voltage>} [CONFigure]:VOLTage:RNGe? Wen te crest factor is set to 3 <voltage>=15v to 600V (15, 30, 60, 150, 300, 600V) Wen te crest factor is set to 6 <Voltage> = 7.5 V to 300 V (7.5, 15, 30, 75, 150, or 300) 14-21

238 14.3 Commands Example [CONFIGURE]:VOLTGE:RNGE 600V [CONFIGURE]:VOLTGE:RNGE? -> :CONFIGURE:VOLTGE:RNGE 600.0E+00 [CONFigure]:WIRing Function Sets te wiring metod/queries te current setting. Syntax [CONFigure]:WIRing {P1W2 P1W3 P3W3 P3W4 V33} [CONFigure]:WIRing? Example [CONFIGURE]:WIRING P1W3 [CONFIGURE]:WIRING? -> :CONFIGURE:WIRING P1W3 Description Te selections stand for te following. P1W3: Single-pase, tree-wires (only for WT230) P3W3: Tree-pase, tree-wires (only for WT230) P3W4: Tree-pase, four-wires (only for WT230 3-pase, 4-wire model) V33: Tree-voltage, tree-current (only for WT230 3-pase, 4-wire model) DISPlay Group Te commands in te DISPlay group are used to make settings relating to, and inquiries about display. Tis allows you to make te same settings and queries as wen using te key or ELEMENT key on te front panel. ; :DISPlay <x> : MODE <Space> VLue RNGe ESCaling? FUNCtion <Space> <Display function>? ELEMent <Space> <NRf> SIGMa RESolution <Space> HIGH??? LOW DISPlay<x>? Function Queries all te display settings. Syntax DISPlay<x>? <x>= 1 to 3 1:Display 2:Display B 3:Display C Example DISPlay1? -> :DISPLY1:MODE VLUE; V;ELEMENT 1;RESOLUTION HIGH DISPlay<x>:ELEMent Function Sets te element to be displayed/queries te current setting. Syntax DISPlay<x>:ELEMent {<NRf> SIGMa} DISPlay<x>:ELEMent? <x>= 1 to 3 1:Display 2:Display B 3:Display C {<NRf>}=1 (WT210 single-pase model) 1, 3 (WT230 tree-pase, tree-wire model) 1 to 3 (WT230 tree-pase, four-wire model) Example DISPLY1:ELEMENT 1 DISPLY1:ELEMENT? -> :DISPLY1: ELEMENT

239 Communication Commands 2 (System of Commands Complying to te IEEE Standard) 14.3 Commands DISPlay<x>:FUNCtion Function Sets te function to be displayed/queries te current setting. Syntax DISPlay<x>:FUNCtion {<display function>} DISPlay<x>:FUNCtion? <x>= 1 to 3 1:Display 2:Display B 3:Display C In case of normal measurement: <display function>={v W V VR PF DEGRee VHZ HZ WH WHP WHM H HP HM MTH VPK PK TIME} In case of armonic measurement: <display function>={v W PF VHZ HZ VTHD THD VCON CON WCON VDEG DEG ORDer} Example DISPLY1: V DISPLY1:? -> :DISPLY1: V Description For te meanings of te symbols of functions, see Note on page DISPlay<x>:RESolution Function Sets te number of displayed digits/queries te current setting. Syntax DISPlay<x>:RESolution {HIGH Low} DISPlay<x>:RESolution? <x>= 1 to 3 1:Display 2:Display B 3:Display C Example DISPLY1:RESOLUTION LOW DISPLY1:RESOLUTION? -> :DISPLY1: RESOLUTION LOW Description <x> will be ignored. Te contents of all te displays to C will be received. DISPlay<x>:MODE Function Sets te contents of te display/queries te current setting. Syntax DISPlay<x>:MODE {VLue RNGe ESCaling} DISPlay<x>:MODE? <x>= 1 to 3 1:Display 2:Display B 3:Display C VLue: displays measurement data RNGe: displays te present range of voltage and current, or te scaling values of te external sensor of element 1. ESCaling: displays te scaling values of te current external sensor Example DISPLY1:MODE VLUE DISPLY1:MODE? -> :DISPLY1: MODE VLUE Description <x> will be ignored. Te contents of all te displays to C will be received

240 14.3 Commands HRMonics Group Te commands in te HRMonics group relate to te armonic measurement function. Tis allow you to make te same settings and inquiries as wen using te HRMONICS key on te front panel and te corresponding menus. Tis group is only useful in case your instrument is equipped wit te /HRM option. ; :HRMonics : STT e <Space> OFF ON <NRf>? ELEMent <Space> <NRf>? SYNCroniz e <Space> V, <NRf> ELEMent <x>? THD <Space> IEC CS? DISPlay : ORDer <Space> <NRf>??? HRMonics? HRMonics:ELEMent? Function Queries all settings relating to armonic measurement. {<NRf>}=1 (WT210 single-pase model) Syntax HRMonics? 1, 3 (WT230 tree-pase, Example HRMONICS? -> :HRMONICS:STTE 0; tree-wire model) ELEMENT 1;SYNCHRONIZE V,1;THD IEC; DISPLY:ORDER 1 HRMonics:DISPlay? 1 to 3 (WT230 tree-pase, four-wire model) Example HRMONICS:ELEMENT 1 HRMONICS:ELEMENT? Function Queries all settings concerning te display in case of armonic measurement. -> :HRMONICS:ELEMENT 1 Syntax HRMonics:DISPlay? HRMonics[:STTe] Example HRMONICS:DISPLY? HRMONICS:DISPLY? -> :HRMONICS: DISPLY:ORDER 1 Function Syntax Sets te armonic measurement mode ON/ OFF, queries te current setting. HRMonics[:STTe] {<Boolean>} HRMonics[:STTe]? HRMonics:DISPlay:ORDer Example HRMONICS:STTE ON Function Sets te order of te armonic component to be HRMONICS:STTE? -> :HRMONICS: sown on display B, queries te current setting. STTE 1 Syntax HRMonics:DISPlay:ORDer {<NRf>} Description If you switc te armonic measurement mode HRMonics:DISPlay:ORDer? ON/OFF using tis command and query te {<NRf>}=1 to 50 measurement mode using te Example HRMONICS:DISPLY:ORDER 1 :MESure:HRMonics:VLue? or HRMONICS:DISPLY:ORDER? :MESure[:NORMal]:Value? command -> :HRMONICS:DISPLY:ORDER 1 immediately afterwards, te measured data of HRMonics:ELEMent te previous measurement mode may be Function Sets te element for armonic measurement/ output. To retrieve te measured data in te queries te current setting. new measurement mode, a wait of Syntax HRMonics:ELEMent {<NRf>} approximately 2 seconds is required after issuing tis command

241 Communication Commands 2 (System of Commands Complying to te IEEE Standard) 14.3 Commands HRMonics:SYNCronize Function Sets te fundamental frequency for PLL syncronization (PLL source)/queries te current setting. Syntax HRMonics:SYNCronize {(V ),(<NRf> ELEMent<1-3>)} HRMonics:SYNCronize? Example HRMONICS:SYNCHRONIZE V,1 HRMONICS:SYNCHRONIZE? -> :HRMONICS:SYNCHRONIZE V,1 HRMonics:THD Function Sets te computation metod for armonic distortion (THD) for armonic measurement/ queries te current setting. Syntax HRMonics:THD {IEC CS} HRMonics:THD? Example HRMONICS:THD IEC HRMONICS:THD? -> :HRMONICS:THD IEC INTEGrate Group Te commands in te INTEGrate group are used to make settings relating to, and inquiries about integration. Tis allows you to make te same settings and inquiries as wen using te STRT key, STOP key, RESET key, INTEG SET key and teir corresponding menus. ; :INTEGrate : MODE <Space> NORMal CONTinuous? TIMer <Space> <NRf>, <NRf>, <NRf> <Caracter string>? STRt STOP RESet? INTEGrate? Function Queries all settings relating to integration. Syntax INTEGrate? Example INTEGRTE? -> :INTEGRTE: MODE NORML;TIMER 0,0,0 INTEGrate:MODE Function Sets te integration mode/queries te current setting. Syntax INTEGrate:MODE {NORMal CONTinuous} INTEGrate:MODE? Example INTEGRTE:MODE NORML INTEGRTE:MODE? -> :INTEGRTE:MODE NORML INTEGrate:RESet Function Resets te integrated values. Syntax INTEGrate:RESet Example INTEGRTE:RESET INTEGrate:STRt Function Starts integration. Syntax INTEGrate:STRt Example INTEGRTE:STRT INTEGrate:STOP Function Stops integration. Syntax INTEGrate:STOP Example INTEGRTE:STOP INTEGrate:TIMer Function Sets te integration timer/queries te current setting. Syntax INTEGrate:TIMer {<NRf>,<NRf>,<NRf> <String>} {<NRf>,<NRf>,<NRf>}=0,0,0 to 10000,0,0 {<String>}=HHHHH:MM:SS HHHHH our MM minute SS second Example INTEGRTE:TIMER 10,0,0 INTEGRTE:TIMER "10:00:00" INTEGRTE:TIMER? -> :INTEGRTE :TIMER 10,0,

242 14.3 Commands MTH Group Te commands in te MTH group are used to make settings relating to, and to make inquiries about te computing function. Te same function can be performed using te MTH menu of te [SETUP] key of te front panel. ; :MTH : TYPE <Space> CFCtor? EFFiciency RITmetic VERage CFCtor <Space> V, <NRf> ELEMent <x>? RITmetic <Space> DD SUB MUL DIV DIV DIVB? VERage <Space> W, <NRf> ELEMent <x> SIGMa?? MTH? Function Queries all settings related to te computing function. Syntax MTH? Example MTH? -> :MTH:TYPE RITHMETIC; RITHMETIC DD MTH:RITmetic Function Sets/queries te computing equation of te four aritmetic operations. Syntax MTH:RITmetic {DD SUB MUL DIV DIV DIVB} MTH:RITmetic? Example MTH:RITHMETIC DD MTH:RITHMETIC? -> :MTH:RITHMETIC DD Description If [MTH:TYPE] is not set to [RITmetic], tis command will be meaningless. Te computing equation selections are as follows: DD : display + display B SUB : display display B MUL : display display B DIV : display / display B DIV : display / (display B) 2 DIVB : (display ) 2 / display B MTH:VERage Function Sets/queries te average active power computation. Syntax MTH:VERage {W[,(<NRf> ELEMent<1-3> SIGMa)]} MTH:VERage? Example MTH:VERGE W,1 MTH:VERGE? -> :MTH:VERGE W,1 Description If [MTH:TYPE] is not set to [VERage], tis command will be meaningless. MTH:CFCtor Function Sets/queries te computing equation of te crest factor Syntax MTH:CFCtor {(V ),(<NRf> ELEMent<x>)} <x>= 1 (WT210 single-pase model) 1, 3 (WT230 tree-pase tree-wire model) 1 to 3 (WT230 tree pase fourwire model) MTH:CFCtor? Example MTH:CFCTOR V,1 MTH:CFCTOR? -> :MTH:CFCTOR V,1 Description If [MTH:TYPE] is not set to [CFCtor], tis command will be meaningless

243 Communication Commands 2 (System of Commands Complying to te IEEE Standard) 14.3 Commands MTH:TYPE Function Sets/queries te computing equation Syntax MTH:TYPE {EFFiciency CFCtor RITmetic VERage} MTH:TYPE? Example MTH:TYPE CFCTOR MTH:TYPE? -> :MTH:TYPE CFCTOR Description Te equation metod selections are as follows: EFFiciency : Efficiency (valid only for WT230) CFCtor : Crest factor RITmetic : Four aritmetic operations VERage : verage active power during integration

244 14.3 Commands MESure Group Te MESure group relates to measurement/computation data. Tere are no front panel keys for tese functions. lso, your instrument must be equipped wit te /HRM (armonic measurement function) to be able to use te related commands. Setting te output items for measurement/computation data is only valid in te communication mode. :MESure ; ; : NORMal : VLue? BINary? ; ITEM : PRESet <Space> NORMal INTEGrate CLEar ; <Normal measurement function> : LL <Space> OFF ON <NRf> ELEMent <x> <Space> OFF ON <NRf>? SIGMa <Space> OFF ON <NRf>?? TIME <Space> OFF MTH ON <NRf>??? HRMonics : VLue? ; BINary? ; ITEM : PRESet <Space> VPTtern PTtern WPTtern DPTtern LL CLEar SYNCroniz e <Space> OFF ON <NRf> <Harmonic measurement function>??? 14-28

245 Communication Commands 2 (System of Commands Complying to te IEEE Standard) 14.3 Commands HEDer <Space> OFF ON <NRf>?? MESure? MESure:HRMonics? Function Queries all te settings related to measurement/ Function Queries all settings related to armonic computation data. measurement data. Syntax MESure? Syntax MESure:HRMonics? Example Example of WT230 tree-pase four- Example MESURE:HRMONICS? wire model -> :MESURE:HRMONICS:ITEM: MESURE? -> :MESURE:NORML:ITEM:V: SYNCHRONIZE 1;VTHD 1;V 1;VCON 1; ELEMENT1 1;ELEMENT2 1;ELEMENT3 1; THD 0; 0;CON 0;PF 0;W 0;WCON 0; SIGM 1;:MESURE:NORML:ITEM:: VDEG 0;DEG 0 ELEMENT1 1;ELEMENT2 1;ELEMENT3 1; SIGM 1;:MESURE:NORML:ITEM:W: ELEMENT1 1;ELEMENT2 1;ELEMENT3 1; SIGM 1;:MESURE:NORML:ITEM:V: ELEMENT1 0;ELEMENT2 0;ELEMENT3 0; SIGM 0;:MESURE:NORML:ITEM:VR: ELEMENT1 0;ELEMENT2 0;ELEMENT3 0; SIGM 0;:MESURE:NORML:ITEM:PF: ELEMENT1 0;ELEMENT2 0;ELEMENT3 0; SIGM 0;:MESURE:NORML:ITEM:DEGREE: ELEMENT1 0;ELEMENT2 0;ELEMENT3 0; MESure:HRMonics:BINary? Function Queries armonic measurement data set by commands oter tan MESure:HRMonics: ITEM (binary format). Syntax MESure:HRMonics:BINary? Example MESURE:HRMONICS:BINRY? -> #5(number of bytes, 5 digits)(series of data bytes) Description For a description of te output format of armonic measurement data, see page SIGM 0;:MESURE:NORML:ITEM:VHZ: MESure:HRMonics:ITEM? ELEMENT1 0;ELEMENT2 0;ELEMENT3 0; SIGM 0;:MESURE:NORML:ITEM:HZ: ELEMENT1 0;ELEMENT2 0;ELEMENT3 0; Function Queries all settings related to te communication output items of armonic measurement data. SIGM 0;:MESURE:NORML:ITEM:WH: Syntax MESure:HRMonics:ITEM? ELEMENT1 0;ELEMENT2 0;ELEMENT3 0; Example MESURE:HRMONICS:ITEM? -> (Same SIGM 0;:MESURE:NORML:ITEM:WHP: result as for MESure:HRMonics?) ELEMENT1 0;ELEMENT2 0;ELEMENT3 0; SIGM 0;:MESURE:NORML:ITEM:WHM: ELEMENT1 0;ELEMENT2 0;ELEMENT3 0; SIGM 0;:MESURE:NORML:ITEM:H: ELEMENT1 0;ELEMENT2 0;ELEMENT3 0; SIGM 0;:MESURE:NORML:ITEM:HP: ELEMENT1 0;ELEMENT2 0;ELEMENT3 0; SIGM 0;:MESURE:NORML:ITEM:HM: ELEMENT1 0;ELEMENT2 0;ELEMENT3 0; SIGM 0;:MESURE:NORML:ITEM:VPK: ELEMENT1 0;ELEMENT2 0;ELEMENT3 0; SIGM 0;:MESURE:NORML:ITEM:PK: ELEMENT1 0;ELEMENT2 0;ELEMENT3 0; SIGM 0;:MESURE:NORML:ITEM:TIME 0; MTH 0;:MESURE:HRMONICS:ITEM: SYNCHRONIZE 1;VTHD 1;V 1;VCON 1; THD 0; 0;CON 0;PF 0;W 0;WCON 0; VDEG 0;DEG 0;MESURE:HEDER 0 MESure:HRMonics:ITEM:PRESet Function Sets te ON/OFF pattern for all communication outputs of te armonic measurement function. Syntax MESure:HRMonics:ITEM: PRESet {VPTtern PTtern WPTtern DPTtern LL CLEar} Example MESURE:HRMONICS:ITEM: PRESET VPTTERN Description Te following six patterns can be selected. VPTtern: SYNCronize/VTHD/V/VCON -> ON, oters -> OFF PTtern: SYNCronize/THD//CON -> ON, oters -> OFF WPTtern: SYNCronize/PF/W/WCON -> ON, oters -> OFF DPTtern: SYNCronize/VDEG/DEG -> ON, oters -> OFF LL: all items -> ON 14 CLEar: all items -> OFF 14-29

246 14.3 Commands MESure:HRMonics:ITEM:{SYNCronize <armonic measurement function>} Function Sets te communication output item of armonic measurement ON/OFF, queries te current setting. Syntax MESure:HRMonics:ITEM:{SYNCronize <armonic measurement function>} {< Boolean>} MESure:HRMonics:ITEM:{SYNCronize <armonic measur2ement function>}? SYNCronize=PLL source <armonic measurement function>={vthd V VCON THD CON PF W WCON VDEG DEG} Example MESURE:HRMONICS:ITEM:VTHD ON MESURE:HRMONICS:ITEM:VTHD? -> :MESURE:HRMONICS:ITEM:VTHD 1 Description Te selection SYNCronize is for outputting te frequency of te PLL source. You can query te PLL source input by te command HRMonics:SYNCronize? MESure:HRMonics:VLue? Function Queries armonic measurement data set by commands oter tan MESure:HRMonics:ITEM (SCII format). Syntax MESure:HRMonics:VLue? Example MESURE:HRMONICS:VLUE? -> 60.00E+00,12.01E+00,49.98E+00, 49.62E+00,0.03E+00,5.50E+00,... Description Te renewal of armonic measurement data output ere occurs wen bit0 (UPD) of te condition register (refer to page 14-47) canges from ig to low. For more details, refer to For te output format of armonic measurement data, refer to page MESure:HEDer Function Turns ON/OFF te additional information output wen outputting measured/computed data in binary format. Syntax MESure:HEDer {<Boolean>} Example MESURE:HEDER OFF MESURE:HEDER? -> :MESURE:HEDER 0 Description For a description of te additional information, see page MESure:NORMal? Function Queries all settings related to normal measured/ computed data. Syntax MESure:NORMal? Example Example of WT230 tree-pase fourwire model MESURE:NORML? -> :MESURE:NORML: ITEM:V:ELEMENT1 1;ELEMENT2 1; ELEMENT3 1;SIGM 1;:MESURE:NORML: ITEM::ELEMENT1 1;ELEMENT2 1; ELEMENT3 1;SIGM 1;:MESURE:NORML: ITEM:W:ELEMENT1 1;ELEMENT2 1; ELEMENT3 1;SIGM 1;:MESURE:NORML: ITEM:V:ELEMENT1 0;ELEMENT2 0; ELEMENT3 0;SIGM 0;:MESURE:NORML: ITEM:VR:ELEMENT1 0;ELEMENT2 0; ELEMENT3 0;SIGM 0;:MESURE:NORML: ITEM:PF:ELEMENT1 0;ELEMENT2 0; ELEMENT3 0;SIGM 0;:MESURE:NORML: ITEM:DEGREE:ELEMENT1 0; ELEMENT2 0;ELEMENT3 0;SIGM 0;: MESURE:NORML:ITEM:VHZ:ELEMENT1 0; ELEMENT2 0;ELEMENT3 0;SIGM 0;: MESURE:NORML:ITEM:HZ:ELEMENT1 0; ELEMENT2 0;ELEMENT3 0;SIGM 0;: MESURE:NORML:ITEM:WH:ELEMENT1 0; ELEMENT2 0;ELEMENT3 0;SIGM 0;: MESURE:NORML:ITEM:WHP:ELEMENT1 0; ELEMENT2 0;ELEMENT3 0;SIGM 0;: MESURE:NORML:ITEM:WHM:ELEMENT1 0; ELEMENT2 0;ELEMENT3 0;SIGM 0;: MESURE:NORML:ITEM:H:ELEMENT1 0; ELEMENT2 0;ELEMENT3 0;SIGM 0;: MESURE:NORML:ITEM:HP:ELEMENT1 0; ELEMENT2 0;ELEMENT3 0;SIGM 0;: MESURE:NORML:ITEM:HM:ELEMENT1 0; ELEMENT2 0;ELEMENT3 0;SIGM 0;: MESURE:NORML:ITEM:VPK:ELEMENT1 0; ELEMENT2 0;ELEMENT3 0;SIGM 0;: MESURE:NORML:ITEM:PK:ELEMENT1 0; ELEMENT2 0;ELEMENT3 0;SIGM 0;: MESURE:NORML:ITEM:TIME 0;MTH 0 MESure[:NORMal]:BINary? Function Queries normal measurement data set by commands oter tan MESure[:NORMal]: ITEM (binary format). Syntax MESure[:NORMal]:BINary? Example MESURE:NORML:BINRY? -> #5(number of bytes, 5 digits)(series of data bytes) Description For a description of te output format of normal measurement data, see page MESure[:NORMal]:ITEM? Function Queries all settings related to te communication output items of normal measured/computed data. Syntax MESure[:NORMal]:ITEM? Example MESURE:NORML:ITEM? -> (Results are te same as for MESure:NORMal? ) 14-30

247 Communication Commands 2 (System of Commands Complying to te IEEE Standard) MESure[:NORMal]:ITEM:PRESet Function Syntax Sets te ON/OFF pattern for all communication outputs of te normal measurement function. MESure[:NORMal]:ITEM:PRESet {NORMal INTEGrate CLEar} Example MESURE:NORML:ITEM:PRESET NORML Description Te following tree patterns can be selected. Te same setting applies to te current all elements or. NORMal: V//W -> ON, oters -> OFF INTEGrate: W/WH/H/TIME -> ON, oters -> OFF CLEar: all items -> OFF MESure[:NORMal]:ITEM:{TIME MTH} Function Sets te communication output of {elapsed integration time MTH} ON/OFF, queries about te current setting. Syntax MESure[:NORMal]:ITEM:{TIME MTH} {<Boolean>} MESure[:NORMal]:ITEM:{TIME MTH}? Example MESURE:NORML:ITEM:TIME OFF MESURE:NORML:ITEM:TIME? -> :MESURE:NORML:ITEM:TIME 0 MESure[:NORMal]:ITEM: <normal measurement function>? Function Queries communication output settings of te normal measurement function. Syntax MESure[:NORMal]:ITEM: <normal measurement function>? <normal measurement function>={v W V VR PF DEGRee VHZ HZ WH WHP WHM H HP HM VPK PK} Example MESURE:NORML:ITEM:V? -> :MESURE:NORML:ITEM:V:ELEMENT1 1; ELEMENT2 1;ELEMENT3 1;SIGM 1 Description For te meanings of te symbols of functions, see Note on page MESure[:NORMal]:ITEM: <normal measurement function>[:ll] Function Sets te communication output concerning all elements or ON/OFF at once. Syntax MESure[:NORMal]:ITEM:<normal measurement function>[:ll] {< Boolean>} Example MESURE:NORML:ITEM:V:LL ON Example 14.3 Commands <x>= 1 (WT210 single-pase model) 1, 3 (WT230 tree-pase tree-wire model) 1 to 3 (WT230 tree pase fourwire model) MESURE:NORML:ITEM:V:ELEMENT1 ON MESURE:NORML:ITEM:V:ELEMENT? -> :MESURE:NORML:ITEM:V: ELEMENT1 1 MESure[:NORMal]:ITEM: <normal measurement function>:sigma Function Sets te communication output concerning ON/OFF, queries te current setting. Syntax MESure[:NORMal]:ITEM: <normal measurement function>: SIGMa {<Boolean>} MESure[:NORMal]:ITEM: <normal measurement function>:sigma? Example MESURE:NORML:ITEM:V:SIGM ON MESURE:NORML:ITEM:V:SIGM? -> :MESURE:NORML:ITEM:V:SIGM 1 MESure[:NORMal]:VLue? Function Queries normal measured/computed data set by commands oter tan MESure[:NORMal]:ITEM (SCII format). Syntax MESure[:NORMal]:VLue? Example MESURE:NORML:VLUE? -> 10.04E+00,10.02E+00,10.03E+00, 49.41E+00,... Description Te renewal of normal measured/computed data output ere occures wen bit0 (UPD) of te condition register (refer to page 14-47) canges from ig to low. For more details, refer to For te output format of normal measured/ computed data, refer to page Wen te armonic measurement function is ON, armonic measurement data will be returned (same as te response to MESure:HRMonics:VLue?). 14 MESure[:NORMal]:ITEM: <normal measurement function>:element<x> Function Sets te communication output concerning eac element ON/OFF, queries te current setting. Syntax MESure[:NORMal]:ITEM: <normal measurement function>: ELEMent<x> {<Boolean>} MESure[:NORMal]:ITEM: <normal measurement function>: ELEMent<x>? 14-31

248 14.3 Commands Data Format/Output Format of Normal and Harmonic Measurement Data <SCII> Te data format/output format of normal and armonic measurement data wic is requested by MESure[:NORMal]:VLue? or MESure:HRMonics:VLue?, is as follows. Data Format of Normal Measurement Data ll data of te <armonic measurement function> are output in te <NR3> format. (Example) E+00 V,,W,V,VR,PF,DEGR,VHZ,HZ,VPK,PK,MTH mantissa: max. 5 digits + exponent: 2 digits WH,WHP,WHM,H,HP,HM mantissa: max. 6 digits + exponent: 2 digits (max. 5 digits in case of negative value) Te sign of te mantissa will only be applied in case of negative values. However, pase lead and lag (in case of pase angle (DEG)) will be sown as follows. LED E+00 LG E+00 in pase 0.0E+00 (Te mantissa will be proceeded by a space) In case of overrange or computation over, 9.9E+37 (+ ) will be output. (i.e. in case te display sows ol, of, PFErr, deger, ErrLo, or ErrHi) In case no data is present (i.e. te display sows ), 9.91E+37 (NN) will be output. Te elasped integration time is output as ours, minutes, seconds in te <NR1> format. (Example) 999,59,59 Only one of te six parameters, VHZ1, VHZ2, VHZ3, HZ1, HZ2, or HZ3, can be measured for frequency. Data tat is not measured is set to no data (9.91E+37). VHZΣ, HZΣ, VPKΣ, and PKΣ always output no data (9.91E+37). Output Format of Normal Measurement Data Te communication output is set ON by any of te commands starting wit MESure[:NORMal]:ITEM and te normal measured/computed data or elapsed integration time are output according to te following order of priority. Besides, in case of recalling normal measurement or integration data, te data number will be output in <NR1> format as well. Data will be output in te following order corresponding to eac element. However, note tat for model only element 1 is valid, and for model only element 1, 3 and S are valid. (0. Data number in case of recalling) 1. V1 V2 V3 V W1 W2 W3 W 4. V1 V2 V3 V 5. VR1 VR2 VR3 VR 6. PF1 PF2 PF3 PF 7. DEGR1 DEGR2 DEGR3 DEGR 8. VHZ1 VHZ2 VHZ3 VHZ 9. HZ1 HZ2 HZ3 HZ 10. WH1 WH2 WH3 WH 11. WHP1 WHP2 WHP3 WHP 12. WHM1 WHM2 WHM3 WHM 13. H1 H2 H3 H 14. HP1 vhp2 HP3 HP 14. HM1 HM2 HM3 HM 16. TIME (elapsed integration time) Eac data is divided by a comma, and is ended by te terminator <RMT>

249 Communication Commands 2 (System of Commands Complying to te IEEE Standard) 14.3 Commands Output Example of Normal Measurement Data Output example for model after aving sent te following commands. (Sent) MESURE:NORML:ITEM:PRESET NORML MESURE:NORML:VLUE? (Received data) E+00,10.002E+00,10.003E+00,49.041E+00,49.052E+00, E+00,429.00E+00,429.02E+00,0.8580E+03 (Data contents) V1:10.004E+00 V3:10.002E+00 V :10.003E+00 1:49.041E+00 3:49.052E+00 :49.047E+00 W1:429.00E+00 W3:429.02E+00 W :0.8580E+03 Output example for model were measurement data first ave been stored during integration, and wile recalling tese data, te following commands ave been sent. (Sent) MESURE:NORML:ITEM:PRESET INTEGRTE MESURE:NORML:VLUE? (Received data) 10,428.60E+00,428.10E+00,428.80E+00, E+03,71.450E+00,71.370E+00,71.490E+00,214.31E+00, E+00,8.2354E+00,8.2519E+00,24.721E+00,0,10,0 (Data contents) Recalled data number: 10 W1:428.60E+00 W2:428.10E+00 W3:428.80E+00 W :1.2855E+03 WH1:71.450E+00 WH2:71.370E+00 WH3:71.490E+00 WH :214.31E+00 H1:8.2342E+00 H2:8.2354E+00 H3:8.2519E+00 H :24.721E+00 Elapsed integration time: 0 (ours), 10 (minutes), 0 (seconds) Data Format of Harmonic Measurement ll data will be output in te <NR3> format. (mantissa: max. 5 digits + exponent: 2 digits) Output Format of Harmonic Measurement Te communication output is set ON by any of te commands starting wit MESure:HRMonics:ITEM and te armonic measurement data or frequency of PLL source (SYNCronize) are output according to te following order of priority. Besides, in case of recalling normal measurement or integration data, te data number will be output in <NR1> format as well. (0. Data number in case of recalling) 1.Frequency of PLL source (SYNCronize) 2.VTHD 3.V 4.VCON 5.THD 6. 7.CON 8.PF 9.W 10.WCON 11.VDEG 12.DEG Harmonic measurement data will be output for all applicable elements. To find out to wic element te data correspond, use te HRMonics:ELEMent? command. Frequency of PLL Source (SYNCronize) : 1 data Outputs te fundamental frequency (VHz/Hz) of te voltage/current for wic te PLL source as been set. Te input of te PLL source can be found out using HRMonics:SYNCronize?. VTHD,THD : 1 data Outputs te armonic distortion factor of voltage/current. (for eiter iec or CS). Te used computation metod can be found out using te HRMonics:THD? command. V,,W : 51(or 31) data Rms values of te 1st to 50(or 30)t order fundamental measured value (1st order) armonic measurement value (2nd order) armonic measurement value (50(or 30)t order)

250 14.3 Commands VCON,CON,WCON : 49(or 29) data Harmonic relative content (2nd order) armonic relative content (50(or 30)t order) PF : 1 data Outputs te power factor of te fundamental (1st order). VDEG : 50(or 30) data Pase angle between te1st order voltage and 1st order current Pase angle between te 2nd order voltage and 1st order voltage Pase angle between te 50(or 30)t order voltage and te 1st order voltage. DEG : 50(or 30) data Pase angle between te1st order voltage and 1st order current Pase angle between te 2nd order current and 1st order current Pase angle between te 50(or 30)t order current and te 1st order current. Eac data is divided by a comma, and ended by te terminator <RMT>. Output Example of Harmonic Measurement Data Output example for model , after aving sent te following commands. (Refer also to page 9-23 for output example of external plotter). (Sent) MESURE:HRMONICS:ITEM:PRESET VPTTERN MESURE:HRMONICS:VLUE? (Received data) 60.00E+00,12.01E+00,49.98E+00,49.62E+00,0.03E+00,5.50E+00, 0.01E+00,1.99E+00,0.02E+00,1.01E+00,0.01E+00,0.62E+00, 0.00E+00,0.41E+00,0.00E+00,0.30E+00,0.00E+00,0.22E+00, 0.00E+00,0.17E+00,0.00E+00,0.14E+00,0.00E+00,0.12E+00, 0.00E+00,0.09E+00,0.00E+00,0.08E+00,0.00E+00,0.07E+00, 0.01E+00,0.06E+00,0.00E+00,0.05E+00,0.00E+00,0.04E+00, 0.00E+00,0.05E+00,0.00E+00,0.03E+00,0.00E+00,0.03E+00, 0.01E+00,0.03E+00,0.00E+00,0.03E+00,0.00E+00,0.02E+00, 0.00E+00,0.02E+00,0.00E+00,0.02E+00,0.00E+00,0.06E+00, 11.09E+00,0.02E+00,4.01E+00,0.03E+00,2.03E+00,0.01E+00, 1.24E+00,0.01E+00,0.82E+00,0.01E+00,0.60E+00,0.00E+00, 0.45E+00,0.01E+00,0.35E+00,0.01E+00,0.28E+00,0.00E+00, 0.23E+00,0.01E+00,0.19E+00,0.01E+00,0.16E+00,0.01E+00, 0.14E+00,0.01E+00,0.11E+00,0.01E+00,0.10E+00,0.01E+00, 0.08E+00,0.01E+00,0.09E+00,0.01E+00,0.07E+00,0.00E+00, 0.06E+00,0.01E+00,0.06E+00,0.01E+00,0.05E+00,0.01E+00, 0.05E+00,0.01E+00,0.05E+00,0.01E+00,0.04E+00,0.01E+00 (Data contents) Frequency of PLL source: 60.00E+00 (Hz) Harmonic distortion factor of voltage: 12.01E+00 (%) Rms value of 1st to 50t order: 49.98E+00 (V) Fundamental measured value (1st order): 49.62E+00 (V) Harmonic measurement value (2nd order): 0.03E+00 (V) : : Harmonic measurement value (50t order): 0.00E+00 (V) Harmonic relative content (2nd order): 0.06E+00 (%) : : Harmonic relative content (50t order): 0.01E+00 (%) Te data consist of 102 items in total

251 Communication Commands 2 (System of Commands Complying to te IEEE Standard) 14.3 Commands Data Format/Output Format of Normal Measurement and Harmonic Measurement Data <BINRY> Te data format and output format of normal measurement and armonic measurement data in binary format tat are output by te MESure[:NORMal]:BINary? or MESure:HRMonics:BINary? command are as follows: Data Format Measured data consists of a 2-byte eader and 4-byte data (total of 6 bytes). Header (2 bytes) Data (4 bytes) Header structure Te eader consists of a 1-byte status and 1-byte SCII conversion information. Status (1 byte) SCII conversion information (1 byte) Status byte b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b7 to b4: Lead/Lag pase information (Tis information is meaningful only wen te data is a pase angle (DEGR). For all oter cases, te value is always 0000.) 0000: Lag 0001: Lead 0010: Cannot be detected b3 to b0: Data status 0000: Normal 0001: Overrange (--ol-) 0010: Voltage peak over 0011: Current peak over 0100: Power factor error (PFErr)0101: Pase angle error (deger) 0110: Frequency error (ErrLo)0111: Frequency error (ErrHi) 1000: Computation overflow (--of-) 1001: PLL error (FreqEr) 1010: No data (-----) SCII conversion information b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0 b7 to b4: Prefix unit 0000: None (E+0) 0001: m (E 3) 0010: k (E+3) 0011: M (E+6) b3 to b0: Decimal point position 0000: _. 0001:. _ 0010: _. 0011:. _ 0100: _. 0101:. _ Data structure Data is in 4-byte IEEE single-precision floating point format. SEEEEEEE E MM MMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMMM Te byte order is MSB first. Pysical value = ( 1) S (2(E 127 )) (1+M/(2 23 )) S: Sign bit, 0 or 1 E: Exponent in te range of 0 to 254 M: Mantissa as a 23-bit binary value For elapsed integration time Outputs te time in units of seconds. For example, 0x (=3600) if te time is 1 our (1:00:00). For overrange and computation overflow 0x7E94F56 (=9.9E+37) For no data 0x7E951BEE (=9.91E+37) 14 Output format Te output format (output order of measured data) is te same as te SCII format

252 14.3 Commands RECall Group Te commands in te RECall group are used to make settings relating to, and inquires about recalling data. Tis allows you to make te same settings and inquiries as can be set using te lower menus of [MEMORY]- recl or [MEMORY]- PnLrC. ; :RECall : STT e <Space> OFF ON <NRf>? INTer val <Space> <NRf>, <NRf>, <NRf> <Caracter string>? PNel <Space> <NRf>? RECall? Function Queries all te settings relating to recalling data. Syntax RECall? Example RECLL? -> :RECLL:STTE 0; INTERVL 0,0,0 RECall:INTerval Function Sets te recalling interval/queries te current setting. Syntax RECall:INTerval {<NRf>,<NRf>,<NRf> <String>} RECall:INTerval? {<NRf>,<NRf>,<NRf>}=0,0,0 to 99,59,59 {<String>}=HH:MM:SS HH our MM minutes SS seconds Example RECLL:INTERVL 0,0,0 RECLL:INTERVL 00:00:00 RECLL:INTERVL? -> :RECLL: INTERVL 0,0,0 Description If te recalling interval is set to 0 0 min 0 s, te recalling interval is set to te display update rate as wen te data was stored. RECall:PNel Function Retrieves te setup parameters file. Syntax RECall:PNel {<NRf>} {<NRf>}=1 to 4 : file number Example RECLL:PNEL 1 RECall[:STTe] Function Turns recalling ON/OFF, queries te current setting. Syntax RECall[:STTe] {<Boolean>} RECall:STTe? Example RECLL:STTE ON RECLL:STTE? -> :RECLL:STTE

253 Communication Commands 2 (System of Commands Complying to te IEEE Standard) RELay Group Te commands in te RELay group are used to make settings relating to, and inquiries about te comparator function. Tis allows you to make te same settings and inquiries as wen using te lower menus of [OUTPUT]- rely. Tis group is only useful in case your instrument is equipped wit te /CMP option. ; 14.3 Commands :RELay : STT e <Space> OFF ON <NRf>? MODE <Space> SINGle DUL? ; NCHannel <x> : FUNCtion <Space> <Normal meas. function>, <NRf> ELEMent <x> SIGMa OFF? THResold <Space> <NRf>?? ; HCHannel <x> : FUNCtion <Space> <Harmonic measurement, <NRf>, <NRf> function> ELEMent <x> ORDer <x> OFF? THResold <Space> <NRf>?? DISPlay <Space> <NRf> CHNnel <x> OFF?? RELay? Function Syntax Example Queries all settings relating to te comparator function. RELay? RELY? -> :RELY:STTE 0;MODE SINGLE; NCHNNEL1: V,1; THRESHOLD 600.0E+00;:RELY:NCHNNEL2:,1;THRESHOLD 20.00E+00;: RELY:NCHNNEL3: W,1; THRESHOLD 1.200E+03;:RELY:NCHNNEL4: PF,1;THRESHOLD 1.000E+00;: RELY:HCHNNEL1: V,1,1; THRESHOLD 600.0E+00;:RELY:HCHNNEL2:,1,1;THRESHOLD 20.00E+00;: RELY:HCHNNEL3: W,1,1; THRESHOLD 1.200E+03;:RELY:HCHNNEL4: PF,1;THRESHOLD 1.000E+00;: RELY:DISPLY OFF RELay:DISPlay Function Sets te comparator display OFF or wen ON, te cannel to be displayed/queries te current setting. Syntax RELay:DISPlay {<NRf> CHNnel<1-4> OFF} RELay:DISPlay? {<NRf>}=1 to 4:cannel Example RELY:DISPLY 1 RELY:DISPLY? -> :RELY:DISPLY 1 RELay:HCHannel<x>? Function Queries all settings related to relay output items in case of armonic measurement. Syntax RELay:HCHannel<x>? <x>= 1 to 4 Example RELY:HCHNNEL1? -> :RELY:HCHNNEL1: V,1,1; THRESHOLD 600.0E

254 14.3 Commands RELay:HCHannel<x>:FUNCtion Function Sets te function of te relay output item in case of armonic measurement/queries te current setting. Syntax RELay:HCHannel<x>:FUNCtion {<armonic measurement function>,(<nrf> ELEMent<1-3>), (<NRf> ORDer<1-50>) OFF} <armonic measurement function>= {VTHD V VCON THD CON PF W WCON VDEG DEG} Example RELY:HCHNNEL1: V,1,1 RELY:HCHNNEL1? -> :RELY:HCHNNEL1: V,1,1 RELY:HCHNNEL2? -> :RELY:HCHNNEL2: OFF RELY:HCHNNEL4? -> :RELY:HCHNNEL4: PF,1 Description Te order setting will be ignored in case te armonic measurement function is set to VTHD, THD or PF and migt terefore be omitted. Even if V, or W as been selected, te rms value of te 1st to 50t order does not become te corresponding relay output item. lso, even if VDEG or DEG as been selected, te pase angle between te 1st order voltage and 1st order current does not become te corresponding relay output item. RELay:HCHannel<x>:THResold Function Sets te tresold level for te relay output item in case of armonic measurement/queries te current setting. Syntax RELay:HCHannel<x>:THResold {<NRf>} <x>= 1 to 4 <NRf>= 0.000E+00 to ±9.999E+09 Example RELY:HCHNNEL1:THRESHOLD 600.0E+00 RELY:HCHNNEL1:THRESHHOLD? -> :RELY:HCHNNEL1: THRESHOLD 600.0E+00 Description Te mantissa of te setting value is rounded a follows. Less tan 1.000: Rounded to te tird digit left of te decimal to 9999: Rounded to te fourt significant digit. RELay:MODE Function Sets te mode of te comparator function/ queries te current setting. Syntax RELay:MODE {SINGle DUL} RELay:MODE? Example RELY:MODE DUL RELY:MODE? -> :RELY:MODE DUL RELay:NCHannel<x>? Function Queries all settings related to te relay output items in case of normal measurement. Syntax RELay:NCHannel<x>? <x>=1 to 4 Example RELY:NCHNNEL2? -> :RELY:NCHNNEL2:,1; THRESHOLD 20.00E+00 RELay:NCHannel<x>:FUNCtion Function Sets te function of te relay output item in case of normal measurement/queries te current setting. Syntax RELay:NCHannel<x>:FUNCtion {<normal measurement function>,(<nrf> ELEMent<1-3> SIGMa) OFF} <x>=1 to 4 <normal measurement function>={v W V VR PF DEGRee VHZ HZ WH WHP WHM H HP HM MTH VPK PK} Example RELY:NCHNNEL3: W,1 RELY:NCHNNEL3? -> :RELY:NCHNNEL3: W,1 Description Except for te case wen it is OFF, you will specify <normal measurement function> and <element> for te relay output function. However, if te <normal measurement function> is set to MTH, <element> is ignored. (Te response to te query will ave te <element> omitted.) RELay:NCHannel<x>:THResold Function Sets te tresold level for te relay output item in case of normal measurement/queries te current setting. Syntax RELay:NCHannel<x>:THResold {<NRf>} <x>=1 to 4 <NRf>=0.000E+00 to ±9.999E+09 Example RELY:NCHNNEL3:THRESHOLD 1.200E+03 RELY:NCHNNEL3:THRESHHOLD? -> :RELY:NCHNNEL3:THRESHOLD 1.200E+03 Description Te mantissa of te setting value is rounded a follows. Less tan 1.000: Rounded to te tird digit left of te decimal to 9999: Rounded to te fourt significant digit. RELay[:STTe] Function Sets te comparator function ON/OFF, queries te current setting. Syntax RELay[:STTe] {<Boolean>} RELay:STTe? Example RELY ON RELY:STTE ON RELY:STTE? -> :RELY:STTE

255 Communication Commands 2 (System of Commands Complying to te IEEE Standard) 14.3 Commands SMPle Group Te commands in te SMPle group are used to make settings relating to sampling. Te commands allow you to make te same settings and inquiries as wen te [HOLD] key on te front panel or te u.rte menu of te [SETUP] key is used. ; :SMPle : HOLD <Space> OFF ON <NRf>? RTE <Space> <time>?? SMPle? Function Queries all settings related to sampling. Syntax SMPle? Example SMPLE? -> :SMPLE:HOLD 0 SMPle:HOLD Function Sets to old te output of data (display, communication)/queries te current setting. Syntax SMPle:HOLD {<Boolean>} SMPle:HOLD? Example SMPLE:HOLD ON SMPLE:HOLD? -> :SMPLE:HOLD 1 SMPle:RTE Function Sets te display update rate or queries te current setting. Syntax SMPle:RTE {<time>} <time> = 0.1 to 5 s (0.1, 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, 5) Example SMPLE:RTE 0.25S SMPLE:RTE? -> :SMPLE:RTE 0.25E

256 14.3 Commands STTus Group Te commands in te STTus group are used to make settings relating to, and inquiries about te communication status. Tere is no corresponding operation using te front panel. Refer to section 14.4 for status reports. ; :STTus : CONDition? EESE <Space> <Register>? EESR? ERRor? FILTer <x> <Space> RISE FLL BOTH NEVer? QMESsage <Space> OFF ON <NRf>? SPOLl?? STTus? Function Queries all settings related to te status of communication. Syntax STTus? Example STTUS? -> :STTUS:EESE 0; FILTER1 NEVER; FILTER2 NEVER; FILTER3 NEVER;FILTER4 NEVER; FILTER5 NEVER;FILTER6 NEVER; FILTER7 NEVER;FILTER8 NEVER; FILTER9 NEVER;FILTER10 NEVER; FILTER11 NEVER;FILTER12 NEVER; FILTER13 NEVER;FILTER14 NEVER; FILTER15 NEVER;FILTER16 NEVER; QMESSGE 1 STTus:CONDition? Function Queries te contents of te condition filter. Syntax STTus:CONDition? Example STTUS:CONDITION -> 16 Description Refer to 14.4 for details on te condition filter. STTus:EESE Function Sets te extended event register/queries te current setting. Syntax STTus:EESE <Register> STTus:EESE? <Register>=0 to Example STTUS:EESE 257 STTUS:EESE? -> :STTUS:EESE 257 Description Refer to Section 14.4 for details on te extended event register. STTus:EESR? Function Queries te contents of te extended event register, and clears it. Syntax STTus:EESR? Example STTUS:EESR? -> 1 Description Refer to Section 14.4 for details on te extended event register. STTus:ERRor? Function Queries te occurred error code and message. Syntax STTus:ERRor? Example STTUS:ERROR? -> 113, Undefined eader STTus:FILTer<x> Function Sets te transit filter/queries te current setting. Syntax STTus:FILTer<x> {RISE FLL BOTH NEVer} STTus:FILTer<x>? <x>=1 to 16 Example STTUS:FILTER2 RISE STTUS:FILTER2? -> :STTUS:FILTER2 RISE Description Refer to 14.4 for details on te condition filter

257 Communication Commands 2 (System of Commands Complying to te IEEE Standard) 14.3 Commands STTus:QMESsage Function Sets weter or not to apply te corresponding message to te query STTus:ERRor? queries te current setting. Syntax STTus:QMESsage {<Boolean>} STTus:QMESsage? Example STTUS:QMESSGE OFF STTUS:QMESSGE? -> :STTUS: QMESSGE 0 STTus:SPOLL?(Serial Poll) Function Executes serial polling. Syntax STTus:SPOLL? Example STTUS:SPOLL? -> STTUS:SPOLL 0 Description Tis command is used for te serial interface. n interface message is available for te GP-IB interface STORe Group Te commands in te STORe group are used to make settings relating to and inquiries about storing data. Tis allows you to make te same settings as wen using te lower menus of [MEMORY]- StorE or [MEMORY]- PnLSt. ; :STORe : STT e <Space> OFF ON <NRf>? INTer val <Space> <NRf>, <NRf>, <NRf> <Caracter string>? PNel <Space> <NRf>? STORe? Function Queries all settings related to storing data. Syntax STORe? Example STORE? -> :STORE:STTE 0; INTERVL 0,0,0 STORe:INTerval Function Sets te interval for storage/queries te current setting. Syntax STORe:INTerval {<NRf>,<NRf>,<NRf> <String>} STORe:INTerval? {<NRf>,<NRf>,<NRf>}=0,0,0 to 99,59,59 {<String>}=HH:MM:SS HH ours MM minutes SS seconds Example STORE:INTERVL 0,0,0 STORE:INTERVL 00:00:00 STORE:INTERVL? -> :STORE:INTERVL 0,0,0 Description If te store interval is set to 0 0 min 0 s, te store interval is set to te same interval as te display update rate. STORe:PNel Function Saves te setup parameters to a file. Syntax STORe:PNel {<NRf>} {<NRf>}=1 to 4:file number Example STORE:PNEL 1 STORe[:STTe] Function Sets store ON/OFF, queries te current setting. Syntax STORe[:STTe] {<Boolean>} STORe:STTe? Example STORE:STTE ON STORE:STTE? -> :STORE:STTE

258 14.3 Commands Common Command Group Te commands in te common command group are independent of te instrument s functions, and are specified in IEEE Tere is no front panel key tat corresponds to tis group. ; *CL? *CLS *ESE <Space> <NRf>? *ESR? *IDN? *OPC *OPC? *OPT? *PSC <Space> <NRf> *RST? *SRE <Space> <NRf> *STB?? *TRG *TST? *WI *CL? Function Execute zero-level compensation and queries te result. Syntax *CL? Example *CL? -> 0 Description 0 is returned wen te zero-level compensation completes properly. Oterwise, 1 is returned. *CLS Function Clears te standard event register, extended event register and error queue. Syntax *CLS Example *CLS Description Te output will also be cleared if a *CLS command is appended after te program message terminator. For details on te registers and queues, refer to section *ESE Function Sets te value for te standard event enable register, or queries te current setting. Syntax *ESE {<NRf>} *ESE? {<NRf>}=0 to 251 Example *ESE 253 *ESE? -> 251 Description Eac bit is expressed as a decimal number. For example, if *ESE 251 is set, te standard enable register will be set to Tis means tat bit 2 of te standard event register is disabled so tat bit 5 (ESB) of te status byte register will not be set to 1, even if a query error occurs. Default is *ESE 0, i.e. all bits are disabled. Te standard event enable register will be cleared wen an inquiry is made using *ESE?. For details referring te standard event enable register, refer to page *ESR? Function Queries te value of te standard event register and clears it at te same time. Syntax *ESR? Example *ESR? -> 32 Description Eac bit is expressed as a decimal number. It is possible to ascertain te type of event wic as occurred, wile SRQ is occuring. For example, if *ESR 32 is returned, tis means tat te standard event register is , i.e. te SRQ as occurred due to a command syntax error. If a query is made using *ESR?, te standard event register will be cleared. For details referring te standard event enable register, refer to page

259 Communication Commands 2 (System of Commands Complying to te IEEE Standard) *IDN? Function Queries te instrument model. Syntax *IDN? Example *IDN? -> YOKOGW,760503,0,F1.01 Description reply consists of te following information: <Model>,<Type>,<Serial No.> and <Firmware version>. In actuality, <Serial No.> is not returned. *OPC Function Syntax *OPC? Function Syntax Wen *OPC is sent, tis command sets bit 0 (te OPC bit) of te standard event register to 1. Tis command is not supported by tis instrument. *OPC Wen *OPC? is sent, 1 in (SCII code) will be returned. Tis command is not supported by tis instrument. *OPC? *OPT? Function Queries installed options. Syntax *OPT? Example *OPT? -> EXT1, HRM, D4, CMP Description NONE will be attaced to te reply if no options are installed. OPT? must always be te last query in program message. If tere is anoter query after tis, an error will occur. *PSC Function Selects weter or not to clear te following registers wen turning ON te power, or queries te current setting. Te registers are te standard event enable register, te extended event enable register and te transition filter. However, tey cannot be cleared if te parameter is 0. Syntax *PSC {<NRf>} *PSC? {<NRf>}=0(no clearance), oter tan 0(clearance) Example *PSC 1 *PSC? -> 1 Description Refer to Section 14.4 for more details on te registers. *RST Function Resets (initializes) te present settings. Syntax *RST Example *RST Description Refer to 12.2 for initial settings. ll settings except communication settings are reset to factory default values. *SRE Function Syntax Sets te value of te service request enable register, or queries te current setting. *SRE {<NRf>} *SRE? 14.3 Commands {<NRf>}=0 to 255 Example *SRE 239 *SRE? -> 175 (since te bit 6 (MSS) setting is ignored) Description Eac bit is expressed as a decimal number. For example, if *SRE 239 is set, te service request enable register will be set to Tis means tat bit 4 of te service request enable register is disabled, so tat bit 4 (MV) of te status byte register will not be set to 1, even if te output queue is not empty. Bit 6 (MSS) of te status byte register is te MSS bit itself, and terefore, is ignored. Default is *SRE 255, i.e. all bits are enabled. Te service request enable register will not be cleared, even if a query is made using *SRE?. For details of te service request enable register, refer to page *STB? Function Queries te value of te status byte register. Syntax *STB? Example *STB? -> 4 Description Eac bit is expressed as a decimal number. Bit 6 is RQS and not MSS because te register is read witout serial polling. For example, if *STB 4 is returned, te status byte register is set to , i.e. te error queue is not empty (an error as occurred). Te status byte register will not be cleared, even if a query is made using *STB?. For details of te status byte register, refer to page *TRG Function Executes te same operation as te TRIG (SHIFT+HOLD) key on te front panel. Syntax *TRG Description Executes te same operation as wen using te multi line message GET (Group Execute Trigger). *TST? Function Executes a self-test and queries te result. ll internal memory boards are tested. Syntax *TST? Example *TST? -> 0 Description 0 will be returned wen te result are satisfactory. If an abnormality is detected, 1 will be returned. *WI Function Waits for te command following *WI until execution of te designated overlap command as been completed. Tis command is not supported by tis instrument. Syntax *WI

260 14.4 Status Report Overview of te Status Report Te figure below sows te status report wic is read by a serial poll. Tis is an extended version of te one specified in IEEE Service request enable register & OR Occurrence of a service request & & & & 7 MSS 6 ESBMV EES EV 1 0 Status byte RQS & & Output queue Error queue OR Standard event enable register & & & & & & & & Standard event register OR Extended event enable register & & & & & & & & & & & & & & & & Extended event register Transit filter Condition register 14-44

261 Communication Commands 2 (System of Commands Complying to te IEEE Standard) 14.4 Status Report Overview of Registers and Queues Name Function Writing Reading Status byte Serial poll (RQS), *STB?(MSS) Service request Masks status byte. *SRE *SRE? enable register Standard event Event in te *ESR? register instrument (1) Standard event Masks standard *ESE *ESE? enable register event register. Extended event Event in te STTus:EESR? register instrument (2) Extended event Masks extended STTus:EESE STTus:EESE? enable register event register. Condition Current instrument status STTus:CONDition? register Transition Extended event STTus:FILTer STTus:FILTer<x> filter occurrence conditions <x> Output queue Stores response message ll executable queues to a query. Error queue Stores error Nos. STTus:ERRor? and messages. Registers and Queues wic ffect te Status Byte Registers wic affect eac bit of te status byte are sown below Status Byte Overview of Status Byte RQS 7 6 ESB MV EES EV 1 0 MSS Bits 0, 1 and 7 Not used (always 0 ) Bit 2 EV (Error vailable) Set to 1 wen te error queue is not empty, i.e. wen an error occurs. For details, refer to page Bit 3 EES (Extended Event Summary Bit) Set to 1 wen a logical ND of te extended event register and te corresponding enable register is 1, i.e. wen an event takes place in te instrument. Refer to page Bit 4 MV (Message vailable) Set to 1 wen te output queue is not empty, i.e. wen tere is data wic is to be output wen an inquiry is made. Refer to page Standard event register: Sets bit 5 (ESB) of status byte to 1 or 0. Output queue: Sets bit 4 (MV) of status byte to 1 or 0. Extended event register: Sets bit 3 (EES) of status byte to 1 or 0. Error queue: Sets bit 2 (EV) of status byte to 1 or 0. Enable Registers Registers wic mask a bit so tat te bit does not affect te status byte, even if te bit is set to 1, are sown below. Status byte: Masks bits using te service request enable register. Standard event register: Masks bits using te standard event enable register. Extended event register: Masks bits using te extended event enable register. Writing/Reading from Registers Te *ESE command is used to set bits in te standard event enable register to 1 or 0, and te *ESR? query is used to ceck weter bits in tat register are set to 1 or 0. For details of tese commands, refer to section Bit 5 ESB (Event Summary Bit) Set to 1 wen a logical ND of te standard event register and te corresponding enable register is 1, i.e. wen an event takes place in te instrument. Refer to page Bit 6 RQS (Request Status)/MSS (Master Summary Status ) MSS is set to 1 wen a logical ND of te status byte (except for bit 6) and te service request enable register is not 0, i.e. wen te instrument is requesting service from te controller. RQS is set to 1 wen MSS canges from 0 to 1, and is cleared wen a serial poll is performed or wen MSS canges to 0. Bit Masking To mask a bit in te status byte so tat it does not cause an SRQ, set te corresponding bit of te service request enable register to 0. For example, to mask bit 2 (EV) so tat no service will be requested, even if an error occurs, set bit 2 of te service request enable register to 0. Tis can be done using te *SRE command. To query weter eac bit of te service request enable register is 1 or 0, use *SRE?. For details of te *SRE command, refer to

262 14.4 Status Report Operation of te Status Byte service request is issued wen bit 6 of te status byte becomes 1. Bit 6 becomes 1 wen any of te oter bits becomes 1 (or wen te corresponding bit in te service request enable register becomes 1 ). For example, if an event takes place and te logical OR of eac bit of te standard event register and te corresponding bit in te enable register is 1, bit 5 (ESB) will be set to 1. In tis case, if bit 5 of te service request enable register is 1, bit 6 (MSS) will be set to 1, tus requesting service from te controller. It is also possible to ceck wat type of event as occurred by reading te contents of te status byte. Reading from te Status Byte Te following two metods are provided for reading te status byte. Inquiry using te *STB? query Making an inquiry using te *STB? query sets bit 6 to MSS. Tis causes te MSS to be read. fter completion of te read-out, none of te bits in te status byte will be cleared. Serial poll Execution of a serial poll canges bit 6 to RQS. Tis causes RQS to be read. fter completion of te read-out, only RQS is cleared. Using a serial poll, it is not possible to read MSS. Clearing te Status Byte No metod is provided for forcibly clearing all te bits in te status byte. Bits wic are cleared are sown below. Wen an inquiry is made using te *STB? query No bit is cleared. Wen a serial poll is performed Only te RQS bit is cleared. Wen te *CLS command is received Wen te *CLS command is received, te status byte itself is not cleared, but te contents of te standard event register (wic affects te bits in te status byte) are cleared. s a result, te corresponding bits in te status byte are cleared, except bit 4 (MV), since te output queue cannot be emptied by te *CLS command. However, te output queue will also be cleared if te *CLS command is received just after a program message terminator Standard Event Register Overview of te Standard Event Register PON URQ CME EXE DDE QYE RQC OPC Bit 7 PON (Power ON) Bit 7 PON (Power ON) Set to 1 wen power is turned ON Bit 6 URQ (User Request) Not used (always 0 ) Bit 5 CME (Command Error) Set to 1 wen te command syntax is incorrect. Examples: Incorrectly spelled command name; 9 used in octal data. Bit 4 EXE (Execution Error) Set to 1 wen te command syntax is correct but te command cannot be executed in te current state. Examples: Parameters are outside te setting range: an attempt is made to make a ard copy during acquisition. Bit 3 DDE (Device Dependent Error) Set to 1 wen execution of te command is not possible due to an internal problem in te instrument tat is not a command error or an execution error. Bit 2 QYE (Query Error) Set to 1 if te output queue is empty or if te data is missing even after a query as been sent. Examples: No response data; data is lost due to an overflow in te output queue. Bit 1 RQC (Request Control) Not used (always 0 ) Bit 0 OPC (Operation Complete) Set to 1 wen te operation designated by te *OPC command as been completed. Bit Masking To mask a bit in te standard event register so tat it does not cause bit 5 (ESB) of te status byte to cange, set te corresponding bit in te standard event enable register to 0. For example, to mask bit 2 (QYE) so tat ESB will not be set to 1, even if a query error occurs, set bit 2 of te standard event enable register to 0. Tis can be done using te *ESE command. To inquire weter eac bit of te standard event enable register is 1 or 0, use te *ESE?. For details of te *ESE command, refer to

263 Communication Commands 2 (System of Commands Complying to te IEEE Standard) 14.4 Status Report Operation of te Standard Event Register Te standard event register is provided for eigt different kinds of event wic can occur inside te instrument. Bit 5 (ESB) of te status byte is set to 1 wen any of te bits in tis register becomes 1 (or wen te corresponding bit of te standard event enable register becomes 1 ). Examples 1. query error occurs. 2. Bit 2 (QYE) is set to Bit 5 (ESB) of te status byte is set to 1 if bit 2 of te standard event enable register is 1. Reading from te Standard Event Register Te contents of te standard event register can be read by te *ESR command. fter completion of te read-out, te register will be cleared. Clearing te Standard Event Register Te standard event register is cleared in te following tree cases. Wen te contents of te standard event register are read using *ESR? Wen te *CLS command is received Wen power is turned ON again It is also possible to ceck wat type of event as occurred inside te instrument by reading te contents of te standard event register Extended Event Register Reading te extended event register tells you weter canges in te condition register (reflecting internal conditions) ave occurred. transition filter can be applied wic allows you to decide wic events are reported to te extended event register. FILTer<x> 16 Condition register 15 :STTus:CONDition? PO3 POV3 OVR3 PO2 POV2 OVR2 PO1 POV1 OVR1 SRB FOV OVRS ITM ITG UPD Transition filter :STTus:FILTer<x> {RISE FLL BOTH NEVer} Extended event register :STTus:EESR? Te meaning of eac bit of te condition register is as follows. Bit 0 UPD (Updating) Set to 1 during updating of measurement data. Bit 1 ITG (Integrate busy) Set to 1 during integration. (See figure below) Bit 2 ITM (Integrate timer busy) Set to 1 during te integration timer is being operated. (See figure on te next page) Bit 3 OVRS ( results overflow) Set to 1 wen te integration results of overflow. (Display sows of ) Bit 4 FOV (Frequency over) Set to 1 wen te frequency lies outside te measurement range (Display sows ErrLo, ErrHi or FrqEr. Bit 5 SRB (Store/Recall busy) Set to 1 wile storing or recalling is in progress. Bit 6 OVR1 (Element 1; measured data over) Set to 1 wen te measurement/computed data of element 1 overflow, or wen an error occurs. (Display sown of, ol, PFErr or deger ) Bit 7 POV1 (Element 1; voltage peak over) Set to 1 wen te voltage value of element 1 exceeds te peak value. Bit 8 PO1 (Element 1; current peak over) Set to 1 wen te current value of element 1 exceeds te peak value. Bit 9 OVR2 (Element 2; measured data over) Set to 1 wen te measurement/computed data of element 2 overflow, or wen an error occurs. (Display sown of, ol, PFErr or deger ) Bit 10 POV2 (Element 2; voltage peak over) Set to 1 wen te voltage value of element 2 exceeds te peak value. Bit 11 PO2 (Element 2; current peak over) Set to 1 wen te current value of element 2 exceeds te peak value. Bit 12 OVR3 (Element 3; measured data over) Set to 1 wen te measurement/computed data of element 3 overflow, or wen an error occurs. (Display sown of, ol, PFErr or deger ) Bit 13 POV3 (Element 3; voltage peak over) Set to 1 wen te voltage value of element 3 exceeds te peak value. Bit 14 PO3 (Element 1; current peak over) Set to 1 wen te current value of element 3 exceeds te peak value. 14 Te transition filter is applied to eac bit of te condition register seperately, and can be selected from te following. Note tat te numbering of te bits used in te filter setting differs from te actual bit number (1 to 16 vs. 0 to 15)

264 14.4 Status Report Manual integration mode Standard integration mode Continuous integration mode Integration Integration Integration Integration Timer preset time Timer preset Timer preset time time Timer preset time Start Stop Reset Start Stop Reset Start Stop Reset ITG ITM ITG ITM ITG ITM Wen te elapsed integration time reaces te preset integration time, data will be reset automatically and te contact status will cange. Rise Te bit of te extended event register becomes 1 wen te bit of te condition register canges from 0 to 1. Fall Te bit of te extended event register becomes 1 wen te bit of te condition register canges from 1 to 0. Bot Te bit of te extended event register becomes 1 wen te bit of te condition register canges from 0 to 1, or from 1 to 0. Never Te bit of te extended event register is disabled and always Output Queue and Error Queue Overview of te Output Queue Te output queue is provided to store response messages to queries. For example, wen te MESure[:NORMal]:VLue? query is sent to request output of te acquired waveform, te response data will be stored in te output queue until it is read out. Te example below sows tat data is stored record by record in te output queue, and is read out oldest item first, newest item last. Te output queue is emptied in te following cases (in addition to wen read-out is performed). Wen a new message is received from te controller Wen dead lock occurs (page 14-5) Wen a device clear command (DCL or SDC) is received Wen power is turned ON again Te output queue cannot be emptied using te *CLS command. To see weter te output queue is empty or not, ceck bit 4 (MV) of te status byte. D1 D2 D1 D2 D1 Overview of te Error Queue Te error queue stores te error No. and message wen an error occurs. For example, wen te built-in battery as run out, an error occurs and its error No. (901) and message Backup Failure will be stored in te error queue. Te contents of te error queue can be read using te STTus:ERRor? query. s wit te output queue, messages are read oldest first, newest last (refer to te previous page). If te error queue becomes full, te final message will be replaced by message 350, Queue overflow. Te error queue is emptied in te following cases (in addition to wen read-out is performed). Wen te *CLS command is received Wen power is turned ON again To see weter te error queue is empty or not, ceck bit 2 (EV) of te status byte

265 Communication Commands 2 (System of Commands Complying to te IEEE Standard) 14.5 Before Programming Environment Model: IBM-compatible PC Language: Visual Basic Ver5.0 Professional Edition or later. GP-IB board: T-GPIB/TNT IEEE by National Instruments. Settings on Visual Basic Standard modules used: Niglobal.bas Vbib-32.bas WT210/WT230 Settings GP-IB address Te sample programs given in tis capter use a GP-IB address of 1 for te WT210/WT230. Set te GP-IB address to 1 according to te procedures described in section

266 14.6 Sample Program Image 14-50

267 Communication Commands 2 (System of Commands Complying to te IEEE Standard) 14.7 Sample Program (Initialization, Error, and Execution Functions) Option Explicit Dim StartFlag s Integer 'Start Flag Dim addr s Integer 'GPIB ddress Dim Timeout s Integer 'Timeout Dim Dev s Integer 'Device ID(GPIB) Dim term s String 'Terminator Dim Query(1100) s String 'Query String Dim Dummy s Integer Private Function InitGpib() s Integer Dim eos s Integer Dim eot s Integer Dim brd s Integer Dim sts s Integer eos = &HC0 eot = 1 term = Cr(10) Timeout = T10s brd = ilfind("gpib0") If (brd < 0) Ten GoTo GPIBError End If Dev = ildev(0, addr, 0, Timeout, eot, eos) If (Dev < 0) Ten GoTo GPIBError End If sts = ilsic(brd) If (sts < 0) Ten Call DisplayGPIBError(sts, "ilsic") InitGpib = 1 Exit Function End If InitGpib = 0 Exit Function 'EOS 'EOI 'GPIB Board ID 'Terminator = LF 'EOI = Enable 'Timeout = 10s 'Set IFC GPIBError: Call DisplayGPIBError(sts, "ilsic") InitGpib = 1 End Function Private Sub DisplayGPIBError(ByVal sts s Integer, ByVal msg s String) Dim wrn s String Dim ers s String Dim ern s Integer If (sts nd TIMO) Ten wrn = "Time out" + Cr(13) Else wrn = "" End If If (sts nd EERR) Ten ern = iberr If (ern = EDVR) Ten ers = "EDVR:System error" ElseIf (ern = ECIC) Ten ers = "ECIC:Function requires GPIB board to be CIC" ElseIf (ern = ENOL) Ten ers = "ENOL:No Listeners on te GPIB" ElseIf (ern = EDR) Ten ers = "EDR:GPIB board not addressed correctly" ElseIf (ern = ERG) Ten ers = "ERG:Invalid argument to function call" ElseIf (ern = ESC) Ten ers = "ESC:GPIB board not System Controller as required" ElseIf (ern = EBO) Ten ers = "EBO:I/O operation aborted(timeout)" ElseIf (ern = ENEB) Ten ers = "ENEB:Nonexistent GPIB board" ElseIf (ern = EDM) Ten ers = "EDM:DM error" ElseIf (ern = EOIP) Ten ers = "EOIP:I/O operation started before previous operation completed" ElseIf (ern = ECP) Ten ers = "ECP:No capability for intended operation" ElseIf (ern = EFSO) Ten ers = "EFSO:File system operation error" ElseIf (ern = EBUS) Ten ers = "EBUS:GPIB bus error" ElseIf (ern = ESTB) Ten ers = "ESTB:Serial poll status byte queue overflow"

268 14.7 Sample Program (Initialization, Error, and Execution Functions) ElseIf (ern = ESRQ) Ten ers = "ESRQ:SRQ remains asserted" ElseIf (ern = ETB) Ten ers = "ETB:Te return buffer is full" ElseIf (ern = ELCK) Ten ers = "ELCK:ddress or board is locked" Else ers = "" End If Else ers = "" End If MsgBox ("Status No. " + Str(sts) + Cr(13) + wrn + "Error No. " + Str(ern) + Cr(13) + ers + Cr(13) + msg), vbexclamation, "Error!" Call ibonl(dev, 0) Dev = -1 End Sub Private Sub Command1_Click() Dim sts s Integer If (StartFlag = 1) Ten Exit Sub End If StartFlag = 1 Text1.Text = "STRT" List1.Clear Dummy = DoEvents() sts = GpibNormal 'Run Sample1(GPIB) Get Normal Data If (sts = 0) Ten Text1.Text = "END" Else Text1.Text = "ERROR" End If StartFlag = 0 End Sub Private Sub Command2_Click() Dim sts s Integer If (StartFlag = 1) Ten Exit Sub End If StartFlag = 1 Text1.Text = "STRT" List1.Clear Dummy = DoEvents() sts = GpibHarmonics 'Run Sample2(GPIB) Get Harmonics Data If (sts = 0) Ten Text1.Text = "END" Else Text1.Text = "ERROR" End If StartFlag = 0 End Sub Private Sub Command3_Click() Dim sts s Integer If (StartFlag = 1) Ten Exit Sub End If StartFlag = 1 Text1.Text = "STRT" List1.Clear List1.ddItem "NOT MKE" Text1.Text = "END" StartFlag = 0 End Sub Private Sub Command4_Click() Dim sts s Integer If (StartFlag = 1) Ten Exit Sub End If StartFlag = 1 Text1.Text = "STRT" List1.Clear List1.ddItem "NOT MKE" Text1.Text = "END" StartFlag = 0 End Sub

269 Communication Commands 2 (System of Commands Complying to te IEEE Standard) 14.7 Sample Program (Initialization, Error, and Execution Functions) Private Sub Command5_Click() Dim sts s Integer If (StartFlag = 1) Ten Exit Sub End If StartFlag = 1 Text1.Text = "STRT" List1.Clear List1.ddItem "NOT MKE" Text1.Text = "END" StartFlag = 0 End Sub Private Sub Command6_Click() Dim sts s Integer If (StartFlag = 1) Ten Exit Sub End If StartFlag = 1 Text1.Text = "STRT" List1.Clear List1.ddItem "NOT MKE" Text1.Text = "END" StartFlag = 0 End Sub Private Sub Form_Load() StartFlag = 0 'Clear Start Flag Dev = -1 'Clear device id addr = 1 'GPIB ddress = 1 Command1.Caption = "Sample1(GPIB)" + Cr(13) + "Get Normal Data" Command2.Caption = "Sample2(GPIB)" + Cr(13) + "Get Harmonics Data" Text1.Text = "" End Sub

270 14.8 Sample Program (Output of Normal Measurement Data) Sample1(GPIB) Get Normal Data Private Function GpibNormal() s Integer Dim msg s String 'Command buffer Dim qry s String 'Query buffer Dim sts s Integer Dim item s Integer Dim comma s Integer Dim lengt s Integer Dim cnt s Integer term = Cr$(10) msg = Space$(100) qry = Space$(200) 'terminator List1.ddItem "Now Initializing. Wait a moment." Dummy = DoEvents() sts = InitGpib If (sts <> 0) Ten GpibNormal = 1 Exit Function End If 'Initialize te settings msg = "*RST" + term sts = ilwrt(dev, msg, Len(msg)) If (sts < 0) Ten GoTo GPIBError End If 'Set te measurement condition msg = "SMPLE:HOLD OFF" + term sts = ilwrt(dev, msg, Len(msg)) If (sts < 0) Ten GoTo GPIBError End If msg = "MODE RMS" + term sts = ilwrt(dev, msg, Len(msg)) If (sts < 0) Ten GoTo GPIBError End If msg = "FILTER OFF" + term sts = ilwrt(dev, msg, Len(msg)) If (sts < 0) Ten GoTo GPIBError End If msg = "LFILTER OFF" + term sts = ilwrt(dev, msg, Len(msg)) If (sts < 0) Ten GoTo GPIBError End If msg = "SCLING OFF;VERGING OFF" + term sts = ilwrt(dev, msg, Len(msg)) If (sts < 0) Ten GoTo GPIBError End If 'Set te measurement range msg = "VOLTGE:RNGE 150V" + term sts = ilwrt(dev, msg, Len(msg)) If (sts < 0) Ten GoTo GPIBError End If msg = "CURRENT:RNGE 5" + term sts = ilwrt(dev, msg, Len(msg)) If (sts < 0) Ten GoTo GPIBError End If 'Initialize GPIB 'Initialize te settings 'Send Command 'Hold off 'Measurment Mode = RMS 'Frequency Filter off 'Line Filter off 'Scaling & veraging off 'Voltage range = 150V 'Current range = 5 'For measure te voltage frequency of element1, set function and element of displayc. msg = "DISPLY3: VHZ;ELEMENT 1" + term sts = ilwrt(dev, msg, Len(msg)) If (sts < 0) Ten GoTo GPIBError End If 14-54

271 Communication Commands 2 (System of Commands Complying to te IEEE Standard) 14.8 Sample Program (Output of Normal Measurement Data) 'Set te communication output items '1. V//W -> on, oters -> off msg = "MESURE:ITEM:PRESET NORML" + term sts = ilwrt(dev, msg, Len(msg)) If (sts < 0) Ten GoTo GPIBError End If '2. Element1 VHz -> on msg = "MESURE:ITEM:VHZ:ELEMENT1 ON" + term sts = ilwrt(dev, msg, Len(msg)) If (sts < 0) Ten GoTo GPIBError End If 'Set te transition filter used to detect te completion of te data updating msg = "STTUS:FILTER1 FLL" + term 'Falling edge of bit0(upd) sts = ilwrt(dev, msg, Len(msg)) If (sts < 0) Ten GoTo GPIBError End If Sleep 1000 List1.Clear 'Read and display te measurement data (It is repeated 10 times in tis program) For cnt = 1 To 10 'Clear te extended event register (Read and tras te response) msg = "STTUS:EESR?" + term sts = ilwrt(dev, msg, Len(msg)) sts = ilrd(dev, qry, Len(qry)) 'Wait for te completion of te data updating msg = "COMMUNICTE:WIT 1" + term sts = ilwrt(dev, msg, Len(msg)) If (sts < 0) Ten GoTo GPIBError End If 'Read out te measurement data msg = "MESURE:NORML:VLUE?" + term sts = ilwrt(dev, msg, Len(msg)) If (sts < 0) Ten GoTo GPIBError End If sts = ilrd(dev, qry, Len(qry)) If (sts < 0) Ten GoTo GPIBError End If 'Extract items tat are separated by commas(,) from te received data List1.ddItem "Measurement - " + CStr(cnt) List1.ListIndex = List1.ListIndex + 1 For item = 1 To 13 lengt = Len(qry) comma = InStr(qry, ",") If (comma = 0) Ten comma = InStr(qry, term) If (comma = 0) Ten Exit For Query(item) = Left(qry, comma - 1) If item < 10 Ten List1.ddItem " " + CStr(item) + " " + Query(item) Else List1.ddItem CStr(item) + " " + Query(item) End If qry = Mid(qry, comma + 1) List1.ListIndex = List1.ListIndex + 1 Next item List1.ddItem "" List1.ListIndex = List1.ListIndex + 1 qry = Space$(200) Dummy = DoEvents() Next cnt 14 List1.ddItem " ll end" List1.ListIndex = List1.ListIndex + 1 Call ibonl(dev, 0) GpibNormal = 0 Exit Function GPIBError: Call DisplayGPIBError(sts, msg) GpibNormal = 1 End Function

272 14.8 Sample Program (Output of Normal Measurement Data) 14-56

273 Communication Commands 2 (System of Commands Complying to te IEEE Standard) 14.9 Sample Program (Output of Harmonic Measurement Data) Sample2(GPIB) Get Harmonics Data Private Function GpibHarmonics() s Integer Dim msg s String 'Command buffer Dim qry s String 'Query buffer Dim sts s Integer Dim cnt s Integer Dim item s Integer Dim comma s Integer Dim lengt s Integer term = Cr$(10) msg = Space$(100) qry = Space$(1000) 'terminator List1.ddItem "Now Initializing. Wait a moment." Dummy = DoEvents() sts = InitGpib If (sts <> 0) Ten GpibHarmonics = 1 Exit Function End If 'Initialize te settings msg = "*RST" + term sts = ilwrt(dev, msg, Len(msg)) If (sts < 0) Ten GoTo GPIBError End If 'Set te measurement condition msg = "SMPLE:RTE 500MS" + term sts = ilwrt(dev, msg, Len(msg)) If (sts < 0) Ten GoTo GPIBError End If 'Set te measurement range msg = "VOLTGE:RNGE 150V" + term sts = ilwrt(dev, msg, Len(msg)) If (sts < 0) Ten GoTo GPIBError End If msg = "CURRENT:RNGE 5" + term sts = ilwrt(dev, msg, Len(msg)) If (sts < 0) Ten GoTo GPIBError End If 'Initialize GPIB 'Initialize te settings 'Send Command 'Update rate = 500ms 'Voltage range = 150V 'Current range = 5 'Setting related to armonics analize 'Object element = 1, PLL source = V1, Computation metod of THD = IEC msg = "HRMONICS:ELEMENT 1;SYNCHRONIZE V,1;THD IEC;STTE ON" + term sts = ilwrt(dev, msg, Len(msg)) 'Send Command If (sts < 0) Ten GoTo GPIBError End If 'Set te communication output items '1. ll function -> off msg = "MESURE:HRMONICS:ITEM:PRESET CLER" + term sts = ilwrt(dev, msg, Len(msg)) If (sts < 0) Ten GoTo GPIBError End If '2. Necessary function -> on msg = "MESURE:HRMONICS:ITEM:SYNCHRONIZE ON;THD ON; ON" + term sts = ilwrt(dev, msg, Len(msg)) If (sts < 0) Ten GoTo GPIBError End If 14 'Set te transition filter used to detect te completion of te data updating msg = "STTUS:FILTER1 FLL" + term 'Falling edge of bit0(upd) sts = ilwrt(dev, msg, Len(msg)) If (sts < 0) Ten GoTo GPIBError End If 14-57

274 14.9 Sample Program (Output of Harmonic Measurement Data) Sleep 1000 List1.Clear 'Read and display te armonics data (It is repeated 10 times in tis program) For cnt = 1 To 10 'Clear te extended event register (Read and tras te response) msg = "STTUS:EESR?" + term sts = ilwrt(dev, msg, Len(msg)) If (sts < 0) Ten GoTo GPIBError End If sts = ilrd(dev, qry, Len(qry)) 'Receive Query If (sts < 0) Ten GoTo GPIBError End If 'Wait for te completion of te data updating msg = "COMMUNICTE:WIT 1" + term sts = ilwrt(dev, msg, Len(msg)) If (sts < 0) Ten GoTo GPIBError End If 'Read out te armonics data msg = "MESURE:HRMONICS:VLUE?" + term sts = ilwrt(dev, msg, Len(msg)) If (sts < 0) Ten GoTo GPIBError End If sts = ilrd(dev, qry, Len(qry)) If (sts < 0) Ten GoTo GPIBError End If 'Extract items tat are separated by commas(,) from te received data List1.ddItem "Measurement - " + CStr(cnt) List1.ListIndex = List1.ListIndex + 1 For item = 1 To 53 lengt = Len(qry) comma = InStr(qry, ",") If (comma = 0) Ten comma = InStr(qry, term) Query(item) = Left(qry, comma - 1) If (item = 1) Ten List1.ddItem "FREQ (V1)" + " " + Query(item) ElseIf (item = 2) Ten List1.ddItem "1 THD " + " " + Query(item) ElseIf (item = 3) Ten List1.ddItem "1 Total " + " " + Query(item) ElseIf (item = 4) Ten List1.ddItem "1 Or.1 " + " " + Query(item) ElseIf (item < 13) Ten List1.ddItem " " + CStr(item - 3) + " " + Query(item) Else List1.ddItem " " + CStr(item - 3) + " " + Query(item) End If qry = Mid(qry, comma + 1) List1.ListIndex = List1.ListIndex + 1 Next item List1.ddItem "" List1.ListIndex = List1.ListIndex + 1 qry = Space$(1000) Dummy = DoEvents() Next cnt List1.ddItem " ll end" List1.ListIndex = List1.ListIndex + 1 Call ibonl(dev, 0) GpibHarmonics = 0 Exit Function GPIBError: Call DisplayGPIBError(sts, msg) GpibHarmonics = 1 End Function

275 Communication Commands 2 (System of Commands Complying to te IEEE Standard) 14.9 Sample Program (Output of Harmonic Measurement Data)